Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Suho didn't want to fight.

Seriously, he didn't want to.

But his sleep had been interrupted for the fifth time, and he had a rough day at work. Suho was no deity, and even Buddha would lose his temper from time to time. Why should he control himself?

Suho opened his eyes with difficulty, adjusting to the sudden brightness. He sighed loudly, stretching his arms and back. He wasn't even legally an adult, but he already felt the pains of an old man. An exhausted and irritated old man.

He already suspected who was responsible for all the noise in the morning. Only a group of rich and idiotic kids would have the energy to practice bullying at that time. He turned to the side, noticing a commotion at the desk next to his. Yeongbin — of course, who else would it be — was leaning on Beomseok's desk, staring at him like a predator. A cowardly one. His lackeys, whose names Suho didn't even remember, were surrounding the boy, laughing like a pack of hyenas with stomachaches.

Suho sighed. It looked like he wouldn't be sleeping for a while.

Trying to protect Beomseok had become part of his routine. They had never talked much, but when Yeongbin took his pranks too far, Suho got tired of standing around and intervened for the first time. From then on, he and Beomseok went from being classmates to friends. Suho wasn't a hero or anything like that, but even he couldn't stand seeing a bully taking advantage of kids weaker than him. It wasn't even in his plans to become friends with Beomseok, but when the boy chased him around and even bought him a meal, he started to grow fond of him.

It wasn't even for pity, it was just that the guy was pleasant when he wasn't shaking from head to toe.

Suho didn’t even need to get up. Usually, a shout was enough for Yeongbin and his friends to return to their seats. Despite their pose, around Suho, they were like puppies, running away and tucking their tails between their legs. So, he did just that.

“Hey, Yeongbin!” he shouted, pleased to see the surprised look on the bully’s face. “Can’t a guy sleep around here?”

Beomseok also turned to him, trying to hide a sigh of relief. Yeongbin’s lackeys looked at their leader, waiting for his next order. It was no surprise, those guys were incapable of thinking for themselves. They probably asked Yeongbin’s permission to go to the bathroom, too.

Suho prepared to lie down again, expecting the bullies to sit down like always. However, things wouldn't be so simple this time. Yeongbin glared at Suho, anger so thick in his eyes that they seemed to catch fire.

Someone got brave out of nowhere, Suho thought, straightening his posture.

Yeongbin walked up to him, stopping in front of his desk.

“You better stay out of it.” His eyes were intense, but his words sounded uncertain. He was trying to hide his fear.

Yeongbin's lackeys glared at each other, seemingly questioning their leader's sanity. Yet they stood up anyway, following their master like brainless idiots.

A wry laugh invaded Suho's lips. He also stood up, coming face to face with Yeongbin. Why were those damn teachers never in class?

“Or what?” He asked, without a hint of fear. “What's up, Yeongbin? Is all this because your parents don't pay attention to you at home?”

Yeongbin’s gaze changed, widening slightly. I think I touched a nerve.

It might be a little mean, but maybe if Suho poked him where it hurt, Yeongbin would finally learn his lesson and stop messing with Beomseok. None of the idiot trio said anything, and Yeongbin calculated his next move as if he were also looking for Suho's weak point.

Good luck to him.

“At least I have parents.” He replied, a wicked smile flooding his lips. “You fucking orphan.”

The classroom, which had been a mess until now, fell into complete silence. All the students approached the scene, shocked by Yeongbin's words. They stared anxiously, waiting for his next move as if it were an MMA fight. Even Beomseok, who had his head down, moved from his spot, looking at Suho with the most shocked expression he had ever seen on the boy’s face.

Suho had been called many things by the idiots at school. Lazy, asshole, coward, nosy, arrogant. Seriously, even his financial situation had been insulted. But his family? That was a forbidden topic, as if they knew it was the only thing capable of affecting Suho.

No one had ever been so brave and so dumb at the same time, not like Yeongbin.

Suho clenched his hands into fists. He felt his body tremble, anger invading every single bone in his body.

Control yourself. Control yourself.

He didn't want to fight. He promised his grandmother he wouldn't.

“What did you say?” Suho asked almost in a whisper. He approached Yeongbin until he was just a few inches away from him.

He hoped the threat in his voice would be enough to make Yeongbin come to his senses and shut up. But nothing was going as Suho had expected.

“Orphan. I called you an orphan.” Yeongbin’s smile grew even wider, pleased to find Suho’s weak spot after so long. “No wonder you’re always sleeping. It must be unbearable having to work just so your old grandmother doesn’t starve to death.”

Suddenly, the world went silent. Suho didn’t hear the excited screams of his classmates as his fist collided with Yeongbin’s face. He didn’t feel the hands trying to hold him back as he punched Yeongbin’s face repeatedly. He didn’t hear Beomseok begging him to stop, saying that he would kill him.

Let him die, then.

He didn't even notice when the adults arrived in the classroom, trying to pull him off Yeongbin. He kept on punching and punching that idiot's face like it was nothing. Blood started to splatter on his face, hot and sticky, but he didn't care. He wanted to taste Yeongbin's blood, to break his bones one by one, to see his desperate look of fear. The adrenaline kept him from feeling anything, even when the pain of the impact invaded his fist, even when his bones agonized with pain.

It didn't matter. Suho just needed to hurt him.

The last few hours had been a blur. All Suho remembered was being taken out of the classroom, and his grandmother’s shocked face upon seeing his condition. He didn’t even remember how he got rid of the blood, whether he did it himself or if his grandmother did it for him while he behaved like a robot. Either way, it was embarrassing.

He was sitting on a bench next to his grandmother. Waiting in the hallway as the principal prepared his sentence in the room with the locked door. He knew Yeongbin's mother was inside, screaming and preparing to murder Suho herself as soon as the door was opened.

His grandma hadn't said a word since she found him, but she didn't need to. Suho felt her disappointment, as if he had been stabbed a thousand times in the heart, slowly and painfully. He had promised, told her that he wouldn't get into fights, that he would spend his last year of school with perfect attendance and without going to the principal's office. That was all she had asked of him, something so simple that he couldn't even fulfill it.

He broke his promise, lost her trust.

Suho kept his head down, holding back the tears that threatened to fall. Yeongbin was wrong about one thing. It was his grandmother who should have gotten more sleep, having to take care of Suho and make sure he didn't starve to death. He didn't even care if Yeongbin spent the rest of his life in the hospital, but he bitterly regretted disappointing his grandmother.

Suddenly, the door to the principal's office opened. Suho quickly stood up, helping his grandma.

“Ahn Suho.” The director called him. “You and your guardian can enter now.”

Suho swallowed hard, shaking like a kid in trouble. And honestly, that was exactly what he was. He walked alongside his grandmother, entering the room and sitting in the chairs in front of the principal's desk. Unfortunately for him, they were right next to Yeongbin's mother, who had her arms crossed, glaring at Suho as if he had committed a massacre.

Okay, that wasn't that far from the truth.

The director coughed, sorting through some documents.

“Mrs. Ahn. What your grandson did was extremely serious. In all my years as a principal, I have never seen a student commit such a violent act.”

Liar. He knew what Yeongbin was up to with Beomseok and the other kids; he just never cared. After all, Yeongbin had two things that Suho didn't: money and power.

His grandmother stood up, giving an exaggerated bow. Suho immediately copied her, hating that she had to put in all this effort even with her back pain.

“I’m sorry, Director.” Those were her first words in hours. Suho hated that. She turned to Mrs. Jeon, repeating her bow. “I’m sorry, Mrs. Jeon. I’m deeply embarrassed, and I’ll offer to pay the hospital bills or anything else you need.”

Suho’s blood ran cold. This was terrible. His grandmother barely had enough money for the two of them. How would they be able to pay Yeongbin’s extremely expensive hospital bills? He didn’t care if he was punished; he just hoped that his grandmother would come out unscathed.

“I’m sorry too,” Suho said, even though he wasn’t. At least not to Yeongbin’s mother. “This is all my fault, I’ll accept any punishment. Just please forgive my grandma. She had nothing to do with this.”

His grandmother slapped him on the head, and Suho glared at her in offense. Come on, he was just defending her.

Yeongbin's mother also stood up, looking pleased to see how they revered her and begged for her forgiveness.

Fucking rich people. They're still the same nobles who kept slaves.

“That’s enough.” Mrs. Jeon commented, and Suho sighed in relief as he saw his grandmother stand up from her bowing pose. “And don’t worry, I talked to the principal, and we have the perfect punishment for a delinquent with no future like you.”

His grandmother kept the same expression, but Suho noticed how her shoulders tensed. Even when she was disappointed, she didn’t like to see someone insulting her grandson. Suho wanted to cry again.

“First of all.” The director commented, shuffling through the documents, he found more interesting than the conversation in front of him. “I must warn you that this aggravated assault will be on your academic record.”

He had expected this, but it still sucked. Suho hadn't even planned on going to college, but having something like this on his record would make it hard to even get a job. It was annoying that Yeongbin's record remained clean even after his assaults, while Suho would never be free from the consequences.

“And given the severity of what happened, I'm afraid a suspension and even community service won't be enough. Ms. Jeon and I have already decided on your punishment. You will be expelled.”

“What?” Suho and his grandmother asked at the same time.

An expulsion? What school would accept him after an expulsion for aggravated assault?

“Sir, please,” his grandmother pleaded, and Suho hated how helpless her voice sounded. “My grandson made a mistake, but he’s a good boy. Please don’t expel him.”

Yeongbin's mother laughed, a wry laugh that seemed to spread venom.

“Really? None of this would have happened if you had raised that boy properly. He grew up without parents; of course, he would end up violent. You shouldn't expect anything from children like that.”

Suho bit his tongue, stopping himself from saying anything stupid. It was no surprise that Yeongbin was like that; he was an exact copy of that woman. He was just uglier and dumber than her.

“I beg you! I'll do anything, I-”

“I’m sorry, Mrs. Ahn, but it’s already been decided. And with something like that on your record, there’s only one school in the region that would accept you.” The principal commented, and he even seemed a little relieved to get rid of Suho. “Eunjang.”

Suho’s eyes widened, and his grandmother held her breath. Eunjang? Suho might be strong, but he didn’t have the energy to deal with Eunjang’s crazy delinquents. If the school accepted him, it meant that Suho’s violent act was just an ordinary day for them. Yeongbin was nothing compared to the bullies there.

His grandmother began to cry, desperate tears streaming down her cheeks. Suho felt his heart tighten. He couldn't show fear; the least he could do was be strong for his grandmother. Reassure her that he would be okay.

He slowly placed his hand on her back, hoping his caress would calm her down. The director went back to his papers, not caring that an elderly lady was crying in front of him. Yeongbin's mother smiled once more, yawning as if the conversation had made her bored.

Suho hated them. He hated them all.

I hope Yeongbin sleeps for a long, long time.

The ride home was completely silent. Suho even thought his grandmother was giving him the silent treatment, but she must have been more anxious than he was. They arrived home, and as soon as his grandmother opened the door, he knew he had to say something.

“I'm sorry.” Suho broke the silence, his voice coming out more fragile than he intended.

His grandmother stopped walking, staring at him in a way she had never done. Suho had seen her angry at him before — and she was scary — but her expression wasn’t anger. It was pure weariness, a quiet disappointment. Suho preferred the anger, preferred her yelling at him, hitting him in the head. Anything other than staring at him in disappointment.

“You promised to behave. Why did you do that?”

“I was going to, I swear!” He was behaving. But Yeongbin had to ruin everything. “Yeongbin started messing with my friend, I just defended him.”

“And you had to almost kill him!?” The tone of her voice increased, and Suho felt relieved to recognize the anger present there.

“I… I wasn’t going to…” Suho took a deep breath. It was better to tell the truth. “I wasn’t going to fight, but then he insulted my family. He badmouthed you, I couldn’t just stand by and do nothing!”

His grandmother sighed. She walked over to Suho, holding his hands tightly. Even though she was angry, she wanted to comfort her grandson. Suho didn’t deserve someone like her.

“Suho, listen to me,” she said patiently. “There are people in life who will hurt you, and it’s okay to be angry. But you have to control yourself. People like us can’t fight back.”

“But that’s unfair!” Suho felt like a stubborn brat, but he was so tired.

Why didn't people like him have the right to fight back? Why could Yeongbin do whatever he wanted, while Suho had to stay silent and obedient?

“Life is unfair, my love. And it always will be for us.” She ran her hand over his cheek, and Suho closed his eyes, letting the tears finally fall. “We must get used to living like this.”

Suho remained silent, allowing himself to be comforted by his grandmother. He had almost killed a boy, but she still hugged him as if he were an innocent child. Suho felt wronged by the world, but eternally grateful for his grandmother.

“You… think my parents are disappointed?” It was stupid. He wasn’t a kid, his parents were dead. They didn’t feel pride or disappointment.

But the childish and hopeful part of Suho secretly wished that they were alive somewhere. That they were watching his every step, even the wrong ones. Thinking like that brought some peace to his heart, no matter how silly it was.

“My love… They would be proud of you for standing up for yourself.” His grandmother replied, hugging him tightly.

Suho cried on his grandmother’s shoulder, something he hadn’t done in many years. A feeling of nostalgia washed over him, and he suddenly wished he were a child again. It was his graduation year, and next year, Suho would be a fully-fledged adult. He would never say it out loud, but despite all his responsibilities, he didn’t feel ready to grow up at all.

“Thank you, Grandma. And I'm sorry, I promise I'll behave this time.”

“I know you will, my dear. I know you will.”

Suho only entered his room after making sure there were no tears on his face. He didn't feel like being teased by Yeongi, even if the girl took it easy on such a crazy day.

To his surprise, Yeongi wasn’t alone in his room. Beomseok was standing next to her, holding a few bags that were full of food. Great, Suho was hungry again.

“Did I interrupt a meeting?” he asked, his playful smile returning to his face.

The teenagers turned to him and didn't even try to hide their concern.

“Suho! Dude, I thought that rich kid's mom murdered you!” Yeongi shouted, inspecting him as if looking for bruises.

“I wish, she thought you were punishment enough for me.” She punched his arm, hard enough to make it red. “Ouch! Did you need to do that?”

“Dumbass, I almost died of worry.”

“And now you're trying to kill me? What a great friend you are.”

“I should have, what were you thinking!?” Despite his attempts at a joke, there was no smile on Yeongi's face. She must not have even slept, anxious to find out what had happened to her friend.

Suho sighed, suddenly feeling guilty.

“My bad. But you don't need to worry, I'm fine. I swear.”

She didn't seem to believe his words, but at least she stopped looking at him like he was a ghost.

“Suho.” Beomseok interrupted, clearing his throat. “I… I wanted to apologize. This all happened because of me.”

The boy lowered his head, clearly filled with guilt.

“Hey, relax, this isn't your fault. It's that asshole Yeongbin's fault. Well… and my lack of control.”

“I would have done worse! That asshole deserved it.” Yeongi protested, as if she hadn't been criticizing him minutes ago.

“Shut up, brat, you don't even know what he said.”

“Beomseok told me.” She puffed out her chest proudly, and Suho glared at Beomseok angrily for the first time.

“Well… She insisted a lot.” The boy confessed, avoiding Suho's gaze at all costs.

Honestly, it wasn't like Suho was hiding the fight from Yeongi. He just didn't want to drag the girl into his problems. She was so young and had already been through so much; Suho just wanted to be her haven. Besides, after living with him and his grandmother for so long, she was practically his little sister, and it was his duty as an older brother to protect her. Even though Yeongi didn't need any protection at all.

“What's done is done. Now, Beomseok, what you have there, buddy?” Suho changed the subject, his stomach already growling.

He would kill for some kimchi.

“Ah. Well, you took a while, I figured you'd be hungry, so… I brought food.”

“Now, you're the best friend of all! Learn from him, Yeongi.” The girl rolled her eyes, not interested in arguing.

Beomseok placed the bags on the floor table in the corner of the room, and Suho quickly sat down. He began to open the bags in a hurry, separating all the contents. The smell was wonderful, and Suho took a huge bite of the kimchi he had been dying to eat. He even forgot about his problems for a moment.

“So Suho… What did they say?” Yeah, just for a moment.

Suho took a deep breath, knowing there was no way they could handle the news well.

“Look… It turns out I was expelled.”

“Expelled!?”

“And I'll be transferred to Eunjang.”

“Eunjang!?” His friends shouted together, and Suho continued eating, giving them time to get used to the news.

“Yeah… Surprise?” He didn’t even know how to joke about the situation. Suho wasn’t a coward, but he was afraid of getting hit like anyone with a survival instinct.

Beomseok looked about to hyperventilate, sweat dripping down his forehead as if he could already see Suho in a hospital bed. Yeongi was even worse; she had the look of someone who was already in mourning, preparing the funeral of her beloved and dead friend.

“Hey, I'm not going to die! I've dealt with worse than teenage gangster wannabes.”

It was true. He still had nightmares about that crazy man, Gilsoo.

“That’s terrible,” Beomseok commented, while Yeongi remained strangely silent.

Suho knew he needed to calm his friends down, he was already freaking out enough for both of them. As soon as he saw his guitar, leaning on the floor next to some junk, a spark of hope lit up in his heart.

“Hey, not everything is lost. I still have a band, and we've been training hard this year. I'm going to crush the competition, no doubt.”

Suho was passionate about music. More than that, music was his greatest passion. His room was almost a museum, with band posters all over the walls, collections of CDs from different musicians, and albums that hadn't been sold in 20 years. He had worked hard to save up the money and buy each of these things with his blood, sweat, and tears.

Suho could go to the worst school in the world, have a stain on his academic record, get beaten up by bullies, and lose his dignity. As long as he had the music, nothing was lost.

But to his surprise, his friends didn't smile. Their stress seemed to increase.

“Suho, listen,” Beomseok said, approaching Suho as if he were a wild animal. “I didn’t come here just to apologize and bring you food. The guys in the band… They said they won’t be participating anymore.”

Suho stopped eating. Suddenly, the world seemed silent again.

“I'm sorry… They said they can't go out with someone who has a serious assault record. Their parents don't want them around you.”

Suho stared at the food in front of him, feeling his stomach churn. He had never lost his appetite, but at that moment, he wanted to get away from the food as quickly as possible. The silence stretched for a few minutes before Beomseok spoke again.

“I should go, it's getting late. My dad will be mad if I'm not home.” The boy practically ran out the door, wanting to escape the awkward situation.

Suho didn't even say goodbye, but he didn't have time to feel bad about it. Yeongi also silently left the room, as if she knew he needed to be alone.

Suho didn't know how long he had been sitting on his bed, staring at the Queen band poster stuck perfectly on his wall, which seemed to take pity on him.

It was like a realization had sunk in. He didn't have a band anymore. It was his senior year, his last chance to compete in the school music competition. And he didn't have a band anymore. To make matters worse, registration was closing soon, and it was practically impossible to form a band in such a short amount of time.

Suho failed. He failed his grandmother, he failed Yeongi, and he failed himself. He always messed up why was he surprised? Damn, did he had to attack Yeongbin? When would he learn that people like him shouldn't defend themselves? He hated this.

If he had been born rich, he wouldn’t even have to worry. His grandmother would have had everything she needed, and she wouldn’t even have to work hard. She lived a life full of worries, and Suho couldn’t even give her a few last years of rest?

Suddenly, his door opened. Yeongi entered without making a sound, sitting next to Suho without saying a word. She rested her head on his shoulder, and Suho held back the stubborn tears that insisted on falling. He had cried more in the last few hours than he had in the last few years.

Not only did he have to take care of his grandmother, but he had to take care of Yeongi as well. Suho was all she had, his grandmother couldn't take care of them forever. Suho couldn't even take care of himself, but a life depended on him.

It was too much.

“I'm sorry, Yeongi.” He whispered, and the girl held his hands tightly.

“Why are you apologizing?”

“Because I messed up everything. I should take care of you and Grandma, but I can't even do that.”

“Suho.” Yeongi held his face, forcing him to look at her. “The only person you should take care of is yourself.”

“But-”

“What? You think I can't take care of myself?” She smiled, and Suho shook his head.

He knew better than anyone that Yeongi could take care of herself. He just didn't want her to have to.

“Yeongi... Why don't you play with me?” He asked. “I know you love music as much as I do.”

Suho still remembered Yeongi's face when she first saw his guitar. She was enchanted, and that was when Suho realized how young she was. He had taught her how to play and sing himself, and it was his proudest moment. Seeing the smile on Yeongi's face every time she hit a note was priceless.

“You know I can’t.” She sighed, her hands moving down to his shoulders. “I feel bad enough living with you and Grandma. The least I owe you is a steady job.”

Suho sighed, almost laughing at the irony. They were more alike than they cared to admit. Maybe in another life, they were siblings.

“You know grandma doesn't care, right? She and I would take care of you even if you were a lazy brat with no future.” Yeongi slapped him lightly, unable to hold back her laughter.

“I know. But I do.”

And Suho didn't protest. After all, he felt the same way.

That night, they slept in the same bed. Suho felt like a child again, hugging Yeongi like she was his stuffed animal. The girl didn't even complain, dropping her tough pose to snuggle with her friend.

“I don't want to play anymore!” Suho shouted, hiding under the table.

His father sighed, bending down until he could see the boy.

“Why not Suho?” His voice was deep, but it always sounded gentle.

“Because I always make mistakes! I don't want to make mistakes!” Suho hugged his knees, hiding his face so his father wouldn't see his tears.

“Look, son… If you want to learn, you need to make mistakes.”

Suho didn't respond, feeling especially stubborn.

“Look, I wasn’t always good. Do you want to know what your mom told me when I played for her for the first time?” Suho raised his head carefully, curious about the answer. — “Hey, that was the worst song I’ve ever heard!”

His father perfectly imitated his mother's tone, a thin but frightening voice when angered. Suho let out a laugh before he could control himself.

“And it really was!” He heard his mother's voice, distant, provocative, but always full of affection.

“Honey, I'm teaching him a lesson here!”

Suho laughed, completely forgetting about his tears. He crawled out from under the table, walking towards his father, who was holding his guitar in his hand.

“So, you want to try again, big boy?” His father asked, pointing happily at the guitar.

Suho nodded, raising his hands to play it.

“Suho, no matter how much you fail, you have to keep trying. Do you promise?”

“I promise, Dad.”

Chapter Text

Suho stared at his reflection in the mirror, quickly fixing his hair. His eyes had dark circles, and sweat was dripping down his forehead. He had barely slept, having been anxious for the past few days for his first day of school at Eunjang.

Yeongi had helped him practice a few moves, just in case. Suho had already made up his mind: if there was a fight, all he had to do was knock his opponent down and run away without looking back. That way, he would survive and not disappoint his grandma again.

He sighed, straightening his blazer. For such a troubled school, the uniform was surprisingly stylish. Suho would spend more time admiring his reflection if he didn’t have a stomachache. Anxiety clung to him like a second skin, so he pulled his red coat over his uniform, hoping to bring comfort.

His thoughts were interrupted when his phone started ringing. Suho was thankful that he had something to distract him before he left. He picked up his phone from the bed, seeing Beomseok's name flashing on the screen.

He probably wanted to wish him good luck. Or say goodbye. Suho would miss him after being killed by bullies on his first day.

Don't be dramatic, you're not going to die.

Suho answered the call, trying to steady his shaking hands.

“Hello, Beomseok?”

“Suho!” His voice sounded relieved, as if he was afraid it was too late. “Hi. So, are you anxious?”

“Few things have made me so anxious.” He answered honestly, going to the kitchen to get some snacks. “I didn't even sleep well.”

His boss insisted that he take a day off, but Suho wouldn't sleep anyway. Besides, working made his mind focus on something else for a few hours.

“Geez, I'm so sorry, Suho.” Beomseok was silent for a few seconds, giving Suho enough time to open a package of cookies. “Look… I need to ask you a favor.”

Suho stopped before putting the first cookie in his mouth.

Damn, I can't eat in peace anymore?

“Beomseok, man… You know what I’m going through.”

“I know, I'm sorry, but… I need your help.” He sounded desperate, and Suho already started to feel empathy for him. Damn soft-hearted. “I need you to do something at Eunjang.”

“At Eunjang?”

Why the hell would Beomseok need something from Eunjang? Suho hoped he wasn't a secret gangster or anything, he had enough problems to last the whole year. Even though he feared his fate, Suho knew he had already given in to his friend.

“Okay. What do you need?” He bit the cookie, hoping the food would fill the anxious hole in his stomach.

“Listen, I don’t know if I should tell you this, but… My brother studies at Eunjang.”

Suho stopped eating again, staring at the half-eaten cookie in his hand. He sighed, swallowing it in one go and closing the package of cookies. Honestly, he should stop eating while talking; who knows if next time Yeongi would reveal that she was a spy all along?

First of all, he didn't remember Beomseok having any siblings. And even if he did, the boy's family was filthy rich, so why would his brother study at Eunjang?

“And since when do you have a brother?”

“Since a few years ago.” Years? And he didn’t think it was important to mention that? “It’s not blood-related. Our parents married… He’s just very reserved.”

Beomseok remained silent, giving Suho time to absorb the flood of new information. Okay, he and Beomseok hadn’t known each other even for a year, but why wouldn't he mention something like that? Thinking back, Suho didn't remember Beomseok talking about his family even once. Maybe it was a sensitive subject, and it was none of Suho's business. At least not until now.

“ Wait, I thought you were rich. Why does your brother study at Eunjang?”

“Well, he's a bit… Troublesome.”

Suho almost laughed in despair. Troublesome? Great, not only did he have to deal with Eunjang's delinquents and find a new band in no time, but now he also had to worry about Beomseok's crazy brother. Was life messing with him?

“Beomseok, you know I love you dude… But troublesome guys are exactly what I'm trying to avoid.” Suho started checking the materials in his backpack. Soon, he would have to leave, and the conversation with Beomseok about his troublesome not-brother was only making him more anxious.

“I know, but he's not bad. You'll understand when you meet him. You know, he's just very introverted and-”

“Beomseok, I'm going to be late. Get to the point.” Suho interrupted him. He didn't want to be rude to his friend, but he was already getting impatient.

“Okay. Look, he doesn't tell me anything that happens at school, and I get worried. I need you to keep an eye on him. You don't have to be his friend or anything, just make sure he doesn't get into trouble.”

Suho could feel a headache coming on. If he had to be responsible for one more life, he would die before he turned 20. He sighed, knowing that he wouldn't deny his friend's sincere request.

“Okay, I'll babysit. Just for you.” Suho accepted so easily that he almost regretted it instantly.

“Thank you, Suho, you're amazing! I'll make it up to you, I promise.” It was obvious he was smiling just by the tone of his voice. At least someone was happy.

“Suho!” His grandmother shouted. “You're going to be late, brat!”

“I'm coming!”

Suho started rechecking everything. His uniform, his hair, his materials — or lack thereof — seriously, he'd never cared about things like this before. He took a deep breath, stretching his body as if he were preparing for war.

“Beomseok, sorry man. I have to hang up before my grandma kills me.”

“Uh, wai-”

Suho hung up the call before listening to the rest. Whatever Beomseok needed to say, he could do after school. He tucked the phone deep into his bag, hoping that Eunjang’s delinquents would be kind enough not to steal it. Luckily, his phone was at least 5 generations out of date, so no thieves would be interested.

He put his backpack on his back and walked to the front door. His grandmother was waiting for him anxiously, running to him as soon as she saw him. She gave him a tight hug, and Suho returned it happily. She placed her hands on his face, caressing his cheeks.

“Take care, my love.”

“I will.”

“And if I find out that you got into trouble, I'll kill you myself!” She squeezed his cheeks tightly, and Suho screamed, trying to escape the attack. When she let go, he rubbed the sore area gently.

“Wow. For an old lady, you're pretty strong.”

He chuckled mischievously, and his grandmother rolled her eyes, trying to hide her smile.

“Go on, boy!”

Suho obeyed, saluting before leaving. Outside, Yeongi was waiting for him, leaning against his motorcycle. She wasn't even holding her phone, which was rare for a tech addict like her.

“Look who's here. Are you going to miss me a lot?” Suho teased, grabbing his helmet.

“As if. I came to ask you what color the flowers at your funeral will be.” She smiled, approaching him.

“It doesn't even seem like you were crying for me a while ago.”

Yeongi's face turned red, and she quickly shook her head. Suho held back his laughter, seeing the girl's effort to hide her embarrassment.

“Shut up.”

She was always like that. She acted tough and pretended not to care, but she was one of the most empathetic people Suho knew.

Suho began to put on his helmet, and Yeongi watched his every move. She sighed, deciding to say what she was planning while she waited for him.

“Suho, listen. I know things are complicated right now, but you can't give up on the competition.” She put her hands on his shoulders, looking at him determinedly. “I don't care who it is, you have to find a new band. Don't give up, okay?”

Suho froze. It was as if Yeongi knew exactly what he needed to hear. Giving up after all his effort would be pathetic. Suho couldn’t let Yeongbin, of all people, be responsible for the end of his dream. He could have failed now, made a mistake that would make his life harder. But that had never stopped him before.

Dad told me to keep trying.

“And when did I ever give up on anything?” He smiled, feeling his lost confidence return.

Yeongi smiled back proudly. She stepped aside, making room for him to pass.

Suho got on his motorcycle, getting ready to start it. Why was he so scared anyway? Damn, he was Ahn Suho, he'd faced much worse than this.

I can do it. I can do it.

I can’t do it.

The school was a complete mess. The supposed teenagers looked like they were in their 30s, and they had the ugliest faces Suho had ever seen in his entire life. They screamed and ran around like elementary school kids, but posed like gangsters.

He swallowed hard, parking his motorcycle carefully. There were other vehicles there, almost all of them bicycles, except for one motorcycle that was at least 5 times more expensive than his. Suho locked his motorcycle with the chain, hoping that if there were thieves at the school, they would choose to take the fancier and more expensive one.

He walked towards the gate, where thousands of teenagers were running past. He bumped into at least 3 guys on the way, and a brute stomped on his foot so hard that Suho felt his eyes water. Plus, the smell of sweat from teenage boys was making him almost faint. Was this a school or a war zone?

Suho sighed in relief when he reached the gate. He was ready to enter, but before he could, someone slammed the gate shut, nearly hitting him in the face. Suho glared at the person responsible for keeping him out so aggressively. It was a grumpy old man, pleased to keep out some delinquents.

His day couldn't get any worse.

“Sir, wait!” Suho called him. “Today is my first day, I need to go in!”

The old man turned to him impatiently.

“Then you should have arrived earlier. It's already time to close the gate.” The man's voice was so hoarse that it was difficult to understand his words. He probably smoked at least 2 cigarettes a day.

Not that Suho would judge him, having to live with teenage boys for so long would drive anyone crazy.

“Can’t you forgive me this time? I’m new.” Suho gave his friendliest smile, but the old man didn’t seem affected.

“No.”

The man began to walk away, and his heart raced in despair. Seriously, universe, what the fuck is your problem with me?

Had he been terrible in his past life?

“No, sir! Wait, I can clean the toilets! Wait-”

“Mr. Choi!” A third voice interrupted.

It was a short guy running up to the old man. He stopped, trying to catch his breath. The uniform was too big for him, as were his oversized glasses. Unlike the other guys, he seemed surprisingly polite.

Finally, a friendly face, Suho thought.

“What now?” The old man asked angrily, almost snorting.

The guy bowed quickly. He opened his backpack, which looked so full it must have weighed more than he did, and pulled out a few documents.

“I’m sorry to interrupt.” He handed the documents to the old man, who wasn’t interested in them. “Well, it says here that you must let new students in on the first day, as long as they’re not more than 10 minutes late. The new kid was barely 2 minutes late.”

Suho’s eyes widened. Was that guy helping him? Well, maybe he had judged Eunjang’s students too quickly. The short guy didn’t look like a criminal.

The old man snorted, not looking convinced.

“Mr. Choi, you know that denying him entry could get you in trouble.” The boy’s voice was gentle, but there was a hint of threat in it.

Suho smiled. The kid was definitely braver than his appearance led one to believe.

“That’s right, Mr. Choi, you better listen to the little guy if you don't want to get scolded.” Suho teased, proud to see the old man's anger increase.

The man sighed loudly, picking up the keys against his will. It seemed Suho had already made an enemy, not bad for the first day.

“Okay, but only the new kid. Come in quickly.”

Mr. Choi opened the gate, and Suho rushed in as fast as he could. The other latecomers tried to follow him, but the old man slammed the gate in their faces just like he had earlier. He was very determined to keep as many vultures out as possible.

“Thank you very much, Mr. Choi.” The short guy thanked him, bowing again.

“Yeah, thanks,” Suho added, just to avoid being rude. Even though he was still upset about the injustice he had suffered.

Mr. Choi just snorted, leaving without saying a word. Would he also become this grumpy in his old age?

“Hey, little guy!” Suho called the boy, who jumped in fright. “Thanks for the help, man. How did you know I was a new student?”

The boy adjusted his glasses on his face, breathing a sigh of relief. He slowly approached Suho.

“You’re welcome. I’m the school president, it’s my duty to get to know every student in this school.” He said proudly, extending his hand for a greeting. “My name is Seo Juntae.”

Suho accepted the greeting, shaking his hand with more force than necessary. The boy lost his balance a little and had to adjust his glasses again. Suho held back a laugh. The little guy was adorable.

“Nice to meet you, Juntae. I'm Suho, Ahn Suho.” He introduced himself. “Although I think you already know that.”

Juntae laughed, a shy, barely audible chuckle.

“Yes, I already knew. But it's a pleasure to meet you, Suho. You're not as scary as I expected.”

Scary? Suho stared at him in confusion. He always thought he looked friendly. At least that's what his grandma said. Although being transferred for serious assault might not give the best first impression.

“And you're cute.” He replied, hoping to return the compliment.

Juntae’s face turned completely red. He whispered a thank you so quietly that Suho had to bend down to hear it. He hoped he wasn’t scaring the school president on the first day. That old man would be enough trouble as it was.

“W-well… Now I must introduce you to the school. Every beginning of the year, I give a tour to the new students, but this time it's just you and me. You can follow me, you have the right to arrive late to class today.”

Suho just nodded, watching his new colleague. It was captivating how he could go from an anxious ball of nerves to a responsible president in a few seconds.

Juntae spent a good deal of time showing him around. The courtyard, the cafeteria, the principal's office, the gym, and everything that made up a school. Suho did little more than nod and make a few comments. He was hardly interested, even though the environment was much better than he had expected. Although the drops of blood on the bench in the courtyard did not calm him down.

“I’m surprised Eunjang has a school president,” Suho commented as the tour came to an end. “It’s much more organized than I expected.”

“Well, actually, the school president barely had any responsibilities. Honestly, I insisted so I could help the newbies.” Juntae replied, checking the list of places he had to show.

“Seriously? You're so fucking cool Juntae!” Suho praised, and the boy chuckled again.

Juntae laughed at everything he said, maybe he should become a comedian.

“Thanks. You know, I was really lost in my first few days. I thought it would be nice if other newbies didn't go through what I went through.” He said, proud of his accomplishments. The little guy was good.

Juntae reminded him a bit of Beomseok. He was also shy like his friend, but he seemed much less reclusive. It was probably Suho's destiny to make friends with the outcast nerds in class. Not that Suho himself had many friends, besides Yeongi and Beomseok, he was quite the loner.

“Ah, now comes my favorite part.” Juntae pulled Suho by the arm, excited to continue his tour.

They went outside. There was a room that looked like a small house of some sort, with a sign hanging on the door.

“This is the basketball club.” Juntae pointed to it. “There are different clubs around the school, some of which are outside. I'm in the literature club, which is inside the school. You have to join one.”

Wait, clubs? That's perfect!

Suho felt a spark of hope. Clubs! How had he not thought of this before? Most schools had a music club, and it was the perfect opportunity to recruit other musicians for his band.

Yeongi was right, he couldn't give up.

“Is there a music club?”

Suho stared at Juntae, his eyes almost shining with excitement. But to his disappointment, Juntae's smile fell. He ran his hand through his hair, clearly nervous. His gaze towards Suho was very much like pity. The poor man's happiness did not last long.

“Well, there was a music club,” Juntae replied, avoiding his eyes. “But it was closed. I'm sorry.”

Great, he was back to square one. But it wasn't impossible to reopen a club, was it?

“Closed? Why was it closed?”

Juntae clenched his hands tightly, clearly unsure about telling the truth. What could have possibly happened in a music club? Surely no one could have died playing guitar, right?

Juntae cleared his throat, adjusting his glasses again.

“Look, it's a long story. But in short, the club was closed after all the participants left.” Judging by the tone of his voice, he must have witnessed the problem. “There was a fight, a pretty bad one.”

It wasn't surprising. Of course, even Eunjang's musicians were hot-headed and quarrelsome. Suho hoped he wouldn't have to deal with those kinds of people in his band. In any case, hope wasn't lost yet.

“Can we reopen?” Suho asked. This was his last chance.

Fortunately, Juntae looked thoughtful. That meant it wasn't impossible.

“Well, for a club to be accepted by the board, at least 3 official members are needed.”

Suho's smile returned to his face. Great, there must have been at least two delinquents who played something in that school. Suho grabbed Juntae's hands, and the boy stared at him in fear.

“Great! Juntae, do you play anything?”

Juntae's mouth opened into a perfect 'o'. His cheeks flushed red, and he lowered his head, avoiding Suho's eyes. Why was he embarrassed? Maybe he didn't play anything. He fell silent before gathering the courage to answer him.

“I play the keyboard,” Juntae replied, uncertain.

Suho's smile grew even wider. He put his arm around Juntae's shoulders, giving him a side hug. After so much suffering, God finally smiled at him. Juntae was like water at the end of the desert.

“Then join the club with me, I love playing music!”

“I don’t know…” He replied, his eyes saddened. “I said I’m in the literature club… My parents wouldn’t want me to leave.”

Of course, the parents had to ruin everything.

But Suho couldn't give up. This was his best chance, and Juntae himself seemed desperate for freedom.

“Understandably, they feel that way,” Suho replied, patting him on the shoulder in a friendly manner. “But what about you, Juntae? Do you like playing?”

Suho watched as the guy lifted his head to look at him. Juntae had those eyes that reminded Suho of himself. As if he wanted to hold the world in his hands, but didn't think he could.

“I love it. I love playing.” It was the most sincere he had sounded all day. His gaze was hopeful, as if Suho was his salvation, too.

“Then it’s decided. It’s time we did something for ourselves, right?” Suho winked, and Juntae smiled back, though he still didn’t look confident.

“Well… I accept. But my parents can’t find out.”

“There you go! High five, little guy.” Suho raised his hand, expecting Juntae to give him a high five. The boy, however, remained still, not sure what to do.

Suho didn't even try to hold back his laughter. He grabbed Juntae's hand and used it to slap his own hand.

“This is a high five.” He explained, seeing Juntae's eyes light up at learning something new. “Well, now… Where is this closed music club?”

Suho started looking around. There were a few other outdoor clubs, maybe this was one of them. Juntae pulled his arm lightly, so that Suho would turn to him.

“I can show you where it is, but you can’t enter without permission.” His authoritative tone quickly returned, and he removed Suho’s arm from his shoulders.

“Yes, sir!” Suho saluted.

Juntae walked with him to the end of the rooms outside. From the looks of it, the music club was considerably farther away from the others. The room also seemed a bit smaller, but as long as the instruments fit, Suho could play anywhere.

“It's been a long time since the room was opened. It's probably not in the best condition.” Juntae commented, and Suho could already see dust even on the sign. “Remember, don't enter until it's reopened. Understood?”

“Relax, I'm not going in.” Of course, he was going in.

He needed to check out his future club with his own eyes. Lunch time would be perfect, no staff would care enough to keep an eye on the abandoned music club.

“Well, that's the end of the tour,” Juntae said. “You're dismissed. We can go back to the classroom.”

“Great! Our band is going to be amazing, Juntae, you'll see!”

Juntae's eyes widened, and he stared at Suho in disbelief.

“Band? Wait, you didn't say anything about a band!”

But Suho was already moving away from him, running to the classroom.

“Too late! You've already accepted your fate!” He waved goodbye, watching Juntae grow more and more anxious as he walked away.

Suho slept most of the class, as usual. Maybe it was his lucky day, but he wasn't interrupted by any bullies. Juntae was in his class and even offered to give his notes. But Suho refused, because he wouldn't copy them anyway.

He tried to listen to the call, but he didn't hear anyone with the surname Oh. Beomseok said that they weren't blood related, so the guy probably had a different surname. Thinking back, Suho should have asked the guy's name before hanging up. Maybe he should go around asking who Oh Beomseok's brother is?

When it was lunchtime, he ran to the cafeteria. Eating time was sacred, but unfortunately, Suho had a mission to fulfill. He ate as quickly as he could, and it tasted wonderful. It was rare for something to taste bad to him. As soon as he finished, Suho ran out.

He couldn't find Juntae anywhere. As an almost-friend, it was worrying, but for his plan, it was perfect. He walked to the club rooms, which were thankfully almost empty. The good thing about being a school for delinquents was that no one cared enough to report Suho if they saw him.

He walked to the music club, trying to open the door. But of course, it was locked. After all, it was an abandoned club, so the staff wouldn't leave it open. Suho started walking around the room, looking for another entrance. That's when he noticed something strange.

The window was open. Why would they lock the door but leave the window open? Maybe it was broken. What mattered was that Suho had a perfect entrance. The window wasn’t very high, and it was wide enough for a person crouching down to fit through.

Suho jumped slightly, grabbing the window frame. He used his strength to lift his weight, managing to climb on top of it. He put his feet inside, jumping to land carefully. It was so easy that he got suspicious.

The room was dark, but at least the open window provided sunlight. As expected, the place was a mess. There were cobwebs strewn across the ceiling, junk thrown everywhere, and crumpled posters. A few instruments were lying around as well, but it was clear that no one had played them in a long time. There was even a broken eletric guitar.

Suho breathed deeply.

“This will be a lot of work to renovate.”

Suddenly, Suho was pushed so hard that his back hit the ground. His eyes closed automatically due to the impact. He felt the pain spread, relieved that he hadn't hit his head. There was a weight above him, someone holding his shoulders tightly. To make matters worse, his attacker held something close to his neck.

Suho felt panic wash over him, sweat dripping down his forehead. He opened his eyes carefully, looking at the weapon pointed at his neck. Was it a knife? Was someone trying to kill him?

Recovering his vision, Suho finally saw the weapon, and it was a… Pen?

Pen? This guy... Is he trying to stab me with a pen?

Suho would have laughed if he hadn't been about to have a heart attack. He slowly faced his attacker, expecting to see a thug about to rob him or something. But he was surprised again when he saw the guy's face.

He was just a guy. Much smaller than Suho had expected, given his strength. But the most charming thing about him was his eyes. They were big, dark, and so deep that they seemed to hide the secrets of the universe within them. He was scared, and his breathing was even more irregular than Suho’s—even though he was the one with the pen around his neck.

Suho sighed in relief. It was still dangerous, but at least his attacker was a pretty boy with mesmerizing eyes. And not very physically strong.

“H-hi,” Suho said, hoping that the sympathy would save his life. “I was just checking the room. I don't want to hurt you or anything.”

The guy was still suspicious, his eyes continuing to scan his expression. When he was convinced, he slowly released Suho, certain that he was no threat. But he kept his pen in position, prepared for a surprise attack.

As soon as the guy got off of him, Suho raised his back, getting into a sitting position. The boy was also sitting, staring at him with his deep eyes. Suho tried to catch his breath, still feeling a bit shocked due to the unexpected assault.

“Sorry, I didn't mean to scare you.” Suho apologized, even though he was the one who deserved an apology.

From this position, he had a much better view of the guy’s face. It was clear he had just come out of a fight. His cheek was red, and there was a cut at the corner of his lip. Even his eyes were bloodshot, as if he were about to cry at any moment. Of course, the kid hadn't attacked for no reason. Suho was no genius, but it was easy to guess what had happened.

“You were fighting, right?” The guy didn't answer. “I understand, I've been through this before.”

The boy turned to the window, seeming to be searching for something. Suho followed his gaze.

“Are you hiding? Those guys were tough on you.” The boy looked at him again. Still no answer. “Well... You're quiet, aren't you?”

The awkward atmosphere grew more and more with each passing second. That guy just stared at him, without saying anything. Maybe he was still insecure; after all, he must have been running away from bullies much stronger than him. Suho gave his best smile, hoping to calm him down.

“I’m Ahn Suho. I’m a new student.” He reached out his hand for a greeting, just like Juntae had done earlier. But the boy didn’t take his hand, he just stood there.

Suho cleared his throat, lowering his hand and pretending to brush off his coat.

“I'm not hiding, you know? It's just that I'm a huge fan of music. I wanted to check out the club, but it's a shame it closed down.” Suho pointed to some band stickers on his jacket. “See? I'm a huge fan of these guys! I want to have my own band.”

The boy continued to stare at Suho with the same expression. But his eyes kept moving, as if calculating his every word. He even glanced at his lips, and Suho felt his cheeks heat up. He coughed, deciding to ignore it and continue the conversation.

“You could at least smile, right? It feels like I'm talking to a robot.” Suho moved his arms robotically. “Beep, Bop. You know?”

Suho laughed at his own joke, hoping it would break the ice. But to his surprise, the guy didn't even react. Maybe he shouldn't become a comedian. Was Juntae faking it when he laughed at his jokes?

“Sorry, I guess I'm not that funny.”

Before he could continue his one-man conversation, Suho noticed the side of the boy's head. There was blood dripping down, clearly from a fresh wound, but it was almost completely covered by his bangs. Suho couldn't treat it, but he had to at least stop the bleeding.

“You’re bleeding,” he commented, as if it wasn’t obvious. “Hey, you’re pretty tough for such a small guy!”

Suho started looking around, looking for something to take care of the boy's head. He looked down at himself, remembering that his uniform had a tie now. He started undoing the knot his grandmother had tied for him.

“I'm going to stop the bleeding, okay?”

Suho held the tie in his hands, slowly approaching the boy's head. And for the first time, the guy's eyes seemed to change, becoming slightly wide. Before he could predict his move, the boy bit his hand so hard that Suho immediately pulled away.

“OUCH! FUCK!”

He shouted loud enough for some students to hear. Suddenly, hurried footsteps began approaching from outside.

“Did you hear it?” A guy outside commented. “Hyoman, he must be close by!”

“That little shit,” an angry voice replied. “When I find that brat, I’m going to crush his bones!”

Some evil laughter accompanied the likely leader of the group.

“After he gouged your eyes out?” A guy said mockingly, and a sound similar to a punch was heard.

“Shut up, he caught me off guard!” The same angry voice replied, and the brute kicked something hard. “Him and fucking Juntae. Two losers who look like girls!”

“That's why Hyoman chases them. He's in love.” The other guy replied, accompanied by his friend's laughter.

“I'm going to kill you too, you bastard!”

Suho felt his stomach churn. It was obvious how disgusting those guys were just from their conversation.

Suho looked at the guy, who didn't seem interested in the chatter. His hand still hurt a lot, but he knew he had to do something. It was obvious that the bullies were talking about the guy, and besides, they were after Juntae. Suho sighed deeply, apparently, his life hadn't changed that much.

“Hey, kid.” He whispered. “I have an idea. I'll say I'm the one here, then they'll go away.”

Suho gave a thumbs-up. He stood up, approaching the window. He didn't even wait for a response, as he didn't think he would get one.

“Be quiet, I'm trying to sleep!” Suho shouted, and three bullies glared at him.

The biggest one was clearly that Hyoman, seeing as his face was scratched — the work of the pen, for sure — Suho held back a laugh.

They approached the window, ready for a fight.

“Who do you think you are to order us around?” Hyoman asked.

“Order? No, no. I'm just asking politely.” Suho replied ironically, leaning his arms on the window.

The bullies laughed in disbelief.

“Who is this little shit?” Hyoman asked his lackeys.

It was as if Suho was seeing another version of Yeongbin, but more pathetic and stupid. And with an appearance that only a mother could love.

“I've never seen him before; he must be the newbie.” A guy replied, more interested in checking the messages on his phone.

“Newbie? You mean the one who got transferred for almost killing a guy?” The other kid asked.

Hyoman’s confident gaze wavered. Perfect. Who would have thought that almost committing murder would be useful?

“The one and only,” Suho replied, stretching. “That son of a bitch also interrupted my sleep.”

Hyoman quickly became unsure. He glared at his lackeys, motioning them to back off. He had decided that a fight wasn’t worth it.

“My bad, man. Let's get out of here.”

He left, followed by the other two idiots. Suho sighed in relief, he hadn't expected his plan to work so well. When the bullies were far enough away, he crouched down again, going over to the boy.

“They left. Let's get out of here.” Suho invited him, stretching out his hand for the boy to take. “I just want to hold your hand. Don't bite me, okay?”

The guy stared at him uncertainly, slowly standing up. He stared at Suho's hand for at least a minute before finally accepting it. He held his hand carefully, as if he were afraid of getting burned if he got too close.

His hands were as beautiful as his eyes.

“Let's go.”

Suho helped the boy climb up to the window and followed right behind him. Once they were outside, Suho kept holding his hand. He ran, getting as far away from the crowd of students as possible. Part of him felt shy, noticing how the guy held his hand tightly, not even thinking about letting go.

It's the same guy who bit you, idiot.

When they were far enough away, Suho let go of his hand with difficulty. He bent down, catching his breath. And the guy did the same, taking a deep breath to calm himself. It was his first truly human reaction.

“You fought with those three?” Suho asked, feeling admiration grow in his chest. “That’s so cool!”

He smiled, and even though the boy didn't smile back, Suho was still satisfied.

“Hey, even if you’re strong… You don’t have to go through this alone, okay?” Suho approached him. “If you need help, you can call me. I can fight too, even if I’m avoiding it.”

The guy's shoulders tensed, preparing for a fight. It was as if he never got out of fight or flight mode.

“Relax, I already said I won't hurt you.” Suho looked at his head, remembering the problem that triggered everything. “Oh yeah. Go to the infirmary, head injuries are dangerous.”

Suddenly, Suho remembered the bullies’ recent conversation. They had mentioned Juntae. Could it be that they were chasing him around? Even though he hated the idea of getting into trouble, Suho had to check it out.

“Shit! I have to go. Take care, and call me if anything happens, okay?”

Suho ran off, making a heart with his fingers for the guy. 

He was very quiet, almost stabbed Suho, and bit his hand so hard that he almost ripped off the skin.

Still, Suho had never been so excited to meet someone.

Suho was closing the restaurant where he worked with Yeongi.

The rest of his school day was pretty normal. He looked everywhere for Juntae, but couldn't find him. A teacher told him that Juntae had gone home early. On one hand, Suho was relieved that the boy was safe at home, but on the other hand, he was afraid that the reason for leaving early was broken bones from being beaten too much.

Hyoman was angry the rest of the day, so Suho assumed that he didn't get what he wanted after all.

The restaurant was quite busy, so it took them longer to close. His boss told him to remember to rest, and even wished him good luck with his band. Despite being a strict woman, Mrs. Kim cared about them. Suho felt grateful for her.

The cold night wind blew against his face, relieving his sweat. Suho took a deep breath, leaning against the restaurant door. Yeongi stayed by his side, taking the opportunity to rest before going home.

“So, how was your first day?” She asked.

“It was crazy. But hey, it wasn't as bad as I thought.” Juntae, the club, the guy with the pretty eyes. Honestly, Suho's day could have been a lot worse.”I already got the first member for my band.”

Yeongi's eyes lit up, and she smiled proudly. The girl gave him a light punch on the arm, making Suho lose his balance for a few seconds.

“Wow! I didn't expect you to progress so quickly.” There was no mockery in her tone, just admiration.

“Me neither.” Suho smiled, allowing himself to feel proud after so many disappointments. “We just need one more person to reopen the music club.”

“Music club? That’s so cool. Maybe Yeongbin accidentally improved your life.” Suho rolled his eyes, thinking back to his day.

He didn't talk about the quiet boy from the music club with Yeongi. It was weird, Suho had no problem talking about Juntae, but talking about the mysterious guy felt too intimate. Anyway, he didn't even know if they would meet again, so Yeongi didn't need to know.

“So, let’s go home?” Yeongi asked, already walking to the motorcycle.

“You can wait for me here. I just have to stop at the convenience store first.”

“Ok, don’t take too long, idiot.”

The convenience store was close by, so Suho didn't have to run very far. He just needed to buy a few things for the next day, since his tiring routine of going straight from school to work forced him to eat some junk food on the way.

As soon as he reached the store entrance, a familiar face walked past Suho. He quickly turned around, forgetting why he was there in the first place.

It can't be... Is it him?

And it was. The quiet boy, the one Suho had accidentally saved by barging into the music room. The guy had walked right past him, not even noticing his presence. He was wearing a gray hoodie, and his hair was messy. Adorable.

Better yet, he wore a bandage on the side of his head. Suho breathed a sigh of relief; at least he had taken care of the wound. Should he say hi? Would it be weird? Well, Suho had never minded being weird before.

“Hey! Kid!” Suho shouted, loud enough that other people on the street turned in his direction.

The boy, however, didn't even move. Huh? Didn't I shout loud enough?

Suho began walking behind him, certainly close enough for the boy to hear him.

“Hey! Music room guy, it's me!” He waved, hoping his target would finally turn his way.

But he didn't turn around. The boy kept walking, completely ignoring Suho's existence. Damn, where was the manners? Shouldn't he be nicer to someone who saved him? Suho felt like a child, becoming strangely sullen at the lack of recognition.

Just as he was about to leave, however, a car turned onto the street, coming up right behind the quiet boy. Suho's eyes widened. Well, no one in their right mind would ignore a moving car.

“Hey, watch out! There's a car behind you!”

But to his surprise, the boy didn't even move. He continued walking in the middle of the road, while the car driver honked crazily. Suho would have to save him again.

What's his problem?

Suho ran into the middle of the street, pulling the boy's arm with more force than necessary. He held him to the sidewalk, even as he tried to pull away. When they were safe, Suho let go of the guy's arm, glaring at him angrily.

He still had the same beautiful eyes, which looked surprised, slightly wide.

“Hey, what’s your problem!?” Suho shouted before he could control himself. Fuck, he could have gotten run over. “Ignoring me is one thing, but ignoring a car? Are you trying to get yourself killed!?”

The boy’s expressionless face changed. His eyebrows furrowed, and his face became a frown, glaring at him. Now, he also seemed irritated with Suho. Great, he saved the guy twice, and he still dared to be irritated?

“Answer me!” Suho demanded, tired of the silence. “Fuck, are you deaf or what!?”

The boy's frown turned to hurt, but it was gone as quickly as it had appeared. The anger returned right away, and he stomped off, ignoring Suho again.

Suho’s anger drained away, and he immediately felt guilty. He didn’t want to yell, he was just worried about the boy’s safety. He was already hurt, and he could have been run over if it weren’t for Suho. Damn it, why did he always ignore him? Did he think Suho wasn’t worth his time?

Another familiar face approached, and this time, Suho thought he was dreaming.

“Beomseok?” He rubbed his eyes, hoping it was a mirage.

“Hi Suho!”

It wasn't. His day couldn't get any weirder.

“What… are you doing here?” Suho asked, still disturbed by his previous conversation.

“Ah, my brother was taking a while to get back, so I came to check if everything was okay.”

Suho felt his blood run cold. Suddenly, he could hear every beat of his heart.

“Your… Brother?” No… I can’t be that unlucky, right?

“Yes, Yeon Sieun. The one in the gray sweatshirt who was talking to you.” Beomseok smiled, as if that news hadn’t ruined Suho’s day. “I’m glad you’re already becoming friends. I didn’t even tell you his name, I didn’t think you’d recognize him.”

Suho remained in shock, completely silent. Beomseok had asked him one thing, and he had already ruined it. Lying would probably only make things worse, right? He just needed to cover it up.

“Oh. Yeah, your brother is pretty… quiet.” He searched for the word that sounded least offensive.

And then Beomseok laughed. Laughed like he was telling a joke.

“Yes, most deaf people are. But you know, some of them speak perfectly well. Actually, Sieun-”

Suho didn't hear the rest of what Beomseok said. He could only hear one word, repeating in his head.

Deaf.

Deaf people.

Deaf.

Suddenly, everything made too much sense. The boy never answered him, staring at Suho as if he had to read his lips to understand him, not listening to the bullies and… Not hearing Suho calling him. Not even the car honking…

Suho felt his stomach churn.

“Are you deaf or what!?

His own words disturbed him. He felt like he was going to vomit. I'm an idiot. A complete idiot.

Shit.

“Beomseok!” He held his friend’s shoulders tightly, and Beomseok stopped his speech in the middle. “I need to talk to your brother now.”

Beomseok smiled, as if it wasn't a matter of life or death for Suho.

“Sorry, we just finished cram school. If we’re late, my father will kill us.” He took Suho’s hands off his shoulders, giving him a few friendly pats. “Relax. Now you’re in the same school, you’ll have the whole year to talk.”

The whole year?

Suho thought about the guy's beautiful, deep eyes. He thought about the pen pointed at his neck. He thought about the hurt and angry look the boy gave him before he left.

Suho swallowed hard.

Fucked. I'm fucked.

Chapter Text

When Suho arrived at school, the gate was still closed. Now that he no longer had the excuse of being the new student, he had to make sure that Mr. Choi wouldn’t lock him out. Additionally, he still had to maintain the perfect attendance he had promised his grandmother.

But if he were to be honest, there was only one real reason why Suho woke up before the sun. That was, he couldn't sleep properly. Again.

When the anxiety of the first day finally subsided, Suho thought he was in the clear. But then came something much worse: the anxiety of making a mistake and having to fix it. After everything that had happened last night, Suho could barely close his eyes. All he could think about was Sieun.

There were many reasons why the boy was memorable, but Suho was only disturbed by one. His hurt expression. The way his eyes widened carefully, as if Suho had personally broken his heart. And honestly, that was exactly what he thought he had done.

How could he be so stupid? How could he not notice something so obvious?

Even Yeongi found his sudden silence strange, stopping making jokes and asking him if everything was okay. His grandmother thought something had gone wrong on the first day, but he calmed them both down. Suho used the classic excuse that he was tired and needed to sleep. He wouldn't tell them the truth, not only because he didn't want to get them into his problems again, but because he already felt guilty enough without Yeongi making fun of him and without a lecture from his grandmother.

The cold morning wind greeted him, and the school was surprisingly empty. Well, most of the delinquents probably didn't care enough to arrive so early.

The gate opened, and Mr. Choi jumped in fright, as if he had seen a ghost.

“Good morning, Mr. Choi!” Suho greeted, pleased with the man’s astonished face.

“What… Why are you here so early?” The old man, on the other hand, seemed disappointed that he couldn't keep him outside.

“Well, it turns out I'm a model student!”

Suho gave a teasing smile, seeing Mr. Choi roll his eyes. The old man made way for him to pass, but before he could, Suho heard the sound of a car pulling up. He looked back, curious to know what other crazy guy would arrive at school so early.

It was a black limousine, clearly costing more than Suho’s entire house. His mouth fell open in awe, he had never seen one of those up close before. It looked like something out of an action movie.

Someone opened the back door, and Suho swallowed hard when he saw him getting out of the car. It was Sieun, Beomseok’s brother. The boy from the music room. The deaf boy whom Suho had offended so unacceptably. His heart raced.

For a moment, he forgot that being from the same family as Beomseok also meant having the same assets. Sieun was a rich kid, something Suho could only dream of being. They truly were from different worlds.

Sieun was wearing white AirPods. Why did he wear them? He couldn't hear anyway, right?

Well, Suho wouldn't ask him, that would only make things worse. This was the universe allowing him to apologize. It couldn't be that hard, right? Suho just had to explain himself.

Sieun started walking towards the gate, and Suho straightened his posture. He took a deep breath, watching Sieun walk past him. But before he could disappear, Suho nudged him to get his attention. The boy turned towards him, not looking pleased with the sudden touch.

Suho cleared his throat, preparing for the interaction.

Come on, I can do it. I just have to apologize.

He raised his hand, waving nervously.

“H-hi.” Suho greeted, feeling a déjà vu from their first meeting. This time, the boy wasn’t pointing a weapon at him, but his gaze was just as threatening. “It’s me, from yesterday. You know, I wanted to—”

Before he could finish, Sieun walked straight ahead, ignoring him and passing through the gate. Suho stood there in the same position, too shocked to move. This time, it wasn’t an accident. Sieun looked deep into his eyes and ignored him.

Well, Sieun was still upset about last night, maybe he just needed some time. Suho still had plenty of time to apologize. After all, you couldn't ignore someone for an entire year.

He walked past Mr. Choi, who was engrossed in the conversation. That old man must have laughed internally every time he saw Suho getting into trouble.

Suho followed Sieun into the classroom. Honestly, he hadn't even noticed that they were in the same class the day before. The boy sat at the front desk, far away from Suho, who loved to sit in the back.

Sieun opened the curtains and windows as if he owned the place. He opened his backpack, took out his materials, and started studying immediately, before class even started. Suho was in disbelief. What kind of monster studied at that time? Seriously, class hadn't even started yet.

Suho arrived early to take advantage of the opportunity to sleep, but how could he have guessed that the reason for his insomnia would already be in the class? Now all he could do was observe the guy. He didn't seem the least bit disturbed by his presence, unlike Suho.

There was still some time before other students arrived. Shouldn't he take the opportunity to talk?

Suho stretched, getting up from his chair. Sieun was completely focused on his studies, not even noticing his approach. Suho took a deep breath, There was no way Sieun could ignore him now, right? He just needed to apologize, that's all.

Suho sat down in the chair in front of Sieun's desk. He faced the boy, sitting towards the back of the chair. Sieun didn't move, writing continuously in his notebook.

He couldn't hear, but it was obvious that he knew Suho was in front of him. He just decided to ignore him. He's been doing that a lot, hasn't he?

Suho looked at his AirPods, still curious about what was playing. Maybe it was a way to start a conversation. He waved his hand in front of Sieun, but the boy kept his head down. There were other ways to get his attention.

Suho gently pulled the AirPod out of Sieun's left ear, placing it in his ear instead. To his surprise, the sound coming out of it was heavy rock, playing so loud it was almost deafening. Master of Puppets, a timeless Metallica classic, was impossible not to recognize. Suho looked at Sieun in amazement, not expecting the boy to like that kind of music. They had more in common than he thought.

But unfortunately for him, Sieun didn't seem happy at all. His eyes seemed upset, just like the frown he had made the night before, and his fingers gripped his pen tightly. He probably thought Suho was stealing his AirPods or something. Suho swallowed hard, This was a terrible idea! Damn, he had to explain himself quickly.

“It's not what you think! I just—”

He was interrupted by the arrival of a third person. Both he and Sieun stared at the door, being graced — or not — by Choi Hyoman's presence. Sieun took advantage of his distraction and pulled his AirPod back, but he used so much force that it seemed like he wanted to rip off his ear with it.

“Ouch!” Suho complained, rubbing his ear.

Sieun immediately turned to Hyoman, his eyes sharp as an eagle’s. Hyoman glared back, clearly irritated by the lack of fear in the boy’s eyes. The scar from the pen was still clearly visible, and Sieun looked at it closely, as if he was proud of his work.

The most surprising thing about the whole situation was the fact that Hyoman arrived at the classroom so early.

“Well.” Hyoman broke the silence, moving away from the door. “Looks like there's someone else out there who wants to break your bones, mute.”

The day had barely begun, but Suho’s patience was already wearing thin. Of course, Sieun wouldn’t give him the benefit of the doubt when this was the kind of person he was living with.

“He's deaf. Not mute.” Suho corrected, still determined to avoid any physical fight.

Sieun turned toward him, but quickly lowered his gaze, returning to writing in his notebook. Hyoman clenched his fist in irritation, but he also seemed determined not to fight with Suho. At least not yet.

“Yeah, I know. It's a good thing we can hear him scream.” Hyoman smiled evilly, finally sitting down in his place.

Suho clenched his fists tightly, trying to control his anger. No matter how much Hyoman angered him, he couldn’t make the same mistake twice. He had already learned his lesson thanks to Yeongbin.

Control yourself. You can do it.

Suho returned to his seat, determined to at least catch up on his lost sleep.

During the break, Suho sat across from Juntae at one of the empty tables. He was relieved to wake up and see that the short guy was unharmed. At least Hyoman hadn't hurt anyone, which was already a victory for their continued bad luck.

“Dude, why did you disappear yesterday?” Suho asked, swallowing his food in one go. It was delicious.

“I wasn't feeling very well, so they sent me home,” Juntae replied, chewing his food with half enthusiasm. “I'm sorry if I worried you.”

“No, it’s fine.”

Before they could continue their conversation, some intruders decided to butt in. None other than Hyoman sat next to Juntae, while his henchmen sat next to Suho.

Suho took a deep breath. It was as if this guy was a patience test made especially for him. Did he have no life? Even Yeongbin was less insistent.

“What do you want?” Suho asked, putting his food aside to face the intruder.

Hyoman straightened his posture, placing his arm over Juntae's shoulder, who immediately flinched, fear written all over his face. Hyoman smiled proudly, as if bullying others was his mission on earth. Maybe that was why Sieun irritated him so much; he never seemed to be afraid. At least not of some pathetic bullies.

“It turns out you stole our Juntae. He always has lunch with us.” Hyoman replied, giving his best threatening smile.

It was funnier than anything else.

“It's a shame, but he's having lunch with me now.” Suho smiled, seeing Juntae's posture relax. “You'll have to find another lunch partner.”

Hyoman’s eyebrow twitched. He stood up from his chair, leaning his arms on the table and facing Suho head-on. Suho kept his sharp gaze, challenging the bully. He felt much more pity than fear for that kind of guy.

“First, the mute one, then the nerd.” Hyoman teased. “If I were you, I'd hang out with the right people, Suho.”

Suho also stood up, facing Hyoman face-to-face.

“And if I were you… I would threaten the right person. Hyoman.” Suho gave a mocking smile, not even concerned about his failed attempt at intimidation. “Now get lost.”

Hyoman's lackeys obeyed, standing up and looking ready to flee. Hyoman still stared at him for a few seconds, but also retreated, moving away from the table, never looking away.

“Be careful.” He threatened one last time, purposefully bumping into his shoulder.

“Weird guy,” Suho whispered, returning to his seat. Juntae was still frozen. “Juntae, are you okay?”

Juntae's eyes widened, adjusting his glasses. He tried to hide his trembling by hiding his hands under the table.

“Yes, I'm fine.” He gave a friendly smile, but it was obvious he was lying.

Suho didn’t want to butt in, but letting the matter drop was much worse. Who knows what would have happened to Beomseok if he had never interfered? Even if Juntae got annoyed now, he would rather make sure the shorty was safe.

“So… What’s his deal?” Suho kept the conversation casual, going back to eating.

Juntae opened his mouth, preparing to lie again, but upon seeing Suho's insistent gaze, he quickly gave up. He really wasn't going to let this matter drop.

“Well… You know, he likes to bully the weaker ones.” Juntae also went back to eating as a way to distract himself from his anxiety.

“These guys are always like this.” Suho snorted. “But don't worry, they won't mess with you again. We're in this together now.”

“What? No, did you hear what he said?!” Juntae scolded him. “If you hang out with me, he'll get on your case too.”

Juntae was genuinely worried. It was kind of touching, as they had barely known each other for a day, but Suho already knew that he could consider him a friend.

“Hey, don't worry. I've dealt with worse than these idiots.” It was true. After losing his band, there wasn't much Hyoman could do to sabotage him. “Seriously, trust me.”

Juntae sighed. He didn’t believe his words at all, but at least he seemed willing to let the argument go. Even if he begged him not to butt in, Suho would still save him from bullies like Hyoman.

“Okay.” Juntae gave in. “But be careful, okay?”

Suho nodded, finishing his meal.

Now, it was time for the hard questions. He needed to understand what had happened the day before. Not only because he was worried and wanted to protect Juntae, but because maybe it would help him understand Sieun better. Since Hyoman was angry with both of them, it was likely that they were friends, or at least knew each other.

“So… What happened with Hyoman yesterday?” Suho asked, and Juntae shifted uncomfortably in his chair.

He didn't want to bring it up, but Suho needed answers.

“The usual,” Juntae replied, focused on his plate. “He was provoking me on the stairs, and then—”

He stopped mid-sentence. Juntae’s hand, which was holding his fork, began to tremble slightly, as if he was remembering what had happened. Suho felt a chill. For some reason, it didn’t seem like Hyoman was just provoking him.

“And then?”

“Well, that was it. He was provoking me.” Juntae didn’t tell the whole truth, but even Suho wasn’t willing to press him for more. Even when he was scared, he didn’t tremble like that. “But Sieun ended up seeing it.”

Suho's heart raced. On one hand, he would also get answers about Sieun.

“Look, I don’t know if he understood what was happening,” Juntae continued. “But he kept staring at Hyoman, standing in front of him. Hyoman didn’t like that, and when he got up to fight, Sieun hit him square in the face.”

Suho smiled. He could picture the scene perfectly. Sieun, with his deep, menacing gaze, puts fear into Hyoman and his lackeys without even having to try. He was admirable, he could do so much damage with just a pen. Suho wished he could have seen him in action, giving Hyoman a taste of his own medicine.

“Suho?” Juntae called him, pulling him out of his reverie.

“Huh? I mean, yes?”

“I said there was a fight, and we both tried to run away. Honestly, I was scared, so I said I was sick.” He confessed his lie from earlier, looking more relaxed. “I managed to get home early, but I felt guilty. I wanted to apologize to Sieun.”

Suho thought to himself. It was ironic that he and Juntae had the same goal; he just hoped that Juntae would have more luck than him.

“Are you guys friends? You and Sieun?” Suho asked, wishing the answer was yes. That would solve half of his problems.

But Juntae shook his head. His gaze went to a table far away, and Suho followed suit. There sat Sieun, eating all alone. He was kind of lonely, maybe he didn't have any friends? Or maybe he just preferred his own company.

“No, we barely talk,” Juntae confessed. “Seriously, he must have only fought because Hyoman was blocking his path.”

Sieun had a book on his desk even at lunchtime. Suho hadn’t known him for long, but his life seemed to revolve around studying. Didn’t he have any other hobbies? He didn’t seem sad exactly… But anyone would be tired.

He thought back to his encounter with Sieun. He hadn’t picked a fight, he’d just attacked Suho to defend himself. He wasn’t the type of person to get his hands dirty without a good reason. Maybe it was his way of telling Juntae that he cared, that he knew what was going on and wanted to help. But no one seemed to be trying to understand him.

“No. I think he wanted to defend you.” Suho replied.

“Well… It must be pretty lonely anyway.” Juntae turned his eyes to Suho. “Since no one speaks his language.”

Suho’s heart sank. It wasn’t strange that Sieun refused to talk to him. He must have thought that Suho was just another bully who was annoying him, especially after their last disastrous conversation. Still, he couldn’t give up. He had promised Beomseok this, and he wanted Sieun to have a friend to lean on.

It wasn't pity he felt. He knew what it was like to be the target of sad and charitable looks, pity for being an orphan, for being poor, for being raised by his grandmother. No, what Suho felt was recognition. Sieun had the same lonely eyes as Yeongi and Beomseok. The same lonely eyes as Suho, which he hid from everyone else. Would Sieun see in him what no one else saw?

Either way, he couldn't let it consume him. He still had to worry about his band.

“Changing the subject,” Suho commented, curious about something else. “Do you know who can join the club with us? I need a new band fast.”

Juntae’s expression turned slightly sullen. It was kind of cute.

“I'm not sure about the band thing. I've… never played on stage before.” Juntae ruffled his hair.

“There's a first time for everything, right?” Suho smiled positively, but Juntae still didn't seem convinced. “Come on, I really need this favor, Juntae. I've needed a new band in time to sign up for the school music competition.”

Juntae opened his mouth in disbelief. Okay, maybe Suho should have told him about the competition part earlier, but then Juntae wouldn't even accept his invitation. Juntae put his hands on his head, anxiety written all over his face.

“Wait a minute… Not only do you want to reopen the music club and put me in your band, you also want me to participate in a competition?” Juntae wasn’t just anxious, he was irritated. Suho was even smug about making the president angry on his second day of school.

“Yeah. Do you know anyone else who could play with us?”

Juntae sighed deeply. He didn't even try to argue, knowing it was a losing battle. He pinched his nose, staring at Suho in a mix of anger and gratitude as well. This was someone forcing him to face his fears without excuses.

“Some guys were part of the club before,” Juntae replied. “But I don't know if they'll want to come back.”

“And who are they?”

“Baku and Hyuntak. But they're on suspension, they'll be out of school for a few days.”

Suho snorted. It was as if, after a great deal of good luck, the universe threw him a wave of bad luck to remind him of his place. But he wouldn’t give up so easily.

I still have time, relax.

As he was leaving, Suho followed Sieun. He wasn't a stalker or anything like that, he was just even more determined to become the boy's friend after his conversation with Juntae.

“Sieun!” He called, immediately slapping his forehead. “Idiot. He can’t hear you.”

Suho tried to get through the crowd of teenagers without getting crushed. Sieun was too fast for someone who walked so slowly. Sieun's limousine was just ahead, it wouldn't be long before he got in and managed to ignore Suho again.

Come on, think of something. Don't let him get away again.

Suho looked at the ground. There were several small rocks; they looked good to attract attention, and they shouldn't hurt much, right? He bent down, picked up one of the rocks, and threw it at Sieun using as little force as possible. The problem, however, was that Sieun turned towards him, just in time for the rock to almost hit his eye, hitting right above it. Suho held his breath, not believing his idiocy.

Sieun put his hand to his face in surprise. He looked at Suho, who had no idea what to do.

“I-I didn't mean to do that, I-”

Suho expected Sieun to ignore him as usual, but to his surprise, the boy started walking towards him. His step was firm, intimidating, and his face was a complete scowl. Suho flinched involuntarily, bracing himself for a punch.

But that wasn’t what happened. Sieun stood right in front of him, not moving a muscle. For some reason, that was much scarier than violence. Suho stared back at the boy, confused about his intentions. Was this some kind of warning?

'If you do that again, I'll kill you' or something?

And then Sieun started to sign with his hands. Suho tried to follow him, watching the way his fingers moved quickly and gracefully. Even with anger written all over his face, he signed lightly. Suho was mesmerized, not even moving from his spot.

Is he… talking to me?

Now that was surprising. His heart warmed, and Suho smiled without holding back. He's talking to me!

Sieun raised his eyebrows, confused by his reaction. Suho needed to continue the conversation, this was his chance. He didn't understand sign language at all, but he could try.

Suho raised his hand, pointing at himself.

“I.” He said slowly, making an X sign with his arms. “Don't know.” He opened his mouth, pointing to his tongue. “Sign language.” He finished, moving his hands randomly.

Sieun looked like he was seeing a ghost. He stared at Suho, but this time there was no anger, only shock. Was this a good sign? Was he happy to see someone trying to communicate with him? Suho wasn’t one to brag, but perhaps he would be the first one to get close to Sieun.

But Suho didn't even have time to celebrate. Sieun stomped on his foot hard enough to make him limp. Suho screamed, lifting his leg and holding his foot with his hands. He looked at Sieun, confused as to what he had done wrong, but the boy had already left, heading to his limousine.

“Why did you do this!?” He shouted, knowing he wouldn't get an answer.

First his hand, then his foot. He would have to start going to school in armor, who knows if next time Sieun wouldn't attack his back?

Before he had any more time to feel sorry for himself, Suho saw Beomseok get out of the limousine. He immediately put his foot down, hoping to hide his pain. Beomseok couldn't find out anything about what had happened between the two of them. Suho wished Sieun would be secretive enough not to tell.

Beomseok made some gestures to his brother, who nodded and got into the vehicle. He started walking towards Suho, waving at him. Suho waved back, giving a forced smile.

“Suho! So, how's school?”

“Great!” Suho replied, too quickly.

“That’s good. Sieun told me about yesterday.” Suho’s heart raced. He was dead.

“Seriously? What did he say?” He played innocent, still trying to keep his foot a little levitated.

“Nothing much, just that you saved him from a car.” Suho took a deep breath. He owed Sieun a lot. “Oh, he also called you conceited and predictable. But I don’t think he meant to be mean.”

Suho gave a nervous laugh. He was sure it was meant to be mean, but it wasn't like he didn't deserve it. At least Sieun hadn't called him a bully or anything like that. That would really disappoint Beomseok.

“Cool. Your brother is a nice guy.” Suho replied. It was probably true, he just wasn't very nice to Suho.

“Really? I find him quite annoying sometimes.” Beomseok joked, but there was a grain of truth to his words.

That was how siblings were. Ever since he welcomed Yeongi into his home, Suho knew all too well the feeling of wanting to hug and strangle someone at the same time.

Suddenly, Beomseok opened his backpack. He pulled something out, handing it to Suho. It was some kind of envelope, white with silver details. The kind of fancy stuff only rich people would do. Suho took it gently, afraid it would rip at the slightest touch.

“What is this?” He asked, trying to read the small print.

“It's an invitation to a party. At my house.” Beomseok replied proudly.

Suho stared at him in surprise. It was the first time Beomseok had invited him to his house, the boy avoided the subject like the devil avoided the cross. But there he was, taking Suho to the place he never talked about. That was strange.

“Are you… Sure?” Suho asked, unsure.

“Yes, I am,” Beomseok replied. “It’s a celebration. Sieun and I came first in the Math Olympiads, and my father is going to throw a party in our honor.”

Beomseok smiled, actually smiled. It wasn't forced; he was just happy and proud. Suho felt glad for his friend. From what little Beomseok had said about his family, it was likely that they didn't get along. It was good to know that not everything was bad, since the boy had already suffered a lot at school.

“And you want me there? With all those rich people?” Suho would love to support his friend, but he knew the difference in their social classes. He simply didn't fit in that kind of place.

“Of course I do,” Beomseok stated. “Look, this is the first time my dad has let me bring a guest. And you… You’re the first person I want to invite.”

Beomseok lowered his head, trying to hide his embarrassment. He adjusted his glasses, looking for something to occupy his hands.

Suho should deny it. He wasn't part of that world, it would only make things worse for his friend. But there was someone in that house he really needed to see. And Suho was too selfish not to take the opportunity.

“I'm in!” Suho replied, seeing Beomseok's face light up.

“Perfect. It will be this Saturday, don't forget.”

“I would never miss out on free food.” Suho joked, saying goodbye to his friend.

When Beomseok got into the limousine and disappeared from view, Suho let out the breath he had been holding. It was a terrible idea, but he had no other choice. Sieun could ignore him at school, but it was impossible to avoid someone who was in his house.

Furthermore, Suho had been a huge idiot. He had tried to talk to Sieun without even knowing his language. If he wanted to be heard, he needed to listen first.

Suho spent the rest of the week extremely busy. Not only did he have to work, go to school, and look for someone willing to join the club, but he also had a new task: learning sign language.

Due to his lack of time, he was unable to learn as much as he wanted. After all, he only had until Saturday to learn the essentials. First, he went after the word “sorry.” Even if he didn’t know anything else, he owed that word to Sieun.

It was a simple sign. Suho imitated the performer in the video, clenching his hand into a fist and then raising only his pinky and thumb. Then he tapped his chin lightly.

Sorry.

He smiled, feeling stupidly proud of something so simple.

However, his study session was interrupted by Yeongi entering his room. Suho tried to close the video in a hurry, throwing his phone on the bed with force. Yeongi looked at him confused, putting a blanket in the closet.

“What was that?” She asked.

“Nothing.” Suho lied, even though he knew it was useless. Yeongi knew him better than he knew himself.

Yeongi smiled teasingly. She jumped onto his bed, grabbing his phone before Suho could stop her.

“Yeongi!” he yelled, chasing her around the room. “Give me that back now!”

“Are you watching porn!?” She shouted purposefully loudly, opening his YouTube.

And then Yeongi stopped, her eyes widening. Her smile turned into a curious grimace, and she handed the phone back to him. There was a video on sign language, and Suho forced a cough.

“Why… Are you learning this?” Yeongi asked, giving up on the provocation.

Suho sat up in bed. There was no point in lying anymore, he had been caught. It was better to be honest once and for all.

“There’s a deaf boy in Eunjang,” he replied, apprehensive. “He’s Beomseok’s brother. I… said some stupid things to him, and I wanted to apologize.”

Suho closed his eyes, expecting to hear Yeongi’s mocking laughter. But instead, the girl sat down next to him. She patted his shoulder a few times, strangely empathetic.

“That’s really nice of you,” she said honestly. Suho felt relieved. “I bet you like him!”

He celebrated too soon. Suho rolled his eyes, removing her hands from his shoulders.

“Shut up. You are impossible.”

Suho tried to hide his smile, seeing the way Yeongi laughed. She had the power to make any situation so light. Suho envied that. He always made everything too complicated.

“That's why you're going to the rich people's party, right?” Yeongi asked, already knowing the answer. “Are you going to meet your father-in-law? Be careful.”

“Very funny,” Suho replied.

But honestly, he felt very nervous about meeting Beomseok’s father. He knew that the guy was a rich and proud congressman, and he didn’t seem to have the best relationship with his son. Maybe not even with his stepson.

“Suho. Don't worry, you can do it.” Yeongi said, noticing his anxiety.

Suho took a deep breath. He had to make it.

I'll do it.

The yard was bigger than Suho's entire house. The gate at the front was huge and wide open, giving a view of a fenced-in area leading to the party. A smaller gate stood in the middle of the fence, locked.

He swallowed hard, taking in the number of wealthy people sitting around small white tables. He tried to adjust his suit and tie, which were already stifling.

The thing was, Suho didn’t have any fancy clothes for the event. So his grandmother gave him an old suit from his father, which fit surprisingly well. Suho felt strange when he looked in the mirror for the first time. It was like seeing another person, wearing clothes he would never wear, going to a place he would never go.

He sighed, stopping in front of the gate. A tall guy with sunglasses walked up to him. It was scary. Why did they need a security guard for a math olympiad celebration? The man glared at Suho, taking a list in his hands.

“Name?”

“Ahn Suho.” He was already sweating nervously.

Is there still time to go home?

The man checked the list.

“Invitation?”

Suho handed him the invitation he received from Beomseok, trying to control his trembling. The man gave it a quick check before opening the gate to the enclosure and allowing him to enter.

“Thank you.” Suho bowed. In that place, he felt the need to be the most polite person in the world.

Suho walked through the gate, staring at the view. It was amazing, with neatly trimmed grass and beautiful flowers decorating the place. It was the kind of house Suho dreamed of spending his summer vacation in. But this was a mansion, someone's ordinary everyday home, something Suho would never see with his own eyes if he weren't invited.

He started looking for his friend, feeling sick. Seriously, he had gotten an invitation, but he felt like an intruder who would be caught at any moment.

“Suho!” It was Beomseok's voice, he sighed in relief. “I'm glad you came.”

“I wouldn't miss it for anything.” Suho hoped he sounded sincere.

“Come, I'll take you to our table.” Beomseok gently pulled his arm.

Maybe it was just paranoia, but Suho felt like he was being watched and judged by all these people. They probably knew his social status just by the way he dressed and carried himself. Suho lowered his head, insecure in a way he rarely was.

Beomseok led him to one of the tables, sitting down next to him. Thank God, they were the only ones sitting there. It must have been the privilege of being the owner of the house—and the party.

Suho stared at the table in the center. It was large and full of different desserts, with a huge, appetizing cake in the middle of it. But even that couldn't cheer him up. Suho wasn't hungry, and that was very rare for him.

“Nice house.” He commented, not wanting to take his discomfort out on Beomseok.

“Yes, on the outside it is,” Beomseok replied, but he was focused on something else.

Suho followed his gaze, curious. Beomseok was staring at his father. Oh Jinwon. He was holding a glass of wine, chatting with his guests. His laugh was fake, arrogance etched in his posture. It didn't take a genius to know what kind of person he was.

“He says the celebration is ours.” Beomseok broke the silence. “But that's a lie. It's his, we're just the trophies.”

Beomseok had never sounded like that before. Disgusted, tired, and angry. It was kind of scary, how the hatred in his eyes could be enough to kill. Suho put his arm around his shoulders, trying to calm him down.

“Hey, don’t mind him. It’s your party, isn’t it?” Suho asked, and Beomseok gave a satisfied smile.

Suho started looking around, but he didn't see any sign of Sieun. He couldn't have run away from his own party, right?

“Where is your brother?” Suho asked.

Beomseok’s expression darkened, but it wasn’t hostile. It was so neutral that it was hard to read.

“Why do you want to know?” Suho felt tense. Did Sieun tell him about everything that had happened?

“No special reason. It's just that it's his party too, right?”

Beomseok's shoulders relaxed.

“Yes, it is. But he hates parties, he's locked in his room.”

Beomseok wasn't lying. But for some reason, that didn't sound like the complete answer. With every second that passed in that house, Suho felt more suffocated. His grandmother always told him that there were places with bad energy, and Suho didn't believe her. At least not until he saw that mansion.

If Sieun was home, there was only one way to talk to him.

“Beomseok. Where is the bathroom?”

“It’s inside, I can open it for you.” Suho breathed a sigh of relief. “But be brief, okay?”

“Sure thing, boss.”

The inside was as big as the backyard. There were stairs leading to rooms and more rooms, not to mention the dozens of doors scattered throughout. Who needed so many rooms?

Suho knew he was technically trespassing. But it would be brief; all he had to do was find Sieun's room, apologize, and leave this horrible party. He stretched, starting to open all the doors that weren't locked.

It wasn't until the second floor, after a while of searching, that Suho found his target. He opened the door slowly, catching his breath after climbing so many stairs. The room was incredibly beautiful.

A warm and comfortable bed, furniture that must have cost a fortune, and a shelf full of books. But that wasn't the most surprising thing. There were different paintings scattered around the room, some hanging on the wall and others leaning against the floor. They were beautiful, with a unique and eye-catching style, unlike anything Suho had ever seen. He didn't know anything about painting, but this was clearly the work of a professional.

Sieun was sitting with his back to him, painting another picture. It wasn’t complete, but it looked like someone was playing a guitar. The vibrant colors and level of detail were so advanced that it didn’t look like it was done by a teenager. Suho was mesmerized, watching those nimble fingers paint with such delicacy.

The same fingers that had almost stabbed him with a pen. Sieun was like duality personified. As if everything most beautiful and most cruel in the world had come together in a single being. It was impressive how he was angelic, painting beautiful pictures, but he had skill, almost a pleasure in violence.

It's beautiful.

Suddenly, Sieun stopped painting. He turned around, noticing his presence. Sieun practically jumped out of his chair, standing in front of the painting, trying to hide it. He wore a paint-stained apron, but that didn't make him any less majestic.

He was more than surprised. He was scared. His fingers gripped the paint palette tightly, and Suho knew that this was his makeshift weapon.

So he had to act.

Suho closed his hand into a fist, raising his pinky and thumb. Then he brought his hand to his chin, giving it a few light taps.

“Sorry,” Suho said, and this time, he spoke in both languages.

Sieun’s already wide eyes grew even wider. His grip loosened drastically, and he placed the painting palette on his desk. It was a sign of trust.

Suho slowly approached. He pointed at himself, then placed his index finger on his forehead. Then he shook his finger negatively, pointing it at Sieun and bringing it to his ear and lips right after.

“I didn't know you were deaf.”

It was little. It was so little that it was insignificant. But Sieun was perplexed. He wiped his paint-stained hands on a towel and took off his apron, never taking his eyes off Suho. Then he left his spot, walking until he was as close to Suho as possible. Too close.

Sieun repeated the sorry sign. Suho's eyes widened.

“Are… are you apologizing too?”

Sieun nodded. Suho relaxed his shoulders, letting a smile spread across his face.

“Well, I didn't learn much more than that. Sorry.” Suho confessed, embarrassed. “But I can say music!”

He held both hands out in the M sign, moving them rhythmically. Sieun didn’t smile, but his lips twitched slightly upward. That was the closest thing to happiness Suho had ever seen him express. It made him feel like he had won a prize.

Suho looked at Sieun’s desk. There was a notebook open, with a pen next to it. It was perfect. He picked it up, starting to write so that Sieun could understand him better. When he was done, he turned the notebook over to his newest friend.

'I'm really sorry for the stupid thing I said to you, and for annoying you today. I wanted to apologize, but I didn't know how.'

Sieun took the notebook from his hand, writing his own message.

'It's okay. I'm sorry for biting you. And for stepping on your foot. I thought you were making fun of me for being deaf.'

Suho felt even more stupid. How had he not thought of this? Of course, his horrible attempt at communication seemed like a mockery of sign language.

“It hurt like hell,” Suho said, and Sieun shrugged, as if to say, “Whatever.”

Despite his apologies, he didn't seem entirely remorseful. Sieun still thought he deserved to be beaten, and contrary to what he expected, that only made Suho admire him even more.

“You’re quite insensitive,” Suho accused, but Sieun nodded. He was unintentionally hilarious.

And then Suho remembered the AirPods. It seemed rude, but it was his chance to satisfy his curiosity.

“Why do you listen to music?” Suho pointed to his ears. “If you can't hear?”

Sieun wasn’t offended. But instead of answering in the notebook, he held his hand. Suho’s heart raced, and his cheeks burned. What is he doing?

Sieun took Suho's hand to the table, tapping it a few times to a rhythm. The music vibrations. Suho smiled in fascination. Of course, Sieun could still feel the music, which made it a universal language. Something that everyone in the world could understand.

That was what made Suho so passionate about music. The ability to communicate his feelings without using a single word.

“The vibrations.” Sieun nodded. “I feel so dumb.” Sieun nodded again. “Hey!”

The reality was that Suho was far more ignorant than he cared to admit. He had his own problems to worry about, so he never took the time to learn about others. Now, he saw how much this allowed him to remain in a bubble.

Knowing that Sieun also liked music gave him a brilliant idea. He picked up his notebook and wrote again. If this worked, he could achieve his goals.

'I love music too. Juntae and I are trying to reopen the school music club, and we're only missing one member. Do you want to join?'

It might not come to anything, but Suho had a golden opportunity. Sieun began to look around at all of his paintings.

“You’re in the painting club, right?” Suho tried to hide his disappointment. “It’s okay, I understand.”

Sieun stood right in front of him. He opened his hand, lifting it and pulling it towards himself. He wanted Suho to understand the sign.

“You… want to?” Suho guessed, and Sieun shook his head frantically.

I'm already getting good at this language!

Suho had done it. He had his third member, he could reopen the club, and he had a better chance of growing his band. He raised his arm, as if to touch Sieun’s shoulder, but immediately decided against it. He didn’t want to be bitten again, and touching still seemed off-limits.

“I…” He joined his fingers, except for his thumb, and brought them to his forehead, making a sign similar to a salute. “Thank you.”

Sieun’s eyes were shining, and Suho wanted to dive into them. They were saying so many things, and Suho wanted to decipher and understand each one of them. At that moment, he knew that learning sign language had become just another obligation for him.

But their moment was interrupted when someone suddenly entered the room. It was the same grumpy security guard from the entrance. He stood at the door, taking in the scene.

“What… are you doing in Mr. Yeon’s room?” He asked Suho accusingly.

Suho took a deep breath. This wasn't going to end well.

“Me? Nothing much, I just needed to find the bathroom and-”

“Attention!” The security guard suddenly shouted, holding the communication device to his ear. “A boy is breaking into Mr. Yeon’s room!”

Suho's heart almost stopped beating. Breaking in? Seriously, couldn't he have just one day of peace?

Sieun shook his head in an attempt to save his life. But the security guard didn’t even look at him, completely focused on Suho. What kind of employee wouldn’t listen to their own boss?

“Wait a minute, I'm not trespassing!” Suho defended himself, but the security guard started walking towards him to prevent him from escaping through the door.

Fuck! Seriously!?

Sieun pulled his arm, leading Suho to his window. A very high and dangerous window, by the way. He had a view of the entire party, and coming down from up there would certainly draw attention. But he didn't have much of a choice.

He looked at Sieun, as if to ask, 'Are you sure?', and unfortunately, the boy nodded. Man, he really should have stayed home.

“See you at school.” He said to Sieun, waving goodbye.

Suho climbed up to the window, looking for a safe place to land. The security guard tried to grab his arm, but Suho jumped before he could. He was so desperate to escape, he didn't even calculate his landing properly. He closed his eyes, ready to feel the impact of the fall and break a bone or two along the way.

But that wasn’t what happened. Suho fell onto something soft, something… fluffy and sticky. He opened his eyes, afraid to find out where he landed.

It was a cake. Suho fell into the huge cake that was in the middle of the dessert table. But that wasn’t the worst part. Oh Jinwon was right in front of him, covered in the cake frosting that had spilled onto him thanks to Suho’s impact. The man’s brows furrowed, and he looked ready to commit murder and hide the body.

“Oh… My bad.” Suho smiled nervously, wanting to sound sincere.

But Oh Jinwon was not willing to forgive him.

“Get this brat!” He shouted angrily, and several security guards went towards Suho.

“What the hell!”

Suho jumped off the table, running across the yard. He bumped into several people along the way, including several waiters who were carrying drinks that must have cost more than he did. Suho didn't even have time to apologize, too worried about escaping alive.

He walked past Beomseok, who was completely pale. Fuck, even that damn Yeongbin was there, still covered in bandages and unable to even laugh at the scene.

Finally, Suho managed to jump over the fence in front of the yard. Thankfully, the huge gate at the entrance was still open, and he wasn't locked inside. When he had run far enough to escape and lose the security guards, Suho took a deep breath, catching his breath.

This is total madness!

He would never have a normal day in his life again. But not everything was bad; in fact, it was even too good.

He managed to apologize to Sieun, talk to him, and even convince him to be the third member of the club. Which meant they could reopen. Suho laughed, whether it was from happiness or pure adrenaline.

He talked to me.

Chapter Text

Sieun's days were always the same.

Go to school, go to cram school, and come back home. Nothing was surprising in his life, nothing that would take him out of the predictable monotony of his routine. And that morning would be no different.

He was eating breakfast, but unlike usual, Beomseok was strangely talkative. It's not like they weren't close, but it was hard to feel like talking when you had to worry about not making your day miserable just because you pissed off the owner of the house.

“Sieun, I have good news,” Beomseok said.

He always used both languages simultaneously, using his mouth and hands to express himself. He was the only person in that house who had learned sign language, who cared enough to want to communicate with Sieun. Not even his mother knew much beyond one sign or another.

After all, she didn't have time.

She never has time for me.

The taste of the food was already turning bitter. He didn't want to think about his mother, not when she never thought about him. It was a waste of time.

“What?” Sieun signed.

He wasn’t curious. Beomseok’s good news wasn’t interesting to him, but he didn’t want to be rude to his brother.

“My friend, Suho. From today onwards, he will go to your school.” Beomseok smiled with excitement, as if it was something to celebrate.

Sieun sighed. Everything he knew about Suho was against his will. The thing was, Beomseok hadn't stopped talking about the boy since he was saved by him, as if he were a great hero and not just another dumb high school teenager.

'He's so cool, Sieun, ' 'He fights really well', 'He plays guitar, you know? And he sings too! He stood up for me. No one has ever done that for me before.’

It was annoying. Beomseok seemed to be in love with Suho, praising him like he was a god. Sieun was happy that his brother had a friend, but the situation would end badly. Because Beomseok put the guy on a pedestal, he was doomed to be disappointed. He saw Suho as a reflection of everything he wanted to be; maybe he just mistook admiration for love.

Either way, whether or not he liked Suho romantically, it was still a problem that Beomseok was so obsessed with the guy. But Sieun didn't want to argue, since few things made his brother so happy.

“And why is that good news?” Sieun asked, just to tease.

Beomseok rolled his eyes.

“Because Suho is really cool, and I think you need a friend.” Sieun narrowed his eyes, giving his best disapproving face. “Come on! Is it so wrong to want you to talk to someone other than me?”

Beomseok was nosy. He would always ask him about school, try to introduce him to other people, and worry about everything that was going on in his life. Sieun understood, of course, that his brother worried about him, but it was so intense that he seemed not to trust Sieun's independence.

Being deaf didn't make him defenseless. In fact, the idiots at school had already learned not to mess with him.

Except for that damn Hyoman.

“I don’t need friends,” Sieun signed, trying to remain polite. “And I certainly don’t need the protection of a brainless idiot.”

Beomseok frowned. Okay, maybe he was exaggerating.

“I don’t understand.” His brother sighed, confused. “Why do you judge him before you even know him? When I told you he stood up for me, you even said he was cool.”

Sieun put his hands on his face. Sure, he had a judgment problem, but he was so tired of being disappointed. It was always the same story: someone nice would come along wanting to be his friend, and then they’d say some prejudiced nonsense. Whether it was intentional or not, it was still tiring.

“I'm not judging him.” It was a lie. “I just think you're too defensive of him because you like him.”

Beomseok’s cheeks turned red. He glared at Sieun, irritated in a way he rarely was.

“You know that's not true. I would never tell you to be his friend if I didn't find him trustworthy.”

“Not on purpose,” Sieun signed, and Beomseok sighed loudly.

“Please, Sieun, answer me honestly. Why don’t you want to make new friends?” His eyes were begging for an answer.

Sieun didn't want to continue the conversation, but he owed his brother at least this much.

“I don’t need anyone else but you.” He was honest. No one in the world understood him like Beomseok did. They had similar struggles and scars, things that brought them together but kept them apart from everyone else.

Beomseok’s eyes widened. His expression fell, not exactly from sadness, but from emotion. Sieun was rarely honest with him.

“But we won't be together forever,” Beomseok replied, but he didn't seem happy with his answer either.

Sieun lowered his head, trying to hide his disappointment. He wasn't a child; he understood that Beomseok would have his own life one day, and if it were up to him, it would be far from that city. Far from his father.

But that didn’t make things any easier. Sieun didn’t think he would find anyone else willing to learn his language. Whether it was people trying to befriend or flirt with him, no one made an effort to communicate.

Not that it mattered. Sieun didn't need them; he didn't care.

Beomseok waved his hand in front of him, getting his attention to raise his head. He gave a friendly smile.

“Let’s do it this way,” Beomseok said, keeping his voice calm. “Give him a chance. If he really is an idiot, you can throw it in my face for the rest of the year.”

Sieun pursed his lips upward. It was fun to imagine; few things were as satisfying as saying 'I told you so' to his brother.

Maybe he should stop being so stubborn. In the end, if Suho really was an idiot, then Sieun would just teach him a lesson. And maybe Beomseok would finally talk about something else.

One that doesn't involve that damn Ahn Suho.

“Okay,” Sieun signed, surrendered. “But if he’s an idiot, you owe me that new paint.”

Beomseok smiled, slightly irritated.

“And why don't you buy it with your own money?”

“Because that takes away the fun, obviously.”

Sieun smiled mischievously, watching his brother sigh in defeat. Maybe it wasn't so bad. Maybe Ahn Suho would be tolerable. Someone similar to Juntae.

Anyway, I can just ignore him.

School was the same as always. Sieun didn't talk to anyone, nor was he interested in looking for Suho. He simply studied and went to the cafeteria.

After that, he was walking down the stairs to stay away from the brutes running around everywhere. But things didn't go as planned.

His path was blocked. Hyoman, an idiot who loved to tease him, but never actually fought, was sitting in the middle of the stairs. His companions were there too, laughing about something unfunny. But that wasn’t what caught his attention.

Juntae.

Sieun didn’t know much about Juntae. He was the school president, and he was surprisingly friendly. But the one reason Sieun felt more empathy for him than anyone else in the school was because of his help. Every time there was an important announcement or something they needed to remember, Juntae would write it down for him, just to make sure he understood.

He didn’t really talk; he just handed him the papers and went back to studying. It was more than anyone else would do, since when he didn’t get help from him, Sieun was constantly at a loss about where he should go or what to do. Of course, the other students purposely didn’t tell him anything.

He knew Juntae was bullied. It wasn't that Sieun didn't care, but it wasn't his problem. He already had enough on his plate, and unfortunately, he had to be selfish to ensure peace at least at school. His home was already chaotic enough.

It was none of his business, and Sieun was going to walk right past him as usual. But something seemed different this time. Juntae was shaking badly, and not just out of fear of being hit. Hyoman was uncomfortably close to him, too close.

Sieun prepared to take out the pen that was in his pocket. Of course, he had one; you never knew what danger you might face when you studied at Eunjang.

Hyoman's hand went down, reaching for Juntae's waistband. Sieun's blood ran cold.

“Show us, Juntae. You have a big one, don't you?” Hyoman said.

“N-no, please!” Juntae tried to pull away, holding Hyoman's hands as tightly as he could.

Sieun was transported to the past. The scene was too familiar. He still remembered his first day at Eunjang perfectly.

“You look like a girl.” Hyoman teased, getting very close to him.

Sieun ignored him. He didn't feel like getting into fights, especially on his first day. Ignoring the idiots would be easy since they were so predictable that they were no longer annoying.

But Hyoman didn't like being ignored. He pushed Sieun against the wall, trying to trap him in the same position. Sieun kept his gaze neutral, showing fear was exactly what that idiot wanted, and Sieun wouldn't give him the satisfaction.

Instead of a punch or a kick, Hyoman made a move Sieun didn’t expect. He reached up to her legs, touching places no one had touched. His stomach churned.

“The mute is really a guy!” He smiled with those disgusting teeth. “What a shame. Just because I wanted to have some fun.”

That day, Choi Hyoman lost a tooth and was unable to move his arm for a week.

Not that that was enough to stop him. He remained the same disgusting creature.

“Yeon Sieun!” Hyoman shouted his name, and Sieun returned to the present. “Weirdo, why are you standing there staring at us?”

Juntae let out a sigh of relief, but his body was still trembling. Sieun saw the way he kept his hands close to his body, trying to protect himself. He should leave; it was none of his business. But he couldn't move from the spot.

Don't touch him, leave him alone, is what he wanted to say.

“Do you want to fight or what!?” Hyoman continued talking nonsense, without taking his arm off Juntae's shoulders.

It's not my problem.

But it was. Because no one else would save Juntae from that situation. Because Sieun had been in his shoes, and he still felt disgusted about it. Because Choi Hyoman needed to be taught a lesson, and no one was willing to teach him.

Sieun ran up to Hyoman, pulled out the pen from his pocket, and scratched his face, making him scream. He immediately grabbed one of Hyoman’s friends, pushing him toward the other bully. The idiots tumbled down the stairs, unable to defend their leader.

Juntae jumped in fright, holding onto the railing to keep from falling. Sieun pulled on the president’s arm, pointing toward the stairs with his other hand.

Run, get out of here.

Juntae didn’t look confident, but he got the message. However, before he could run away, Hyoman recovered. He quickly got up from the ladder, giving Sieun a strong kick to throw him off balance. Sieun fell backwards, hitting his back on the ground.

The other idiots were already getting up, ready for a rematch.

“You fucking mute! I'm going to kill you!” Hyoman shouted, wiping the blood dripping from his cheek.

Juntae stood still, staring at Sieun as if waiting for his orders. Sieun wanted to yell at the boy to run, but all he could do was shake his head, indicating an escape route.

Juntae looked uncertain, but finally obeyed, running away without Hyoman paying any attention to him. Luckily— or unluckily? — Hyoman was now fully focused on Sieun, and only on him.

Sieun stood up, and Hyoman rushed down the stairs toward him. Hyoman tried to punch him, but Sieun grabbed his arm, pushing him against the wall. One of Hyoman's friends tried to grab his shoulder, but Sieun elbowed him hard in the stomach, making him back away. Sieun kicked the third bully in the leg right after, knocking him off balance before he could attack.

Hyoman took advantage of his moment of distraction and punched him square in the face. His cheek was sore, and Sieun could already taste blood in his mouth. Hyoman immediately punched him again before he could recover.

Sieun tried to look around, but there wasn't much he could use. It was better to try to escape or lure the bullies to a place with more weapons available.

He pushed past the bullies, running up the stairs to escape. But when he was at the bottom of the stairs, Hyoman pulled his head back, slamming it into the railing. Sieun felt dizzy, and he touched the side of his head, which felt wet.

I'm… Bleeding?

He didn't have time to lament. Sieun punched Hyoman hard in the face, and then tripped him, making him fall face down on the ground. He took the opportunity to run outside.

Sieun scanned the area, looking for a hiding place to recover. He walked towards the clubs, which were thankfully empty. He stared at the music club, which had been abandoned for a long time. The idiots wouldn't think of going inside.

He noticed the window and struggled to open it. Luckily, it wasn't jammed, and it was wide enough for him to fit through. Sieun grabbed the window frame and jumped in using as much strength as he could.

It worked. He was safe.

Sieun caught his breath, trying to control his breathing. He would never tell anyone this, but those idiots made him super anxious. The truth was that Sieun wasn't strong, not like the delinquents at that school. The only reason he could defend himself was because he used his knowledge and the environment around him.

But even he got lost in moments of tension.

Hyoman was just a pathetic bully; he didn't have the power to scare him. But what he tried to do to Juntae? That scared Sieun. Just like it scared him on his first day at Eunjang.

He hated feeling this way.

Small, weak, and defenseless.

Sieun didn't know how long he had been hiding. He even thought the break was over until that stranger barged into the music room.

When Sieun attacked him, he thought it was Hyoman or another dumb bully. But when he looked at his frightened face, it was clear that it was a new student. Sieun didn’t pay much attention to the other students, but he would remember that face.

The guy spoke fast, so fast that it was hard to read his lips. Sieun wasn't going to care about him, not until he said his name.

“I'm Ahn Suho. I'm a new student.”

Ahn Suho? The damn Ahn Suho?

He wasn't exactly what Sieun imagined. He didn't seem like an arrogant jerk. In reality, Ahn Suho was just an anxious teenager. He moved his hands around, not knowing what to do with them, sweat dripped down his forehead, and he gave a forced laugh every time Sieun didn't answer him.

It was… Captivating.

But Sieun barely had time to entertain himself with the conversation. Suddenly, Suho pointed to his wound. Then, he took off his tie and began to move it towards his head.

Sieun felt panic wash over him. Suddenly, he was somewhere else, completely alone and lost in the dark. There was another person in front of him, trying to block his vision, to stop him from seeing what was happening.

No. I have to defend myself.

Sieun used his best weapon. He bit Suho's hand, using all the strength of his teeth. The boy jumped back, screaming in fright. Sieun didn't move from his spot, bracing himself for Suho to retaliate. But he never did.

No, instead, he saved Sieun. He chased away the bullies and took him outside, holding his hand. Then, he told him to call him if he needed help, and even told him to go to the infirmary.

And then he ran off, without even saying goodbye properly.

It was strange. As much as he hated to admit it, Ahn Suho was… kind. But that didn’t make any sense. No one was kind to Sieun, no one but Beomseok.

His heart pounded, as if it would jump out of his chest. His cheeks heated up, and his hand still tingled where Suho had held it.

What a weird feeling.

On the way home, Sieun got into the limousine, still feeling awkward.

For some reason, he did as Suho told him. He went to the infirmary, had his wound treated, and was left to rest until it was time to leave, which at least kept him from running into Hyoman again. He hoped that Juntae had managed to escape as well.

The driver started driving, and Beomseok looked at him, smiling.

“So? Have you met Suho?” He signed.

When they wanted to have a private conversation, they would only use sign language to communicate. That way, the employees wouldn't be able to hear what Beomseok was saying and gossip to his father.

It was annoying. They were never truly free of Oh Jinwon.

Sieun raised his hand into a fist, shaking it up and down.

“Yes.”

Beomseok continued to stare at him, waiting for him to continue. Sieun sighed deeply. He was still not willing to admit defeat, after all, Suho still had time to prove himself a jerk.

But for the first time, Sieun wished Beomseok was right.

“He’s… Okay.” Sieun signed, determined not to give any over-the-top praise.

Beomseok's smile widened, and he rolled his eyes, amused by his brother's stubbornness.

“I told you you’d like him.” Beomseok teased, happy with his apparent victory.

“I don’t like him.” Sieun corrected him, irritated. “I just don’t hate him. Not yet.”

Beomseok patted his shoulders lightly, still teasing his brother.

“Okay, I think he's very handsome too.”

Sieun pushed Beomseok’s face away, trying to hide his embarrassment. It was embarrassing; he never talked about crushes with Beomseok, but somehow his brother always knew.

It wasn’t that he had a crush on Suho. Sure, Sieun wouldn’t deny that the guy was handsome, but a lot of guys were. He was nothing out of the ordinary, and it took a lot more than good looks to earn his trust.

Ahn Suho didn't seem like a jerk, but he still had to prove that he wasn't one.

After they left cram school that same day, Beomseok looked at the driver.

“Mr. Park,” He called. “We need to stop at the convenience store. You can park here.”

The driver complied, parking a street away from the store. Sieun stared at his brother. He hadn’t said anything about stopping at a convenience store, so it was obviously a lie. And if Beomseok had to lie, he wanted to have a serious and emotional talk.

Sieun sighed deeply. He got out of the car, following his brother until they were far enough away from the limousine. Mr. Park was still trying to spy on them from the rearview mirror, no matter how discreetly he tried to be, it was noticeable.

“Sieun,” Beomseok said, looking disappointed. “I didn’t say anything before, but I noticed the bruises.”

Sieun lowered his head, aware that anyone would have noticed that he had gotten out of a fight. How could he be so careless? He should have hidden it better. Mr. Park must have noticed by now. And he would tell Oh Jinwon at the first opportunity.

“Sieun, look at me.” Beomseok waved his hands in his face, forcing him to look at him. “What did I tell you about fighting?”

His voice was firm. Beomseok rarely got angry, and when he did, he seemed like a different person. He was one of the few who could scare Sieun, and he didn’t have to move a muscle to do it. His presence was enough.

Sieun surrendered. He didn't have much of a choice.

“I didn't start the fight.” He tried to defend himself.

“Tell me another one.” Beomseok scolded him. Okay, it wasn’t exactly true, but it still wasn’t his fault. “If Dad finds out about this, he’ll kill us.”

Sieun felt that old anger return.

“And who cares about him?” He signaled, being answered by Beomseok's irritated expression.

“I do Sieun. Or do you think I love getting hit because of you?”

Sieun’s blood ran cold. He suddenly felt very selfish. He hated causing trouble for Beomseok; he had already done it too much. His brother didn’t deserve to go through any more of this.

“I’m sorry,” he pleaded, seeing Beomseok’s expression soften. “ But it was very important.”

“Seriously? So important that it's worth being punished?”

“They were harassing a boy,” Sieun signed, feeling frustrated. “I couldn’t just stand by.”

Beomseok’s face darkened even more. He approached his brother, signing and speaking slowly.

“And this boy is your problem?” It was a question, even though there was already a correct answer.

Sieun looked away. He shook his head. Juntae wasn’t his problem, and he shouldn’t have gotten involved. But his eyes were begging for help, so how could Sieun just ignore him?

“I don’t understand.” Sieun signed calmly. “When Suho saved you, you said he was amazing. Why am I different?”

It was unfair. It was as if Sieun was constantly punished for things that made others get rewards. He saved someone, wasn’t that a good thing to do?

Beomseok frowned. He took a deep breath, irritated. As if just the mention of Suho had already changed his mood.

“You’re not fucking Ahn Suho.” Beomseok reminded him. “You want to know why? Why is he different from us?”

Sieun nodded. Beomseok was already acting strange, and he always said something stupid when he got emotional. But Sieun needed to hear the answer; he wanted his brother to be honest with him.

“Because Suho doesn’t have to worry about a psychopath waiting for him at home!” He shouted, poking Sieun a little too hard. “No, what’s waiting for him at home is a loving grandmother, preparing dinner. It’s a beautiful girl, ready to shower him with kisses. It’s a comfortable home, where he can do whatever the fuck he wants!”

Sieun tried to hold his brother's arms to calm him down, but nothing was working. He had never seen him talk like that about Suho, so… Bitter. Angry. It seemed like his chest was burning with anger.

“That asshole has no idea how lucky he is!” He finished, finally stopping to breathe.

Sieun was no longer sure what Beomseok felt for Suho. It seemed like a great mix of admiration, passion, and envy. Beomseok himself seemed unsure; perhaps he felt a thousand confusing feelings for Suho, and didn't know how to express them.

Beomseok took a deep breath, catching his breath. He put his hand on his head, as if it already hurt. He widened his eyes, thinking about everything he had said. Panic spread across his expression, which was completely different from the anger from seconds ago.

“Sieun…” Beomseok said, confused by his outburst. “Sorry, I… I don’t know what came over me.”

Sieun held his hand, trying to comfort him.

“It's okay. You're just tired.”

God, they were so tired. Maybe that was why they were arguing so much. They needed to take out their pent-up anger on someone, and unfortunately, Oh Jinwon wasn’t an option.

“Ignore everything I said,” Beomseok asked, his eyes fluttering. “Suho is a really nice guy, I don't know why I said that.”

But he knew. Just like everyone else in that city, Beomseok would rather deny his feelings than face them. So he would never resolve them either.

I'm no different from him. No one here is.

“Beomseok. I'll stop by the convenience store, okay?”

His brother agreed. But they both knew Sieun was lying. He just needed to take a breather, to prolong the inevitable.

His body moved, but his mind was elsewhere. Beomseok always told him that they had too many problems to worry about others. And even though he agreed, Sieun still made impulsive decisions.

He didn’t know Ahn Suho. Maybe he really did have an easy and lucky life like Beomseok said. But for some reason, that anxious and clumsy boy didn’t seem at all satisfied with his life. His eyes had dark circles, as if he hadn’t slept in days. Yet, there he was, solving Sieun’s problems.

Idiot.

Suddenly, someone pulled his arm forcefully. Sieun tried unsuccessfully to free himself, but he didn't even have time to fight back before he was released.

It was Ahn Suho. But he didn’t look like the same boy from the music room. He was yelling, exploding with rage. Staring at Sieun as if there was something wrong with him. His brows furrowed, and he glared back at Suho. Who did he think he was? Okay, Sieun should have paid attention to the road, but that didn’t give Suho the right to yell at him.

Sieun was going to just ignore him; he had to go home and didn't want to get upset over anything. But then Suho said those words.

“Answer me! Fuck, are you deaf or what!?”

That hurt Sieun, but he couldn't show any weakness. So he glared at Suho and left as fast as he could. He passed Beomseok, who walked towards Suho avoiding his brother's eyes.

Sieun got into the limousine, slamming the door shut.

Stupid. I was stupid.

Of course, Suho would be no different from all the idiots who picked on him. He was just another teenage boy, another ignorant student at Eunjang who would start ignoring Sieun the moment he realized his deafness. Or worse, he would be like Hyoman, too fascinated to leave him alone.

Why didn't they treat him like everyone else? What made him so different from the others?

Beomseok opened the door, sitting down next to him. Sieun didn't want to talk to him, but his brother would insist on the subject anyway.

“What did Suho want?” Beomseok signaled as Mr. Park started the car.

“Nothing much. He just saved me from a car.”

Sieun didn't exactly want to tell the truth. Okay, before he wanted to be 100% sure about Ahn Suho being a jerk, but after seeing his brother's outburst, he didn't want to cause trouble between them. Their relationship already seemed pretty fragile. Plus, he didn't want Beomseok to find out that his only friend was an asshole.

“Any new opinions on him?” Beomseok asked.

“He's conceited and predictable.” Was all Sieun replied.

The rest of the journey was silent, not just because of their little argument or Ahn Suho's idiocy. No, they were too busy dreading the fate that awaited them back home.

Sieun was tense. He and Beomseok entered the mansion, and his brother tried to hide his trembling. Oh Jinwon was waiting for them, sitting on the sofa, staring at the door as if he lived to torment them.

For a moment, Sieun wished his mother were there.

“Good evening, Father,” Beomseok said.

Oh Jinwon slowly stood up. He walked towards the two of them with the same neutral expression as always.

“May I know the reason for the delay?” He approached Beomseok, shaking his fist.

His brother swallowed hard.

“W-we stopped by the convenience store. But we couldn't buy anything, the stock was out.” Jinwon knew he was lying, but he accepted the answer.

“I hope this doesn’t happen again.” He sounded gentle, but there was always a threat behind his words.

“Yes, sir,” Beomseok replied, like a robot following orders.

Jinwon took out his phone. He opened a news story, showing it to the boys. He smiled, as if he were proud. It was pure performance, like everything the man did.

“Congressman Oh Jinwon’s Children Top This Year’s Math Olympiad.”

It was the title of the article. Sieun held back his eyes from rolling. He hadn’t done it to make Jinwon proud; he simply liked studying and was very good at math. That man had nothing to do with his achievements.

“It seems like you guys aren’t that useless after all,” he said, as if it were a compliment. “But Beomseok… I’m afraid I have a question.”

Beomseok kept his gaze steady, even as the rest of his body trembled.

“What is your question, Father?”

“Tell me…” He approached, looking down at Beomseok. “How come your deaf brother came first, while you came second?”

Beomseok's jaw clenched. Before he could even respond, his father slapped him hard, sending him tumbling backwards. Sieun flinched automatically, hating that he couldn't defend his brother. He should have tried less; he should have gotten some questions wrong on purpose.

Oh Jinwon looked at Sieun next, approaching him.

I'm not afraid. I'm not afraid.

“And you… Do you think I didn’t notice that you’re hurt? It seems that changing schools wasn’t enough to change your problematic behavior.”

Beomseok stood up, standing next to his brother.

“It's my fault, Father. I should have taken care of him.” Beomseok's eyes begged for mercy.

Sieun hated that his brother tried to protect him; in the end, he only ended up getting hurt more. He preferred Jinwon to take his anger out on him because, unlike Beomseok, Sieun had no emotional connection with the man.

“I don't remember telling you to get up.” Jinwon kicked Beomseok hard, making him fall to the ground again.

Sieun clenched his fists tightly. Facing Oh Jinwon was very tempting, but he didn’t want to make things worse for Beomseok.

“Are you trying to embarrass me!?” He shouted, coming face to face with Sieun. “Do you know what people will say if this gets on the news?”

Sieun didn’t care about Oh Jinwon’s political career. He stared at him, using his intense eyes to not look away from the man for even a second, making him even more infuriated.

“Damn brat. I told you not to look at me with those eyes.”

Oh Jinwon slapped him hard, hitting Sieun squarely on the cheek. He struggled to stay still, not moving. Seeing the anger in Jinwon's eyes at his indifference was satisfying.

“Your little-”

“Father, please!” Beomseok begged.

Jinwon looked away from his son. He sighed, as if he was moved.

“You know what? I can't waste time with you, I have to prepare for Saturday's celebration.”

Sieun and Beomseok looked at each other in confusion. Celebration? That man was always coming up with stupid reasons to show off his house to other arrogant rich people. Sieun would have laughed if he weren't so tense.

“I’m throwing a party to celebrate the results of the Math Olympiads.” He said casually, as if he hadn’t been hitting them seconds before. “Oh, and I have a surprise. Beomseok, since you haven’t caused me any trouble this week, I’ll allow you a guest of your choice.”

Beomseok’s eyes widened. He quickly stood up, giving an exaggerated bow. There was a genuine smile on his face. It was sad that something so simple could make his brother so happy.

“I thank you, father!”

Jinwon smiled proudly. He held Sieun's face tightly, pressing tightly against his bruises.

“But you… I'd better not see you at the celebration on Saturday.” He let go of his face. “Great. Now let's rest, shall we?”

Sieun returned to his room in silence. When he lay down on the bed, he noticed that there were some new messages on his phone.

Mother

Sieun, your father told me about your score in the Math Olympiad. Good job, son. I'm sorry, but I won't be able to make it to the celebration on Saturday. I'll try to spend more time at home next week.

Sieun sighed, putting away his phone. There was nothing warm in her messages. Even her congratulations were cold, as if Sieun had done nothing more than his duty. And she insisted on calling Oh Jinwon “your father,” even when Sieun had made it very clear that the man was not, and would never be, his father.

Not that his real father was much different from his mother. Since their separation, he had become even more absent. He would text now and then, promise to visit, but never did. He was probably relieved that he no longer had to care for a deaf and fragile son. Just as his mother was glad that she could leave his upbringing in someone else's hands.

She must have believed that Oh Jinwon was, at the very least, a good man. She might be absent, but Sieun wanted to hold on to the hope that she wasn’t cruel. Or maybe she knew everything, maybe she didn’t agree with Jinwon’s methods, but she didn’t have the energy to care.

No. It would be better if she were oblivious to everything.

Sieun didn’t cry; it had been a long time since he had cried. But he grabbed his pillow, holding it tightly, as if he was afraid that it would go away too.

As contradictory as it was, that night he imagined Suho's hand holding his. Warm, comfortable, and safe. He was an idiot, but Sieun still felt attached to the boy who met him in the music room.

On Saturday, Sieun was in his room painting. He didn't care that he was banned from the party; he didn't want to go anyway. His mind was a whirlwind of emotions, and at times like these, painting was the only thing that calmed him down.

Suho was worse than he thought. He didn't leave him alone for a second, and on top of that, he mocked the sign language in front of him. Sieun expected too much from someone he didn't even know.

He didn't even put on his AirPods, because he kept thinking about Suho invading his privacy and pulling them out as if he had some right to them. And he still dared to smile, not in mockery, but in pure satisfaction, as if Sieun should smile back. He was worse than a bully; he seemed not to think he was doing anything wrong.

Sieun gripped his brush tightly, staring at his painting. The guitar brought back fond memories of when things weren’t so terrible. When his parents seemed to care, even if only a little. But even that small happiness had been ripped away from him.

His hands made a few more strokes until he suddenly stopped. Sieun turned his face back, feeling an uncomfortable presence behind him. He jumped in fright. Ahn Suho was standing in his room.

Beomseok said his friend Suho would be at the party. Sieun didn't care; he wouldn't see him anyway. So imagine his surprise when Suho suddenly showed up, invading his privacy again.

His fingers tightened on his palette. Sieun was prepared to fight, but the fight never came. Suho was never tired of surprising him; every time Sieun thought he had figured him out, that boy would do something unexpected. It was as if he was programmed to confuse him.

“Sorry,” Suho said. But he didn't just say it, he used sign language.

Sieun didn't even try to hide his surprise.

“I didn't know you were deaf.”

Suho kept proving him wrong. At that moment, he realized that perhaps he had never truly understood the boy.

He talked to me. He spoke my language.

And then they talked. Suho didn't act like it was weird; he talked, asked questions without fear, and treated Sieun like anyone else. He didn't act like Sieun was an idiot who couldn't understand him. He made jokes and even laughed at his teasing.

And when he realized the vastness of his own ignorance, he didn't keep apologizing and making things awkward. He simply invited Sieun to the music club.

His heart pounded, as if it would explode.

I want it. I want it so much.

Sieun loved music. He loved feeling the vibrations, which spoke to him in a completely new language. Sometimes he saw the lyrics, but most of the time he preferred to simply feel the rhythm, to let the music guide him.

And Suho seemed to understand perfectly. He had known this ever since that moment in the music room when Suho had talked about his passion for bands. His eyes were shining, as if he could burst with happiness.

But Sieun was pulled back to reality before he could cling too tightly to the illusion. He knew that no security guard would listen to him, so he showed Suho an escape route. Well, his escape route for when he needed to get out of that house.

But he didn't expect Suho to fall into the cake. And he certainly didn't expect him to dirty Oh Jinwon's favorite, impeccable suit. Sieun put his hands over his mouth, shocked by the mess Suho had caused at the party.

And then he did something he hadn’t done in a long time. Sieun laughed. He opened his mouth wide, laughing at the scene as if he were a child again. His eyes watered, and a few tears even fell.

He was crying with laughter.

Suho bumped into several employees, spilled drinks and food, and completely ruined the view of that well-kept backyard. The guests were scared, moving away in fear that they would be the next victim.

It was beautiful. The security guards failing to catch him, Jinwon losing his composure and yelling like a mad dog — all while he was still covered in cake — all those snobbish people staring at the man in a mixture of disappointment and anger.

This would be on the news, no doubt, and Sieun could already see the headline.

“Congressman Oh Jinwon’s party ends in total disaster.”

He held his stomach, which was already hurting from laughing so much. Sieun had never felt so happy.

Oh Jinwon glared at him, catching his amusement. His eyes burned with anger, and Sieun knew it was going to be a hellish night. But he didn't care; he laughed in Jinwon's face, never looking away once.

This is the best day ever.

It was already nighttime by the time the staff had cleaned up. All the guests were evacuated after the mess, with promises that they would be compensated. Jinwon's anxious face was priceless as he practically begged them not to spread the news.

But they were rich and snobbish people. Of course, they would not miss an opportunity to humiliate and harm someone they considered an adversary. They were not friends, not without gaining something in return.

Beomseok and Sieun stood side by side, waiting for Jinwon to arrive and be punished. Sieun didn't care what happened to him, but he hoped that his brother would be spared. That, however, was impossible, since Suho was his guest.

Jinwon would punish both of them.

And speaking of the devil, he walked through the door, stopping in front of the teenagers. He was angry, in a way that was rare even for him. Beomseok swallowed hard, already lowering his head in submission.

“Do you have any idea what a mess you’ve made?” His voice was low, which was more frightening than his screams.

“We’re sorry, Dad,” Beomseok said. “Suho isn’t that kind of person. I’m sure it was a misunderstanding—”

“A misunderstanding?” Jinwon repeated, approaching his son. “I permit you to bring a guest, and this is how you thank me? By bringing some of the rabble into our home?”

Sieun clenched his fists. Jinwon could say whatever he wanted to him, but seeing him insult Suho made him tremble with rage. So what if Jinwon was rich? He had nothing else besides that. That didn’t make him any better than anyone else.

“What, did that piss you off?” Jinwon asked Sieun. “I bet it did, since that delinquent was in your room.”

“Dad, I was the one who invited Suho. He just stopped by Sieun's room by accident.” Beomseok tried to defend him, still not looking at his father.

Jinwon snorted, placing his hand on his forehead.

“Do you think I'm an idiot?” He asked, strangely calm. “I know very well that this was a plan of yours, wanting to destroy my image.”

Beomseok looked at him, sweating coldly from nervousness.

“No, Dad, I swear it wasn't a plan—”

“Not that we need to try to destroy your image. You do that on your own.” Sieun replied to Jinwon, emphasizing each sign.

He didn't take his eyes off the man for a moment. Beomseok became even more desperate; he became so pale that it seemed like he was going to faint at any second.

Jinwon got really close to Sieun, almost burning with anger.

“I told you not to use sign language at this house. What did that little shit say, Beomseok?” Jinwon asked his son, but he didn't look away from Sieun.

“I, well—”

Sieun stared at Beomseok. Tell the truth, that’s what his gaze said. He wanted Jinwon to know exactly what his words were. Beomseok was panicking, clearly disagreeing with his plan, but he wouldn’t deny his brother’s wishes.

“He said we don’t need to destroy your image,” Beomseok admitted, looking at the wall. “That you do it yourself.”

Jinwon remained silent, as if calculating his next move. He wasn’t an idiot; he knew he needed to try harder if he wanted to truly hurt Sieun.

“Very well.” He said, seeming to have made a decision. “I'm going to make one thing very clear to you, so read my lips carefully, you brat.”

Sieun kept his expression neutral.

“If I see that delinquent in this house again… I swear I will end his life.” He threatened. “I will find out everything about him, and I will prevent him from living a peaceful life. Do you understand me?”

Sieun nodded, despite himself. Jinwon wasn't bluffing; he could end someone like Suho's life in seconds if that was what he wanted. Sieun wasn't easily scared, but he was afraid that Jinwon would carry out his threat.

“Good boy. Now, Beomseok, take off your clothes.”

Sieun’s blood ran cold. Don’t punish him, he didn’t do anything wrong. He wanted to scream at Jinwon, but that wouldn’t change anything. Beomseok complied, starting to take off each piece of clothing while trying not to shiver.

Sieun didn't want to give in, but he thought about begging.

“What? Are you worried about him?” Jinwon scoffed, walking over to his golf club. “You should be, this is your fault. Get down on the floor, Beomseok.”

His brother obeyed, and this time Sieun was not stubborn. He knelt on the ground, shaking his head vigorously. Please, please.

But Oh Jinwon just laughed.

“No need to exaggerate. You won’t even see it.” He gestured with his hand, calling one of the security guards, who stopped beside him. “In fact, you won’t see anything for a while. I gave you too much freedom.”

The security guard pulled his arm hard, lifting Sieun off the ground. He struggled, trying to free himself in vain as he watched Jinwon lift the golf club over Beomseok's back. Sieun was desperate, but his efforts were useless against someone bigger and stronger than him.

The security guard opened the door to the abandoned room, throwing Sieun inside. Sieun tried to get up quickly, but the door was locked right in his face. It was dark again. He couldn't see Beomseok, and he couldn't hear him either. He didn't know what was happening outside, and he didn't know how long Jinwon would keep him locked inside.

Sieun pounded his fists on the door, hoping someone would hear. He tried hard to scream, but he wasn’t sure if it was working. Could no one hear Beomseok? Did no one see his brother’s suffering? Or were they just pretending they couldn’t hear him, not wanting to get involved in another family’s problems?

Sieun didn’t know how much time had passed when he finally gave up. His fists burned, his throat hurt. He lowered himself, sitting with his back to the door. He placed his arms on his knees, hiding his face.

Without permission, tears fell after so long. He hated crying; it was exactly what Oh Jinwon wanted. It was so stupid, so idiotic that Sieun felt helpless in front of that man.

He tried to think about the party, about Suho, destroying everything Jinwon had worked hard to build.

He smiled, a smile so weak it didn’t seem real. But it was still a smile. And only one person was the reason for it. Sieun imagined Suho was there in front of him. Trying hard to learn his language, asking questions without fear, and defending him.

Sieun didn't need protection. But God, how he wished he had someone to protect him.

Chapter Text

“He talked to me, Yeongi!” Suho shouted, jumping around the room.

“Yeah, I know. You've said that 5 times already.” The girl rolled her eyes, crossing her arms.

Ever since he left that crazy party, Suho couldn't stay still. He kept thinking about Sieun, about the way his eyes shone, full of expectation and something more that Suho hadn't been able to decipher yet.

He told Yeongi everything, including the part about crashing — accidentally, by the way — Oh Jinwon’s party. It made her laugh out loud, and she reloaded the news on her phone several times, looking for some headline about it.

But Suho hoped no one would know about this. It was still his fault, and he was afraid that he had complicated things for Beomseok and Sieun. If his confusion hurt them, he would never forgive himself.

“And he paints really well!” Suho commented, remembering the artwork scattered around Sieun’s room. “I swear, he should win an award or something.”

Yeongi tried to hold back her smile. The whole scene would have been adorable if Suho hadn't been so talkative that he'd tire out everyone around him.

“Of course, you'd love to reward him just for existing.” Yeongi teased. “I didn't know you were so annoying when you fell in love.”

Suho stared at her with a frown. He certainly wasn’t in love. He was happy to make a new friend, just as he had been when he first approached Juntae.

“I'm not in love,” Suho replied. “And even if I were, it would never work out.”

Yeongi's smile slowly faded. Suho looked away, embarrassed for talking too much.

It was an undeniable truth ever since Yeon Sieun stepped out of that limousine. He was a rich kid, his room cost more than Suho's house. His father was a famous congressman, and he lived in a world unreachable for mere mortals.

Meanwhile, Suho had to work to support his grandmother and Yeongi, who were his responsibility. He wore the same clothes for years, and rode that motorcycle that was already as old as he was. Sieun was untouchable, and someone like him deserved a better life than Suho could provide.

“Earth to Suho, hello!” Yeongi snapped her fingers in front of his face, snapping him out of his thoughts. “Why wouldn't it work?”

“You know,” Suho replied, defeated. “He lives in a different world than I do. Besides, his father definitely has a bounty on my head now.”

Suho remembered Oh Jinwon's furious eyes, ready to bury his body right there. He would be the first to deny any romantic involvement he could have with Sieun. Well, not that Suho wanted to get romantically involved with him. Of course not.

“With a father-in-law like that, your place in heaven is already guaranteed.” Yeongi joked, making him laugh. “But Suho, seriously. Anyone would be very lucky to have you. Including Sieun.”

Suho nodded, but didn't answer. He wouldn't argue with Yeongi; she was always trying to boost his self-esteem. But Suho knew that anyone who got involved with him would also end up at rock bottom. Taking Sieun, that impeccable boy, to his crumbling house full of financial debts? Suho felt chills just thinking about it.

He shook his head.

No, he had to think positively. He had talked to Sieun, an undeniable step forward. He couldn't let bad thoughts ruin his night. Not when it had been so long since he had felt this happy.

It's a victory. At least today, I should celebrate.

Suho fixed his hair so many times that he had lost count. He was standing in front of the school gate, waiting for a limousine to arrive. It was ironic that he had arrived early for the same reason as last time: to apologize to Sieun. He still felt guilty about the mess at the party.

When the limousine finally arrived, Suho started waving. Sieun got out of the car and faced him directly. He didn't wave back, but walked up to Suho without ignoring him, completely different from their last encounter at school.

“Hi.” Suho signed, raising his pinky finger and rotating his hand.

“Hi.” Sieun signed back.

He didn’t seem angry about the party, but his eyes were more tired than usual, and his face was slightly red. Suho looked at his fists. There were small bruises from the impact, as if he had punched something. Or someone.

“Did you fight again?” Suho asked, hoping not to sound nosy.

Sieun nodded. Well, that was a problem. Suho hoped that his presence at the music club would keep Sieun from getting into fights again.

“Don't do that,” Suho said, signaling no with his hand. “It's dangerous.”

Sieun rolled his eyes. Not in irritation, but as if Suho had said something funny. Maybe he just couldn’t help but get into fights. If so, his luck wasn’t much different from Suho’s.

“Ah!” Suho exclaimed, remembering his original plan. He repeated the apology signal. “ Sorry. For the trouble I caused at the party.”

Sieun’s lips twitched, as if he was holding back a smile. He didn’t seem the least bit annoyed with Suho, even after everything he’d done. In fact, he seemed almost amused. He held his hands out in an L-shape, passing one over the other.

Suho smiled. He didn’t know why, but if his antics had made Sieun happy, then it was a victory.

“You… said it’s okay, right?” Suho asked, referring to the sign.

“Yes.” Sieun signed, moving his fist up and down.

Suho smiled proudly. He felt his chest warm every time he learned a new sign. In a way, it was like learning to play and sing for the first time. At first, you have no idea what you’re doing, but the more you learn, the more you realize that it’s just a different way of communicating.

“Sieun, do you play any instruments?”

It was great to reopen the music club, but getting a band was still urgent. Suho needed a bass and drums, but all he had were Juntae's keyboard and his electric guitar.

Sieun shook his head. He lowered his head, as if trying to hide his embarrassment. Suho tried not to be disappointed; his band was still incomplete. But Sieun was still an important member since he loved music as much as he did.

Suho waved his hand in front of his eyes, causing Sieun to raise his head to look at him.

“Hey, don't be ashamed. You paint really well.” He remembered Sieun's paintings, which gave him a sudden idea. “Wait, you could be like the designer of our band!”

Sieun’s eyes lit up with excitement. He nodded his head as hard as he could.

“Yes, I really want to.” He signed, clearly happy even without smiling.

How does he do it? How does he express everything just with his eyes?

Suho looked away. He felt like he would burn if he continued to stare into Sieun’s intense eyes.

Luckily, he was saved by a third person. Juntae arrived at the school, running towards them. He waved, being answered by Suho.

“Juntae! I have great news, man!” Suho shouted, seeing Juntae catch his breath.

He looked at Sieun, confused about his presence. Then he waved directly at him, receiving a shy wave back.

“And what is it?” He asked, adjusting his glasses.

“Tcharam!” Suho spread his arms, pointing at Sieun. “We can reopen the club thanks to our third member! Plus, he’s also our band’s designer.”

Juntae’s eyes widened. A faint smile spread across his face, as if he still couldn’t believe that Suho had been able to accomplish his goal.

“Wow, that’s really cool.” He smiled broadly, but his expression soon turned crestfallen. “I… Sieun… I need to say something.”

Sieun looked at Juntae, waiting for him to continue. The president was sweating nervously, moving his hands uncomfortably. He bowed directly to Sieun.

“I… I wanted to thank you for saving me. And… I apologize for running away.”

There was a childish sincerity in his words. Sieun also seemed to notice this; he clearly didn’t hold any grudges towards Juntae.

Sieun clasped his palms together, rubbing them into each other. Suho instantly cheered up.

“He said you’re welcome!” Suho informed, an arrogant smile plastered on his face from deciphering so many signs.

Sieun rolled his eyes, as if he were watching a dog repeat the same trick in an attempt to impress its owner. Juntae put his hand over his mouth, hiding his amused giggles.

“Thanks for informing me, Suho.” He thanked, still trying to hide his smile.

“Did I say something funny?” Suho asked, seeing both boys shake their heads. “Well, either way, we can convince the director to reopen the club during the lunch break.”

It almost felt like a dream. In just a few days, Suho had made such a breakthrough. Maybe he had been worried for no reason, maybe things would work out for him.

Suddenly, Juntae’s expression became serious again. He approached Sieun and touched his arm lightly.

“Seriously, I can never thank you enough. I… I don't know what would have happened if it weren't for you.”

He spoke so quietly that Suho had to strain to hear. They clearly hadn’t told him the whole story about Hyoman. Not that it was any of his business, if Juntae preferred to keep some things a secret, then that was his decision.

On the other hand, Suho hoped that one day he would trust him enough to open up. He didn't like being in the dark about Hyoman's true nature. Part of him felt that the guy was even worse than a bully who beat others up.

“Hey!” Suho jumped in fright, turning to the person responsible for the sudden scream. “Are you guys going to just stand there, or are you going to come in? I don't have all day!”

It was Mr. Choi, grumpy as ever. He was staring at the trio as if they had personally offended him — and that was probably the case.

“Good morning to you, too!” Suho replied. That old man wouldn't ruin his day. “Let's go!"

Suho put his arms around the two boys' shoulders, guiding them into the school. Juntae gave a warm smile, while Sieun subtly moved away. It was funny, they were complete opposites, but at the same time, they seemed to have a lot in common.

“Wait.” Mr. Choi called them, uncertain.

Suho turned to him, prepared to get scolded. But the old man wasn't angry, he even seemed... shy.

“Hey, if that brat Hyoman gets on your nerves… You can let me know.”

Suho’s eyes widened in surprise. The old man avoided his gaze, as if he were ashamed of his own words. Sieun turned his head slightly to the side, and Juntae adjusted his glasses, which were already falling off again.

“Thank you very much, Mr. Choi.” Juntae thanked him, giving him a quick bow. “Do you… happen to know Hyoman?”

“He is my nephew.”

Suho’s jaw dropped so wide it felt like it was about to split. What the hell? Thinking back, he could see the resemblance. It was amazing how people at that school loved to hide relevant information.

“Now go to your classroom!” He shouted, ignoring them again and being the grumpy old man he always was.

“This place always has something new, doesn't it?” Suho scoffed.

Juntae turned to Sieun.

“I bet Mr. Choi is more of a gentleman than Hyoman.” The boy nodded.

Juntae chuckled softly. He and Sieun had a knowing look in their eyes, like an inside joke that Suho wasn't part of. Still, he let himself smile, delighted at how the boys were already becoming friends.

Juntae must have been as lonely as Sieun. Maybe they had found the companionship they didn't even know they needed.

The company that Suho also needed.

“Reopen the music club?”The director asked, not looking at all interested.

During the break, the trio went to the principal's office to carry out their plan. Suho gave his best smile, capable of doing anything to convince the principal.

“That's right!” He replied. “There are three of us, enough to reopen the club.”

The director gave them an unimpressed look. He wasn’t on their side, but he didn’t seem to be against the idea either. He glanced at the boys, but his eyes stopped on Sieun. Suho stiffened automatically.

“Well, I don't know if you can say there are three of you.”

Suho sighed loudly. He could already predict where the conversation was going.

“How not? 1, 2, and 3.” He counted, pointing to each of the trio.

The director stared at him, as if expecting him to understand a hidden message. He gave up after receiving no response.

“Why would a deaf kid be in the music club?” he finally asked, not even having the decency to look embarrassed.

Suho tried to calm himself down. He was also somewhat ignorant about the subject before being taught by Sieun. Now he understood how annoying it must be to explain the same thing over and over again. Sieun nudged Suho.

“What an idiot.” He signed, imitating horns with his hand and turning it around his head, pointing at the director.

Suho held back his laughter, seeing the man's confused look. Sieun didn't even seem too affected; he was just waiting for Suho to answer for him. That act of trust made him feel warm inside.

“You can be sure that he understands music more than you do, director.” Suho smiled, not wanting to give any further explanation.

The director didn't even seem to mind the rude response. He wiped his hand over his eyes and yawned. The guy must have been dying to sleep; he probably didn't even really care about the whole music club thing.

“Okay.” He agreed. “But it's better that what happened last time doesn't happen again.”

Suho remembered Juntae’s words. He hadn’t been very clear; he had only said that there had been a fight, which didn’t explain anything. Well, the past was the past, and now he only had to worry about his bright future.

“It won't, sir,” Juntae replied, uncertain of his words.

He tensed up every time he heard about the music club fight. Was he involved in some way? But knowing Juntae, it was more likely that he had simply been affected by other people’s fight.

“We're going to be the best-behaved club in this school!” Suho promised, being stared at by a Sieun who clearly didn't believe his words.

“Just don't get into trouble.” The director asked, going back to looking at papers he didn't care about.

I'm not going to get into any more trouble.

“What of so serious happened at the music club, anyway?” Suho asked Juntae.

The trio was walking around outside. It was finally time for the club's activities, and Suho was dying to be able to play. But he still wanted to know what had happened; he didn't need old problems to come back to haunt his club.

“Look, it's a long story,” Juntae replied. “And I don't even have all the details.”

“Well, gossip never killed anyone, right? Tell me what you know.”

Juntae sighed in defeat. Suho might be annoying, but being a pushy person always brought him benefits.

“The club was made up of four people. Baku, Gotak, Seongje, and Baekjin. They had a band, and they were really good.” Suho just nodded. He didn't know any of the people mentioned. “But then there was a fight. A physical one. They got hurt. Seongje and Baekjin changed schools, and now they're in Ganghak’s band.”

Suho stared at Juntae, waiting for him to continue the story. But the boy just kept quiet and kept walking, as if he hadn't said anything. Seriously, why doesn't anyone tell me anything in this school!?

“Is that all?” Suho asked, indignant. “Man, that doesn't explain anything!”

Juntae muttered something inaudible, probably complaining about his endless questions.

“Look, I told you I don't know the details. I only know about the fight because everyone saw it; it was pretty brutal.”

After all, what would make band members physically attack each other? They didn't just get that way because they lost a competition, right? They must have had other personal issues involved.

Suho swallowed hard, wondering if he would get beaten up by those Baku and Gotak guys after missing a note.

Sieun nudged him, getting his attention. He started writing something on his notepad. It had been Suho's idea, after all, he was still learning sign language, and Juntae understood less than he did. Sieun needed a practical way to communicate, and writing was the best option when he needed to say something more complex.

'I bet Seongje started the fight. He's pretty weird.'

Do they know each other?

Suho’s eyes widened. He didn’t even know this Seongje guy, but for some reason, he felt anxious just thinking about Sieun talking to him.

“Do you know him?” Suho and Juntae asked at the same time.

Juntae seemed even more nervous than him. He looked at Sieun as if he couldn't believe he had come out alive after something like that. Suho hoped Seongje was just another pathetic bully, not a complete psychopath.

Sieun nodded. He started writing again.

'Yes. His father is a politician, so Seongje has been to my house.'

Suho was about to explode. Not only had the guy gotten into a brutal fight, but he was the son of a politician? That didn’t smell good. Juntae definitely didn’t look happy about the news.

“Oh my God,” Juntae commented, and Suho decided he needed more information.

“Is this guy dangerous or something?” He asked, hoping the answer was no.

But Juntae's gaze gave him another answer.

“Very dangerous. He hates to lose; he created his own band in Ganghak because he said Eunjang never won. But he doesn't just love playing music, he loves to fight too. He's never lost a competition, and he's always scaring his opponents.”

Suho put his hand on his head. Would his problems never stop coming? Now he also had to compete with a psychopath who hated losing? And to make matters worse, he was a rich psychopath.

“And are you okay, Sieun?” Suho asked, feeling his concern grow.

Sieun shrugged his shoulders, as if telling him to stop being an idiot.

'Of course I am. He was just a weirdo who kept staring at me. We didn't fight or anything.'

Suho sighed in relief. Still, the idea that Seongje could find Sieun at any moment and Suho wouldn't even be able to help him was worrying. Especially if the guy found out that they were going to participate in the competition he wanted to win so much.

“Be careful, Sieun, he's quite unpredictable,” Juntae warned, being answered by a positive nod.

Suddenly, a ball flew past Suho, almost hitting his head. He caught it before it fell, afraid it would bounce back. He turned to the person responsible for it, seeing a boy in a blue hoodie walking towards them.

“Sorry, man, can you pass the ball?” He asked. He was clearly part of the basketball club that was playing on the court.

Suho was about to throw the ball, but was interrupted by Juntae's whisper.

“Gotak?”

Gotak? Gotak, like the former club member?

Suho brightened up. The guy didn't actually look dangerous. He had a slovenly style and looked like an ordinary high school teenager. Great, Suho couldn't let the chance pass him by.

“Are you Gotak?” He asked, pretending to be clueless.

The boy gave him a questioning look, but quickly answered.

“Yes, Go Hyuntak. And you are?”

“Ahn Suho. I'm the new student!”

Hyuntak nodded, much more interested in his ball than anything Suho had to say.

“Cool, man.” He stared at Suho, trying to understand his intentions. “We're training now. Can you pass the ball?”

Juntae nudged Suho, almost begging him with his eyes not to bring up the subject. Sieun just yawned, bored and urging Suho with his eyes to go to the club quickly. Dealing with those two wouldn't be easy.

“Of course.” The two boys sighed in relief. “But first, I have to ask you something.”

Juntae held his breath, regretting celebrating too soon. Sieun, on the other hand, rolled his eyes, tired of the argument before it even started.

“What is it?” Hyuntak asked.

“Do you want to join the music club?” Suho asked, as subtly as a runaway truck.

Hyuntak’s eyes widened. For a second, it seemed like he was going to laugh. But he quickly realized that it wasn’t a joke from Juntae and Sieun’s serious looks.

“Wait… Are you serious?” His previously relaxed voice was replaced by anger.

He didn't look so harmless anymore, but Suho had no other choice. He and that Baku guy were good enough to compete; he needed them. Besides, they were also the only other musicians in that school.

“Yes. I heard you were participating before, and I need a full band to compete, so…”

Hyuntak laughed in pure disbelief. His brows furrowed, and he approached Suho carefully. Sieun positioned himself, already prepared in case the guy started a fight.

“H-he's new, he doesn't know what happened,” Juntae said, standing next to Suho.

“Stay out of this,” Hyuntak ordered. “Listen here. You better not even think about reopening this club. Much less competing.”

Suho was not intimidated. He faced Hyuntak head-on, outraged by his audacity. Who did he think he was to give him orders? Suho would open that damn club even if it cost him his life.

“Too late,” Suho replied, a teasing smile on his lips. “I’ve already reopened it.”

Hyuntak's face was so red he looked like he was about to explode. That guy had serious anger management issues.

“You idiot. Let me explain something to you.”

Juntae was shaking so hard he might faint, and Sieun watched the interaction, waiting for his moment to intervene. But Suho only moved closer to Hyuntak, looking down at him. No matter how good his reason for trying to stop him was, Suho wouldn't give up.

“If you participate in the competition, we will become the target of Ganghak's idiots,” Hyuntak explained. “And Baku is having peace after so long. If Seongje and Baekjin come back to ruin it, you will regret it.”

Suho swallowed hard. He wasn't afraid of Hyuntak, but his threat seemed very real. He must have been a very close friend of Baku. Suho didn't want to bring trouble to them, but he also had his own problems that he needed to solve. And they were his priority.

“Sorry, man. But I’m going to participate in the competition,” Suho said, keeping his voice firm and confident. “And I’m going to win, whether you like it or not.”

Hyuntak became even more furious. Suho prepared himself for a fight to start, but it never came. Despite his aggressive stance, Hyuntak didn't seem to be in the mood to fight either. He sighed, as if accepting Suho's stubbornness.

“Fine then. But don't say I didn't warn you.” He threatened, pulling the ball out of Suho's hands with force and returning to the court.

Suho took a deep breath. For a moment, he really thought he would break his promise and disappoint his grandmother again. But that day hadn’t come yet.

“Suho, damn it!” Juntae complained. “Why did you say that?”

“Sorry, but someone didn’t give me all the details of the fight.” Suho retorted, feeling especially childish.

“Okay, sorry,” Juntae replied. “It’s just that it’s very personal. Gotak gets very sensitive when it comes to this subject. I didn’t want to share it.”

Suho wouldn't judge him for not telling him, although it was still annoying. Hyuntak was very emotional, fully capable of freaking out at any moment. And as much as he didn't want to admit it, Suho was worried about his words.

If we compete, will we become targets? What does that mean? Is it because of that psychopath Seongje?

It was as if Suho had been thrown into a completely new world. He didn't know the story or the rules, but he had to make do with whatever they decided to tell him. And so far, it wasn't much.

Sieun nudged him. Suho looked hopefully at his notepad, hoping it had some life-changing advice.

'That was terrible. Have you ever been told you don’t know how to talk?'

But that was still Yeon Sieun. With his sincerity and words that he didn’t care if they would hurt anyone. There was something almost amusing in his eyes, as if the whole situation was hilarious.

Suho took out his notepad, wanting to give him a clear answer.

'Look who's talking. You have zero social skills.'

He smiled, watching Sieun forcefully snatch the notepad back. The boy gave him an angry look. Even his anger was endearing.

“Wow, what a beautiful couple.” A voice interrupted them.

Suho sighed. He didn't even need to turn around to see who it was.

“What do you want, Hyoman?”

The bully walked towards them, but strangely, his posture was not aggressive. Juntae approached Sieun, who seemed ready to end the fight from the other day.

“Relax, mute, I don't want to fight,” Hyoman replied, sounding too sincere for someone like him.

“So what do you want?” Suho asked, his patience running out just by being close to Hyoman.

Hyoman looked at the basketball players. He approached Suho, smiling as if they were great friends.

“I saw your conversation with Gotak.” Of course you did. “So I decided to warn you about him.”

Suho's distrust did not leave him for a moment. He was not stupid enough to believe Hyoman, but he wanted to see how far he would go.

“Warn me?”

“Yeah, the guy is Baku's lackey. And he's crazy, a complete lunatic.” He spoke as if he truly believed his words. “He's the one who caused the trouble at the music club. He broke Baekjin's electric guitar, went after him, and Seongje. I wouldn't trust him if I were you.”

Oddly enough, that part didn't seem like a lie.

“Is that true, Juntae?” Suho asked, wanting more reliable confirmation.

“Well… Yes, he broke Baekjin’s electric guitar, but—”

“He hates that club. Did you see how his eyes were popping out of his head, right?” Hyoman interrupted, staring at Hyuntak on the court. “I'm just saying, he'll try to destroy your club, he won't even give you a chance to fight.”

Suho didn't want to, but he was partially convinced. Hyuntak seemed to have anger issues, and from the looks of it, he had broken Baekjin's electric guitar. Plus, he threatened Suho without any fear. But he still didn't know the full story.

He was trying to put together a puzzle without having all the pieces.

Sieun pulled his arm, pulling him out of his reverie.

“Let's go.” He signaled, dragging Suho behind him.

Suho followed him without complaint, but he took one last look at Gotak. The boy glared at Suho angrily, as if he were planning his downfall.

As if I didn't have enough problems already.

The music club was still a complete mess. Suho looked at the broken electric guitar he had noticed earlier. It was strange to know why it was there now. Why didn't that Baekjin guy take it back?

“Alright, time to clean up!” Suho shouted excitedly.

He was already used to cleaning up other people's messes. In a way, that was his job. Juntae gave a slight smile. He looked like he genuinely enjoyed organizing things. But Sieun made a face of disgust, as if he couldn't believe he was actually getting his hands dirty.

Suho held back his laughter. Of course, Sieun had zero experience with cleaning; he had employees who did the job for him. Suho took out his notepad, not wanting to miss the opportunity to tease him.

'What? The little rich boy has never cleaned anything before?'

Suho smiled even more when he saw Sieun's irritated expression. The boy gave him a light shove, but strong enough to knock him off balance. Suho was about to write another provocation, but Sieun pulled the notepad away before he could.

Sieun wrote something, turning the message to Suho. He kept his head down, avoiding his eyes. His cheeks were flushed, which only made him more adorable.

'I've never actually cleaned anything before. All right?'

Suho's eyes widened. There was Sieun, admitting that he didn't know how to do something as if it were the end of the world, hiding his face in shame. He's still going to give me a heart attack.

He laughed before he could stop himself. Sieun gave him another push, much harder this time. Now he looked genuinely angry.

“Don't laugh.” He ordered, leaving his hand in an L shape and shaking it under his chin as he shook his head.

His eyes had that glint, not just of irritation, but as if Suho's laughter genuinely upset him. He even pouted his lips, the most childish expression Suho had ever seen on his face. Of all people, it was the boy who always had a scowl.

“No, I’m not laughing because it’s funny,” Suho admitted, feeling every beat of his heart. He pinched his cheeks, shaking his head slightly. “It’s cute.”

He didn't know why he had made it a priority to learn that sign. But seeing Sieun's wide eyes and his face so red it looked like a bell pepper was enough to make his day.

“Guys,” Juntae said, after silently observing. “I don’t want to interrupt, but I think we'd better clean up now.”

“You're right, Juntae. It's just that Sieun is so cute.” Suho teased again, repeating the sign.

Sieun pushed his face away with his hand, determined not to look at him. Juntae chuckled softly, clearly enjoying the interaction.

“Okay. Let's clean it up.” Suho agreed, trying to take Sieun's hand away from his face.

They cleaned and organized the room for a while. It was tiring, but also fun to be able to spend time with his new friends. When Juntae started cleaning the keyboard, Suho felt curious.

“How long have you been playing it?” He asked.

Juntae was a little thoughtful before answering.

“A long time ago.” He replied, staring at the keyboard as if he were going back in time. “There was a keyboard at my aunt's house. I was curious, and she taught me how to play.”

Suho was filled with nostalgia. He remembered his own childhood, the guitar that was too big for him. His father was not letting him give up, teaching him every note. Introducing him to his electric guitar, much harder to play, but much more attractive too.

“That’s really cool,” Suho replied. “Have you never thought about having a career?”

Juntae lowered his head. His eyes were sad.

“My parents never allowed it,” he replied, stopping his cleaning for a moment. “They said I should get a real job. That I shouldn’t end up like my aunt.”

Sieun, although quiet, was watching the conversation. Something in his eyes told Suho that he understood the feeling. Suho was lucky when it came to his parents. Sure, they had flaws and were sometimes too absent, leaving him alone with his grandmother. But they cared, they did their best to help him. That was why Suho would always miss them.

“That sucks. I should have a real job too, to help my grandma.” Suho replied, feeling awkward at how easily he shared something so personal. “But then I wouldn't be happy. And she would be sad. I refuse to be the reason for her sadness.”

Juntae stared at him, calculating his next words.

“I think my aunt would be sad too if I didn't follow my heart.” He replied. “My parents tell me not to end up like her... But she seems so happy. I think deep down, they envy her for not being able to be free like that. I still love them, they are good, but... They can't accept that they won't be able to protect me forever.”

Suho smiled, feeling proud. Juntae might be kind, but that didn't make him weak. In fact, the boy was braver than jerks like Choi Hyoman. Even though he was full of fear, he faced his challenges.

“You're really awesome, Juntae.” Suho praised, seeing Juntae look away in embarrassment.

Suddenly, Sieun got up from his seat. He walked over to Juntae, handing him his notepad.

'Your parents won't be with you your whole life. One day, they'll have to accept that you have your own life. Never let them stop you from being yourself.'

Suho’s eyes widened. Sieun wrote like a little poet. He was more observant than most people, and even though he spoke so little, he knew how to say the right thing. It was admirable.

Juntae gave a weak smile. His eyes filled with tears, and he quickly wiped his face with his hand, trying to wipe them away. Suho patted his shoulder a few times, trying to comfort him. Sieun didn’t touch him, but stayed by his side until he calmed down.

“Thank you very much, both of you.” His voice was shaky, but more honest than ever.

After so many doubts, Suho was sure of one thing.

I'm doing the right thing. I can't give up.

After cleaning up, they had some time to practice. Suho asked Juntae to play for him, and the boy obeyed, even though he was mortified. It was clear how much he loved music. For the first time, Juntae seemed completely free. His movements were not calculated or planned; they were pure instinct. As if he and the keyboard already spoke the same language.

The club's time was up before Suho could show off his musical skills. But for the first time, he felt like he had enough time.

Suho was walking Sieun to his limousine on the way out. Not only because he wanted to talk to him, but also because he needed to apologize to Beomseok.

He had still messed up, ruining things for his friend. He just hoped his confusion hadn’t caused anything too serious. Sieun didn’t seem too bothered, but he and Beomseok were very different.

“I hope I didn’t ruin everything,” Suho said, growing more anxious as they approached the limousine.

“Calm down.” Sieun signaled, running the palm of his hand over his chest.

“I don't know if I can stay calm. I feel like I'm going to throw up at any moment.”

The limousine door opened, and Suho nearly jumped in fright. Beomseok got out. He didn’t seem angry, but there was something different in his gaze.

“Hi, Beomseok!” Suho greeted, and for the first time, he wasn't answered with a smile. “I'm really sorry about the mess at your house. Seriously, I shouldn't have gone into Sieun's room. I ruined everything.”

Beomseok didn’t answer him at first. He stared at Sieun, and the brothers seemed to be communicating telepathically. Suho hoped they weren’t talking badly about him.

“It's okay, don't worry,” Beomseok replied, the smile finally returning to his lips.

Suho breathed a sigh of relief. Still, something told him that he hadn't been 100% forgiven.

“Well, at least I'm glad you're friends now,” Beomseok commented, sounding much more sincere.

Not everything had gone wrong. Suho could fulfill his promise to Beomseok while also gaining a new friend.

“That's right! Now Sieun is in the music clu—”

Suho was interrupted by Sieun, who covered his mouth in despair. The boy was panicking, as if he had done something wrong. Wait… Beomseok wasn’t supposed to know about this? Damn, Suho couldn’t read minds! Couldn’t anyone warn him?

“Shut up.” Sieun signaled, closing his hand in front of Suho with an irritated expression.

It was adorable, but Suho couldn't be distracted by it; it was a crucial moment.

“Is Sieun in the music club?” Beomseok repeated, keeping his expression neutral.

The brothers stared at each other, and Suho felt like he was in the middle of two bombs about to explode. Great, now he had created family conflicts, too. He just wanted to reopen the club. He hoped Beomseok wouldn't kick Sieun out or anything.

“Well, yeah… But look, he’s not part of the band or anything. He’s just the designer, I promise I won’t get him into trouble.”

Beomseok sighed, and Suho didn’t know if he had said the right thing. Beomseok signaled to Sieun, but it was too advanced for Suho to understand. He should speed up his studies soon.

Sieun signaled back, and from their expressions, they seemed to be arguing. Suho was even prepared to intervene if necessary, but the argument ended shortly after it began. Rich people really did fight differently.

“Bye.” Sieun signaled to him, waving his hand.

“Bye.” Suho signaled back.

Sieun got into the limousine, but Beomseok remained standing there.

“Suho.” His voice was firm. “I only ask one thing of you. Don’t let this club distract Sieun, okay? He has to focus on his grades and his cram school.”

Suho nodded. He didn't want to distract Sieun; he knew the boy was a perfectionist with his grades to an extreme level.

“Don't worry. I'll make sure he fulfills all his responsibilities.”

“Okay… And just…” Beomseok took a deep breath. “You can be friends. But don’t get too close, if you know what I mean.”

Beomseok got into the limousine, which drove off shortly after. But Suho remained standing there, swallowing hard and listening to every beat of his heart.

Don't get too close. Did he... mean that thing?

There was no need to think too much. Beomseok was asking Suho not to get romantically involved with his brother. But he would never do that anyway. Because Suho knew his place.

And Sieun deserved better than him.

The next day, Suho was the first to walk to the club. Juntae had to take care of school president stuff, and Sieun was left doing unnecessary activities just for the extra points. They said they would meet him there when they were done.

Suho walked happily to the club's door. Nothing could ruin his day.

But when Suho opened the door, another surprise awaited him. The room was a complete mess. Everything they had worked so hard to clean and tidy up had been ruined in one day. And that wasn't even the worst part.

There was a boy in the middle of the room. He turned around, facing Suho. It was that Gotak guy, wearing the same stupid blue hoodie from the day before.

I always celebrate too early.

“I warned you not to open the club.” He said, approaching slowly.

Suho could feel his blood pounding. Who did he think he was? Intruding into his dreams, ruining his plans! Damn, Suho was suddenly dying to fight.

“You son of a bitch. I don't care what happened before, this club is mine now!”

“Well, but you should,” Hyuntak replied, unwilling to give up. “You're a selfish piece of shit, you know that?”

Suho clenched his hands into fists. The bastard knew how to get under his skin.

“Selfish? For not caring about your problems?”

“No, for bringing Juntae and Sieun into this.” This made Suho reevaluate his decision. “Do you think you're the only one who'll get into trouble? Seongje and Baekjin will go after them, too.”

That really made Suho nervous. He was tired of causing trouble for others.

“Juntae doesn't even know how to fight, and Sieun has enough problems. Do you really want to continue with this club?”

But the truth was that Hyuntak didn't know anything. Juntae and Sieun chose to fight alongside Suho; they wanted to follow their dreams even though they knew the risks. The problem was that the people around them underestimated them, treated them as incapable. But they weren't, and Suho knew that very well.

“You're the selfish one,” Suho replied, and Hyuntak's eyes widened.

“You’re projecting your problems onto others because you don’t know how to deal with them.” This time, Hyuntak didn’t answer. But he was still shaking with anger. “Me, Juntae, and Sieun. We all have our own lives, and we want to make our dreams come true. It’s not our fault that you can’t do the same.”

It was cruel, cruel in a way Suho never was. And his opponent must have agreed. Hyuntak punched him, hard enough to knock him back.

“Son of a bitch! Let's see if you're as good with your fists as you are with your mouth!”

Control yourself. Control yourself. Don't fight Suho, think about grandma.

But Suho was tired of holding back. He needed to release that adrenaline somewhere, and he had someone willing to help him. He raised his fists, getting into a fighting stance.

“Just don't cry after you lose.”

Suho gave a cocky smile, feeling the energy flow through his body. Damn, he missed this! He walked outside, taking Hyuntak with him. He wanted to fight, but he refused to destroy his club — Well, more than it already was.

Hyuntak immediately went for him, landing a kick to his stomach. But Suho grabbed his leg, using it to push him to the ground. Hyuntak tried to get up, but Suho was faster than him.

Suho stood on top of him, holding his shoulders to the ground. And then he punched him in the face, returning what he had received earlier. Hyuntak didn't let it go, kicking his leg hard. He took advantage of his moment of distraction to get out from under Suho.

But Suho wasted no time; he punched Hyuntak in the stomach, hitting him squarely. When Hyuntak ducked by reflex, Suho jumped behind him. He applied a rear-naked choke, keeping Hyuntak trapped with his arms. He squeezed so the boy wouldn't move, but it wasn't enough to choke him.

“Get off me, fuck!” Hyuntak shouted, using all his strength to hit Suho's arms and try to free himself.

“Only if you leave my club alone!” Suho replied. He wouldn't give up.

“Shit, you don't know what you're getting into!”

“Neither do you! You shouldn’t have destroyed my club!”

And suddenly the discussion stopped. Hyuntak fell silent for the first time, calculating his words.

“What?” Hyuntak sounded genuinely confused. “I didn't destroy your stupid club! It was already destroyed!”

What?

Suho began to loosen his grip. But it didn't make any sense! He had arranged everything the day before, and Hyuntak was the only psychopath standing in his club with enough reason to destroy it.

“Tell me another one,” Suho replied, not wanting to give in. “I cleaned it yesterday! Why else would you be standing there like an idiot?”

“You're the one who called me to fight, you asshole!”

“What?”

Suho didn't even have time to understand what was happening. Suddenly, a crowd of boys was running towards them, screaming like a bunch of lunatics.

“Attack!” Hyoman led them, carrying a baseball bat.

What the fuck?

Suho let go of Hyuntak, and a guy immediately tried to punch him. Now he and his enemy from seconds ago needed to work together. It was another big joke of the universe.

He started fighting the boys who came at him. It wasn't that hard; their movements were clumsy and slow, and they clearly didn't have much experience. Suho dodged them easily, landing a few punches that were enough to knock them out.

Hyuntak didn’t seem to be having much difficulty either. Even so, his movements were much slower than Suho’s. But his slowness wasn’t a lack of skill; it was more like he was physically incapable of being faster.

Hyoman came at Suho, almost hitting him with his stupid bat. Suho lost his balance in shock, falling to the ground hard. Hyoman raised the bat, preparing to hit him.

“Idiots! You, that Baku’s lackey and that mute piece of shit! I'm going to kill you all!”

Suho reflexively flinched, bracing for the impact. But a third person appeared, hitting Hyoman with a well-aimed punch. The bully practically flew, as if he weighed nothing.

Suho tried not to be intimidated by the guy's strength. He looked at the guy. He was tall and strong, but he had the attitude of someone who didn't take life too seriously. He ran his hand through his hair to fix it.

“Gotak, what did I miss, man?” He asked, smiling as if it were any other day.

Hyuntak, who was already slumped over from exhaustion, gave an ironic laugh.

“Baku, you idiot.” He said, struggling to speak. “You missed everything!”

Baku, great. Another crazy guy who was part of the music club.

Two more people appeared running right behind Baku. Much more familiar to Suho. They were Juntae and Sieun, staring at the scene in complete confusion. They really had missed a lot.

“And you are?” Baku asked, giving him a hand to get up.

Suho accepted, using his help to get off the ground. Honestly, despite being clearly stronger, he seemed much less threatening than Hyuntak. And Suho still needed to form a band. He gave a friendly smile.

Juntae was already looking at him as if to say, “Don’t do that”. But Suho would do it.

“I'm Ahn Suho, leader of the music club.” Baku's eyes widened. “Do you want to join?”

Chapter Text

“You're kidding me!” Hyuntak shouted, loud enough for everyone to look in his direction.

Suho rolled his eyes. That guy would be a pain in the ass to deal with.

“Music club?” Baku repeated, unsure if he had heard correctly.

“That’s right!” Suho replied. “I’ve reopened the music club. Plus, I need you two in my band to win the competition.”

Some of the boys whom Suho had defeated began to stand up. They were staring at the conversation as if they were expecting a new fight, but Baku gestured with his hand for them to move away.

“Go back to your classroom, all of you!” He ordered.

Surprisingly, the idiots obeyed. They left without protesting. Even Hyoman quickly stood up, running away as if his life were in danger. How did Baku have so much authority? He must have been really strong.

“You really are shameless!” Hyuntak accused. “We're not going back to this damn club!”

Baku, unlike Hyuntak, didn't seem angry. His posture was relaxed, but there was a seriousness on his face that shouldn't have been typical of him. He pulled his friend's arm away from Suho.

“Relax, Gotak.”

“But—”

“I want to hear it from his own mouth.” Suho interrupted the conversation. “I want to hear Baku say he doesn't want to return to the club.”

Juntae approached Suho. He was ready to apologize on his behalf and say that it was all a misunderstanding, but he still didn't want to interfere. He still let Suho make his own decisions, even the stupid ones.

Hyuntak fell silent for the first time. He stared at Baku, as anxious as Suho for his answer. In a way, he was much more controlled around the other guy. Baku sighed deeply, trying to control his nervousness.

“Look, I think we need a more private place to talk.”

“Private? Along with the crazy guy who destroyed my club? As if.” Suho replied, still suspicious of the guy with emotional problems.

“I didn't destroy your club, you idiot!” Hyuntak shouted. He moved like a pit bull ready to bite. “Hyoman tricked us!”

Of course, Suho had deduced this after the collective attack. But honestly, Gotak was still an unstable guy, and teasing him was kind of fun.

“That doesn't change the fact that you attacked first.” Suho accused, crossing his arms.

Hyuntak was huffing with anger, but he didn't dispute the statement. He took a deep breath, as if apologizing was the hardest thing he had ever done in his life. Honestly, given his sudden outbursts, it probably was.

“My bad,” he whispered, avoiding Suho’s eyes.

Suho walked closer, placing his hand behind his ear.

“I can’t hear youuuu.” He teased, smiling when he saw Hyuntak almost boiling with anger.

Baku, who was clearly enjoying the situation, decided to intervene. He placed his hand on Hyuntak's head, forcing him to bow to Suho. He did the same thing, much more willingly than his friend.

“We’re sorry for the confusion!” he shouted, smiling broadly. “Gotak isn’t a bad guy. He’s sorry and will reflect on his actions!”

Hyuntak tried to break free without success. Baku was much stronger than him. When he finally accepted his defeat, he closed his eyes. His face was still red, but it was more from embarrassment than anger.

“I’m sorry. I shouldn’t have attacked you.” He sounded sincere, even though he avoided looking directly at Suho.

Suho smiled. His tense muscles relaxed, and he realized he was in no danger. The scary Baku and Gotak were, after all, teenagers like all of them. Who had their own insecurities and fears.

“It's okay. I'm sorry for wrongly accusing you.” Suho replied.

“Now you can let go of me, Baku.”

Baku released his friend, who straightened his posture. Suho extended his hand to Hyuntak, seeing the boy accept it hesitantly. They shook hands as a way of sealing a peace agreement.

Juntae, who had been quiet until now, breathed a sigh of relief.

“Well, whatever happened, I'm glad you made up.”

Sieun nodded and handed his notepad to Suho.

'Later, you'd better explain exactly what happened here.'

“Leave it to me, princess. ” Suho signaled, running his thumb over his cheek and imitating a crown with his hands on his head.

Sieun shrugged his shoulders. There was an irritated but also amused look in his expression.

“Anyway, if you want my full forgiveness, you'll have to do something for me,” Suho said, taking advantage of the situation.

Hyuntak was already regretting having even apologized, but Baku wasn't surprised at all. As if he had already expected this.

Suho couldn't let those guys escape, even if he had to drag Hyuntak away by force.

“And what is it?” Hyuntak gave in.

“You'll have to buy me some food,” Suho replied, rubbing his belly. Hyuntak seemed not to even believe the human being in front of him. “What? Thanks to you, I used up all my energy, now I'm starving.”

Juntae tried to hold back his giggles while Baku laughed freely. Sieun and Hyuntak didn't change their expressions, although for very different reasons.

“Okay, I have an idea.” Baku approached the whole group. “Everyone comes to my father's restaurant. We can eat chicken and discuss the music club stuff.”

Suho tried to hide his excitement. Finally, someone would tell him the whole story! And all this while they were eating a delicious meal. He could already taste the fried chicken.

“I’m in!” Suho replied before Juntae could stop him. “If anyone has any objections, speak now or forever hold your peace!”

Hyuntak was clearly against the idea. Or maybe he was just against Suho's existence. Even so, he didn't seem willing to challenge his friend and create an argument. Juntae sighed, also accepting his defeat.

Sieun was thoughtful. He wrote again in his notepad.

'I don't know if I can. After here, I have cram school.'

Suho thought about what Beomseok had told him. He had made a request. Suho should tell Sieun to go to his cram school and fulfill his obligation. But did that boy go anywhere else besides school and home? He lived in a prison like Rapunzel, but he deserved fun and freedom like any other teenager.

Suho wrote a reply.

'Don't worry. It'll be quick, ask Beomseok to cover you up. I promise I'll take you home.'

Sieun stared at his answer. His genius brain seemed to be calculating every possibility and every way the plan could go wrong. Even so, Suho knew he wouldn’t deny it.

Sieun nodded, that defiant glint invading his eyes.

'I'll text Beomseok.'

This made Suho remember something very important. He widened his eyes, shocked at his lack of memory. He hadn’t asked for Sieun’s number yet, and this was urgent.

“Sieun, give me your number.” He asked.

“Why?” Sieun signaled, tapping one index finger against the other.

“Because we're friends, silly,” Suho replied. He took out the notepad, writing down the most personal and private reason.

'And because you might need help. If anything happens, text me.'

Sieun’s eyes widened. He handed his phone to Suho, who added his number in an instant. Sieun handed him the notepad again.

'I can take care of myself.'

Suho smiled. He would remain stubborn, even when others were just trying to help him. But Suho knew that deep down, Sieun felt grateful. There was no real anger in his expression, just the typical embarrassment of when he didn’t know what to do with his feelings.

“Of course you can. But what about me? What if I need help?” Suho asked, making an exaggeratedly tearful voice. “Are you going to ignore my messages?”

He ran his hand over his face, pretending to wipe away his tears. Sieun held back a smile at his antics.

“So much drama.” He signed, imitating his crying with his hands.

“Well, that's settled then,” Suho concluded, turning his attention to Baku. “And you better tell me the whole story, I'm tired of half-truths.”

Baku nodded, giving a determined but unsure look.

“This is the best chicken ever!” Suho said, savoring the soft, flavorful meat.

“I told you, man!” Baku replied, swallowing a piece in one go.

They all met up at Mr. Park's restaurant after school. Apparently, Baku was just a nickname, and his real name was Park Humin. Suho liked Baku better, for no other reason than it sounded cooler.

Sieun and Juntae just ate in silence, with Juntae chuckling softly now and then. The only weirdo was Hyuntak, who stared at Suho like he had killed his dog. What was his problem, anyway? Baku was also part of the music club, and that didn't make him rude.

“Well, now that we’re satisfied,” Baku announced, wiping his hands after finishing his meal. “I think it’s story time.”

Suho straightened his posture, eager to finally hear the whole story. Hyuntak crossed his arms, reluctantly accepting.

“Are you sure?” Juntae asked doubtfully. “I know it's very personal.”

Baku smiled fondly.

“Relax, it’s been a while.” He looked directly at Suho. “Besides, I owe you the story if you’re going to compete. You have to be informed.”

His shoulders tensed. Now that he was so close to the truth, Suho felt like running away. But he needed the answers, and he couldn't give up, even if they scared the hell out of him.

Sieun got closer to him, as if he could sense his nervousness. Suho took a deep breath, feeling his fear slowly dissipate.

“The four of us were a typical friend group,” Baku began. “And we had one thing in common: loving music. That’s when we decided to start a band. I was the bass player, and Gotak was the drummer. Baekjin was the guitarist, and Seongje played the keyboard. It was really fun at first.”

It made sense that Gotak would be the drummer. It was a good way to let out all that anger and negative energy. On the other hand, thinking that the psychopath Seongje was the keyboardist was almost funny, since that was now Juntae's role.

“But things started to get complicated.” Baku continued, lowering his head. “Well… none of us has an easy life at home. And we started arguing about everything. I think we were so worried about winning that we forgot to have fun.”

Baku’s gaze was filled with regret. He lowered the volume of his voice, almost as if he felt ashamed. Hyuntak relaxed his shoulders, letting go of his defensive posture. He patted Baku’s back a few times, encouraging him to continue.

“Things got worse after we lost a competition. It wasn’t even that important, but Seongje went crazy. He and Baekjin wanted to win at any cost, so… They did some stuff without our knowledge.”

He didn't finish his thought, but Hyuntak stared at him, waiting for the conclusion.

“What stuff?” Suho asked.

“Not very nice ones… It’s complicated.” He clearly wouldn’t say more than that. Suho accepted, after all, that part of the story still seemed to bother him. “Anyway, one of those was the last straw. That’s when the fight happened, and the whole school saw it.”

Suho snorted. He understood that it was none of his business, but it all sounded extremely vague.

“Was that when… Gotak broke Baekjin’s guitar?” Suho asked.

“Yes, it was,” Hyuntak replied. “But he didn’t let it go, since he broke something of mine too.” The smile on his face held no humor. It was purely bitter.

“Gotak,” Baku said his name as if it were a warning.

“What? Are you going to defend him again?” Hyuntak stood up from his chair, his anger returning with force. “And just so you know. Those idiots beat up our opponents. But telling that would be admitting that Baekjin is beyond saving, right?”

Hyuntak stomped out of the restaurant. Suho stood frozen, repeating his last words. Did they beat up their opponents? Damn, seriously? Suddenly, Suho understood why Gotak was desperate to shut down his club.

He looked at Juntae, who had his eyes wide with fear. Sieun didn’t change his expression, but he moved even closer to Suho, shifting uncomfortably in his chair.

Baku gave a loud sigh.

“I'm going to go talk to him. Wait for me here, okay?” He gave a forced smile, following Hyuntak out of the restaurant.

An awkward silence fell over the table. Suho wanted to continue with the band at any cost, but now he wasn't sure if he wanted to drag his friends into it.

He didn't know enough; he needed to find out everything.

Suho had an idea, a very wrong and rude one. But it was the only way, since the other two wouldn't tell the whole story. He would have to spy on them.

“Well… I'm going to the bathroom.” Suho announced, getting up from his chair.

But before he could leave, Sieun grabbed his wrist. Suho looked at him, surprised by the sudden contact. Sieun shook his head, pulling Suho back.

Is he… Asking me to stay?

Suho's heart was racing so fast that he felt like he was going to have a heart attack. Those begging, adorable eyes were almost convincing him to stay, but Suho still had a mission to accomplish. He gently removed Sieun's hand from his wrist.

“Relax, I'll be fine,” Suho reassured. “And please, you two, don't get out of here until I get back.”

Juntae nodded, but Sieun clearly didn't agree with his plan. Even so, he let him go, turning back to the table.

Suho was only leaving for a little while, but that boy made it seem like he was abandoning him to go to war. In a way, maybe Sieun was just as dramatic as him, and just didn't like to admit it.

Suho walked outside the restaurant. Baku and Hyuntak were sitting side by side, having a private conversation. Suho took a few steps, approaching them without making any noise. He stood behind a bush, trying to spy on them discreetly.

“Why didn't you tell the whole story?” Hyuntak asked, sounding more disappointed than angry.

“You know, it's personal. I didn't want to tell everything.” Baku replied.

“Really? Or are you just defending Baekjin again?”

“Gotak—”

“Why didn't you tell him that he broke my knee?” Hyuntak questioned, shaking with anger.

Suho's hair stood on end. How could someone do this? Break the knee of a member of his own band? His stomach churned. The whole situation was getting worse by the second, and just like Hyuntak, he didn't understand why Baku didn't tell the whole thing.

“Gotak, please.” Baku grabbed his friend's arm. “You know I never forgave Baekjin for what he did to you, never.”

Despite not understanding the whole story, Suho firmly believed Baku's words. He sounded honest, desperate for Hyuntak not to misunderstand him. Hyuntak sighed loudly, slowly calming down.

“Then why didn't you tell him?”

“Because it’s not my story to tell,” Baku replied, moving closer to his friend. “Besides, I didn’t want you to tell just because you’re angry. I know that all of that still affects you a lot.”

From the way they were talking, it seemed like they had known each other for a long time. A comfortable silence settled in until Hyuntak interrupted it.

“I’ll never understand you,” he almost whispered. “After everything he did to you, you still miss him.”

Baku looked away. He should have had his own issues, but he was the complete opposite of Hyuntak. He didn't explode; he kept everything so deep that no one but his friend could see it.

“Of course I do. He was my first friend.” Baku replied, sounding nostalgic. “You have every right to hate him. I want to do the same, I swear. I just can't.”

Baku's voice was choked, as if he was trying to keep from crying. For some reason, the whole story sounded much more tragic than Suho had expected. These guys weren't just bandmates, they were real friends. That's why it should all hurt more.

“Of course you can’t. You always defended him when we argued.” Hyuntak replied, getting up from his seat.

“That’s not true,” Baku denied, standing up right behind him. “I just wanted you guys to get along. Baekjin’s been through a lot, he’s—”

“And I haven’t?”

Suho regretted following them. The conversation was getting too intense, and none of it was any of his business. He should leave soon, but his body refused to move.

“Gotak, is everything okay with your mother?” Baku changed the subject, trying to hold his hand.

But Hyuntak walked away, giving him a light push. He laughed, not out of happiness, but out of pure anger and irony. He approached Baku, staring at him without looking away for even a second. Suho held his breath.

“It's always like this, right?” Hyuntak sounded bitter, much scarier than his typical anger. “Whenever we argue, you think there's something wrong with my mother. Why? Do you think I'm too emotional?”

Baku's eyes widened. He was feeling regretful again. But he always looked regretful.

“No, sorry. Gotak, I didn’t—”

Hyuntak left the place, ignoring Baku. He walked straight to the bush where Suho was, as if he knew he was there. Suho despaired; he tried to move away, but Hyuntak saw him before he could.

“Now you know what happened, satisfied?” He asked hurriedly. Suho cringed in shame, realizing the mistake he had made. “Oh, and just for the record, you know the guitar I broke? Those assholes bought it with dirty money.”

Hyuntak walked away, not even wanting to hear an answer. Suho took a while to leave the place, still feeling shocked by the whole situation. Baku looked at him, but he wasn't the least bit upset by his intrusion.

He walked up to Suho, placing his hand on his shoulder.

“I'll tell you what happened that day.”

Humin looked at the clock impatiently. It was already time for rehearsal, and there was little time left until the competition, but Baekjin and Seongje were taking longer than usual.

Gotak sighed deeply. His friend had been losing his patience with his bandmates for a while now. Humin understood why, but he wished Gotak would be a little more understanding.

“I told you they only get in our way,” Gotak said, walking around the room.

“Calm down, something might have happened.” Humin retorted, even though he didn't believe that excuse either.

“Sure, maybe they're fighting with a gang or something.” Gotak teased.

Humin held himself back from arguing. They always got more emotional when close to a performance; it would be better to say nothing than to say something he would regret. And God, Humin was tired of feeling regretful.

Before Gotak could continue his speech, the club’s door was thrown open. Baekjin and Seongje walked in, walking as if it were any other ordinary day. Humin could already foresee the fight before it started.

“What the hell were you guys doing?” Gotak asked, looking suspiciously at the two.

“Relax, hothead, we were just sorting out some stuff,” Seongje replied, smoking a cigarette without the slightest consideration.

“Seongje, I already told you not to smoke in the club.” Humin reminded him.

Seongje clearly didn't want to obey, but one look from Baekjin was enough for him to do so. He stubbed out his cigarette, sitting on the sofa with his legs stretched out, as if he owned the place.

“You guys are so annoying lately.” He commented, throwing his cigarette away and putting his hands in his pockets.

Gotak approached him, looking ready to explode.

“You guys are the ones who are getting crazier and crazier!” He accused, though Seongje didn’t even look in his direction. “And what is this ‘stuff?’ Does it involve selling illegal things?”

Seongje sighed, as if the whole conversation was boring. Talking to him was pointless; the guy was just making Gotak's hair turn gray before its time. Humin turned to Baekjin. They might be more distant, but they were still great friends. And unlike Seongje, he cared about Humin.

“Baek, tell me. What did you do?” Humin asked, seeing his friend's gaze soften.

He approached Humin, handing him his cell phone. It was open to a news page.

“Look at the latest article,” Baekjin said, a proud smile on his face.

Gotak came up behind Humin, desperate to see what made them take so long.

“Band members who were going to participate in the School Musical Competition were found hospitalized.”

Humin’s eyes widened. His blood ran cold, and chills spread throughout his body. Gotak jumped back, just as shocked as he was. Baekjin just smiled even wider, as if he expected to receive congratulations.

“What the fuck is that?” Gotak asked, staring at Seongje, who hadn't even changed position.

The teenager just shrugged, as if the answer didn't matter.

“Baekjin,” Humin called, approaching his friend. “Tell me this isn't what it looks like, please.”

Baekjin’s smile slowly closed. He raised his eyebrows, confused about his question. He held Humin’s hands, trying to calm him down.

“They were going to cheat, you know that.” Baekjin sounded desperate. “Baku, we have to win. We need the money.”

Humin let go of Baekjin’s hands. His hopeful look was quickly replaced by anger. But Humin was angry too, and things often went wrong when the two of them fought.

But this wasn't just a fight. Baekjin had crossed the line; he had done something he promised he would never do. He had hurt other people.

“That doesn't justify anything!” Humin retorted. “We were going to solve it, you shouldn't have hit them.”

Seongje stood up, ready to join the discussion.

“This was the only way. Stop being so soft, Baku, you fought with us before.”

“No, I defended people; it was different,” Humin replied. “You just attacked them!”

His heart was pounding so hard it felt like it was about to burst out of his chest. Humin could feel his hands trembling, sweat dripping down his forehead. Everything was a mess. When did things end up like this?

Baekjin went to Gotak, looking for another target for his anger.

“This is all your fault!” He accused, pushing him.

“My fault!? Damn, you're the one who's always ruining everything!” Gotak replied, staring at Baekjin without letting himself be intimidated.

Humin’s head was already hurting. Those two were always fighting, and they still expected him to take sides as if he owned the truth. But he was tired of solving other people’s problems.

“You’re always missing notes. You get stressed out, and then you play the drums like an idiot.” Baekjin continued, refusing to give in.

Seongje laughed out loud, as if the whole situation was hilarious. He stood next to Baekjin, pointing at Gotak like a kid.

“It's true, the hothead hasn't overcome his emotional problems with his mom.”

Gotak grabbed Seongje by the collar. Humin knew he had to intervene, or things would get ugly. He touched Gotak’s shoulder, keeping him away from Seongje. He looked directly at Baekjin.

“Why did you do this? Do you want to win that badly?” Humin asked, not recognizing his friend from years ago.

Baekjin laughed in disbelief. He frowned, burning with anger.

“Yes, I do. Unlike you, I don't have a home or a family.” He reminded, trying to hide his sadness. “I live in a damn orphanage, which will kick me out as soon as I'm an adult. So, what do I do?”

Humin's heart broke. Baekjin was still a teenager, with no one to protect him. Humin might have problems with his father, but he still had a home to return to. Baekjin wasn't so lucky.

“We all have problems,” Gotak replied, less friendly than Humin. “The difference is that we’re not committing any crime. I thought buying instruments with drug money was the lowest they’d go. I see I was wrong.”

Seongje laughed loudly, standing in front of Gotak.

“Don't even start. It was this money that saved your mother; you should thank me!”

“Because, unlike you, I'm not some spoiled rich kid!” Gotak replied, giving Seongje a strong push. “You don't even need this shit, your father has more money than all of us combined.”

Seongje’s eyes darkened. Humin held his breath. Great, now everyone was saying things they would regret.

“You know I hate that damn old man. And I thought you guys cared.” Unlike his usual self, Seongje sounded upset, almost sad.

“Of course, they don't care,” Baekjin added. “You love to judge, but you never help me, right?”

Humin was already getting dizzy. Things shouldn’t be like this; he didn’t want Baekjin to feel neglected. He should have been more considerate; he should have paid attention to him and Seongje. Maybe if they had spent more time helping each other and less time arguing, things would be different.

“Baekjin. I'm trying, seriously.” Humin said, trying to calm the situation.

Baekjin looked regretful for a moment. But the sadness in his eyes was replaced by anger. 

“Then you're not trying hard enough, you selfish piece of shit.” Baekjin's words cut his heart like knives.

Humin walked away. He wished it were all a nightmare, that he would wake up any second. That they would all be friends again. If only their lives were easier, if only they weren’t angry, hurt teenagers, maybe…

“Don't talk to him like that, you son of a bitch!” Gotak yelled at Baekjin, and Humin knew it would be useless to try to control either of them.

Because he was also boiling with anger. Fuck, he was trying. Why did Baekjin refuse to see? Why did Seongje keep pushing them away? Why did Gotak never listen to him?

“You know what, Baekjin? Fuck those two sweethearts.” Seongje declared, and Humin couldn't tell which one of them was angrier anymore. “Let's go far away from here.”

“Far away? Before the competition?” Gotak protested. “Of course, you would run away. You always were a coward.”

For the first time, silence filled the room. The walls seemed to be closing in, the tension rising so high it was suffocating. Seongje bent down a little, just enough to look into Gotak’s eyes.

And Humin knew that his next words would decide the outcome of the discussion.

“The coward here... Is the one who stopped that sick mother of yours from dying in a bed. You should lick the floor I walk on, fuck.”

The first attack came from Gotak. He punched Seongje with a force Humin had never seen coming from him. After that, things got confusing.

He remembered that they had started to fight brutally. That he had taken his anger out on Baekjin and Seongje. That he had hurt them in a way he swore he would never do. But Humin also remembered being beaten badly, feeling a pain he would never forget.

The screams of the other Eunjang boys were loud, celebrating and cheering as if it were just a fun fight. As if they weren't 4 teenagers taking their problems out on each other.

Things should have ended after they got tired. But Humin saw a vengeful fury in Gotak's eyes. He was lying on the ground when he saw his friend get up and grab Baekjin's guitar.

Humin could barely move. He saw the moment Baekjin's eyes widened, not in anger, but in terror. Gotak began to destroy the guitar, throwing it to the ground repeatedly, with incredible force. Baekjin ran towards him at an almost superhuman speed.

Humin stood up, even though his body was in pain; his instinct told him to protect Gotak. But Seongje immobilized him, preventing him from moving.

He could only watch as Baekjin stepped on Gotak's knee hard. He couldn't do anything when Gotak screamed in pain. When he heard the bones breaking, along with their friendship.

He couldn't do anything when Baekjin and Seongje left, leaving a club that only brought him bad memories.

Suho remained silent, not knowing what to say. The situation was so absurd that no answer would be good enough. So he decided to just listen, while Baku gently touched his shoulder.

“It’s not like we don’t want to get back together with the band,” Baku explained. “I mean, I love playing. I miss it so much, but…”

Baku sighed deeply before continuing.

“But I don't want it all to go wrong again. Troubled teenagers trying to win a competition? In my experience, that's a bad idea.”

Suho should accept Baku's refusal. He should find new members for the band and let the other boys deal with their problems. But he remembered Juntae, playing and feeling free for the first time.

That was exactly what they all needed. Baku needed to get his sorrows out, and Hyuntak needed to vent all that anger. It was obvious that they still wanted to play; their problem wasn't with the music. And Suho wouldn't let them regret it and miss out on this opportunity.

“I understand, seriously,” Suho replied. “I can’t promise that everything will be okay. That we’ll never fight, or that we won’t have problems. But if you’re afraid of what could go wrong, you’ll never truly live.”

Baku’s eyes widened. They were too similar to Suho’s. Hopeful, but scared.

“We take risks every day just by being alive,” Suho said, thinking about his family. “We could die at any second. Do you really want to die with regret?”

The boys stared at each other in silence. Baku was thinking about many things at once, and Suho wasn't going to force him to give him an answer. He just wanted him to think about it.

“Sorry for prying. But please think carefully before making a decision.”

Suho said goodbye to Baku, heading towards the restaurant. He needed to take Sieun home, and he had already been gone too long. But he saw Hyuntak, leaning against the wall, staring into space.

He didn't like Suho at all. But they had one thing in common.

Suho walked over to him, leaning against his side. Hyuntak glared at him, dissatisfied with his presence.

“What? Did you come to spy on me again?” He asked. But now Suho knew that all his anger wasn't directed at him.

“I know how hard it is. Being responsible for another life at such a young age.” Hyuntak remained silent, interested in listening to him for the first time. “I have to take care of my grandma, and she also gets sick sometimes. But if she thought that I sacrificed my happiness for her, then she would be sad. She would feel like a burden, even if I say she isn’t. Maybe your mother feels the same way.”

Suho didn't stay to hear the answer. He walked into the restaurant, relieved to see that Juntae and Sieun were still sitting in their seats.

“Sorry for the delay, guys.” He said, seeing Sieun quickly get up from his seat.

“No problem,” Juntae replied. “My mother is coming to pick me up. You can go ahead.”

“Are you sure?” Juntae nodded. “Alright then. Let's go. ”

Sieun followed him out of the restaurant. Suho internally celebrated that his motorcycle was still in the same place. You never knew when a determined thief would seize the opportunity.

Sieun’s eyes lit up when he saw the motorcycle. Which was funny, considering it was outdated and a rich kid like him should have seen better. Still, Suho allowed himself to feel proud. He smiled arrogantly, leaning against it.

“So, do you like what you see?” He asked.

Sieun rolled his eyes, but nodded.

“Cool.” He signed, moving his arm while keeping his hand in a fist.

Suho picked up the helmet. He fitted it onto Sieun’s head, his fingers lingering on each touch. Sieun didn’t even look away, his intense eyes following Suho’s every move, which only made him more nervous.

Suho stared back at him, feeling his heart race. The world was silent, but not in a bad way. It was peaceful, calm in a way his world rarely was. Sieun drowned out all the chaos around him, without having to do anything but look at him.

Sieun lifted his feet slightly. He leaned towards Suho, his eyes shining with anticipation. The moment he carefully opened his lips was when Suho realized what was about to happen.

Is he… Trying to kiss me?

No, fuck! Remember what Beomseok said!

Suho jumped back, snapping them both out of their trance. Sieun's eyes widened. He lowered his head, his expression darkening with disappointment. And worse, with embarrassment.

Shit, what should I do? Apologizing would only make the situation even more awkward. He should just pretend to be clueless. If Sieun thought he had rejected him, he would definitely never set foot in that club again.

“A mosquito flew in my face, and I got scared.” He lied, hoping it sounded believable. “Well, I'll take you home now.”

Before Suho could leave the place, Sieun grabbed his wrist. For a moment, he was afraid that the boy would repeat what he had tried to do earlier. But Sieun just started signing a continuous sentence. Suho recognized the signs for home, quick, and leave. He smiled, deducing the meaning of the sentence.

“After dropping you off at home, I'm supposed to leave quickly, right?

Sieun nodded, the hopeful gleam returning to his eyes. Suho sighed in relief to see that the awkward situation hadn't completely ruined the mood.

“Relax, princess.” He signaled. “Cinderella will be home before midnight.”

Sieun just gave him a push towards the motorcycle, ignoring his provocation.

“And remember to hold on tight, okay?” The boy didn't even care, urging Suho to get on it. “Someone's impatient today, huh?”

Suho obeyed, climbing onto the motorcycle and positioning himself to start it. Sieun climbed right behind him, placing his hands lightly on his waist. Suho rolled his eyes. He took Sieun's arms, leaving them wrapped around his waist and tightening his grip.

He just didn't want Sieun to fall, obviously.

As he started the engine and began driving, Suho tried not to think about the other body pressed against his, which was giving him warmth. He noticed the way Sieun's grip tightened as he accelerated, and how he loosened his grip on the empty streets.

His heart raced the entire way. His cheeks heated, and his skin tingled where Sieun’s fingers made contact. It had never been so hard to focus on the road.

Suho parked in front of the mansion. It looked even scarier at night, not to mention its size. Didn't they get lost in there?

Sieun stood up and walked to the gate. Suho stayed in the same place, which earned him an irritated look from the other boy. He should leave quickly, but he wanted to make sure that everything would be okay.

Sieun signaled for him to move away quickly, but Suho didn't obey. The boy sighed loudly, accepting his defeat and ringing the doorbell. The craziest thing about that huge gate was that it had a camera that allowed you to see the face of whoever was entering your house. Rich people really were different.

As soon as Sieun was spotted, someone ran out to the gate. Suho wondered how they managed to get through that huge place so quickly. The gate was slammed open, and Beomseok peeked outside.

“For God’s sake!” He shouted, desperate. “Sieun, you almost arrived after Dad. Come in quickly.”

Beomseok pulled his brother inside, pushing him without even giving him a chance to say goodbye. His eyes trembled, wandering all over the street as if he were looking for someone. When he didn't find anyone, he sighed in relief.

“Beomseok… Are you okay?” Suho asked, feeling worried about his friend.

“I couldn't be better.” He replied sarcastically. “I only asked you for one thing, Suho.”

He sounded genuinely disappointed. Suho lowered his head in shame. He felt like a child being scolded. He should have been paying attention to Sieun, but instead, he was too busy snooping around Baku and Hyuntak.

“I’m sorry,” Suho said. “I… I just wanted him to get out of the house for a while.”

Beomseok’s gaze softened. He had always been quiet, but ever since the party, he seemed much sadder. Something told Suho that this was his fault. But he didn’t know how to fix their relationship.

“I know you have good intentions,” Beomseok replied. “But sometimes they hurt other people.”

That was all he said before he walked into the house and closed the gate.

Suho tried not to get upset. But the whole day had been complicated; he just needed to sleep.

It was already late at night when he got home. Suho entered quietly, afraid that he would wake his grandmother and Yeongi accidentally. So imagine his surprise when he found the two of them in the living room, staring at the door as if they were expecting a police officer instead of him.

“What’s going on?” He asked, seeing the relieved expressions on their faces.

His grandmother practically jumped at him, hugging him with all her strength. Yeongi quickly ran to his side, giving his arm a few light slaps.

“Ouch!” He complained. “Wait, what did I miss?”

“You idiot!” Yeongi replied. “We texted all night, and you didn't even reply.”

Suho's eyes widened. He took his phone out of his pocket with difficulty, due to his grandmother’s tight grip.

50 messages

15 missed calls

Damn. He was so focused on other people's families that he forgot about his own. Suho hugged his grandmother tightly, feeling the woman tremble in his arms. An overwhelming feeling of guilt washed over him. After all, who was he to lecture others?

“I'm sorry, I didn't even notice the time passing.” Suho apologized.

His grandmother pulled away from the hug to look deep into his eyes. She held his face carefully, as if he were ten years old again.

“Don't ever make me worry like that again. You kids are all I have.” Her voice was fragile, and she was on the verge of tears.

Suho’s heart sank. Suddenly, he understood Baku and Hyuntak perfectly. His grandmother depended on him, and regardless of his dreams, she should be his priority. Before he could stop it, tears fell from his eyes.

Suho felt like a crying baby. Crying in his grandmother's arms, who tried to comfort him by stroking his cheeks. All the emotions he had been holding in for days just burst out.

Yeongi leaned against him, not even teasing him for crying. In fact, her eyes were also full of tears.

“What is it, my love?” His grandmother asked, rocking him like a child.

“I feel like I’m ruining everything,” Suho confessed, struggling to talk through his tears. “I’m trying to help, but I’m just making things worse for everyone.”

Beomseok, Sieun, Juntae, and now Hyuntak and Baku. Were they truly happy, or had Suho ruined what little peace they had in their lives? No matter how much he thought about it, he had failed. Again.

“Don’t say that,” his grandmother said, her voice as warm as her arms. “You didn’t ruin anything, dear. You can’t be responsible for other people’s problems.”

“Yeah, don’t be an idiot,” Yeongi added, holding back tears. “You did the same thing back then. You kept blaming yourself even after saving me.”

Suho couldn’t stop crying. He let himself be comforted. For the first time in a long time, he let other people take care of him. He was so used to taking care of others. It was a weird feeling.

But like everyone else, he was also just a teenager.

The next day, Suho walked dejectedly to the music club. He expected to find Sieun and Juntae there, ready to tell him that they had quit and would no longer be part of his band. He had even prepared a farewell speech — a very emotional one.

But when he opened the door, it wasn't just Sieun and Juntae waiting for him. Baku and Hyuntak were right there, which didn't make any sense considering their last conversation. Suho stiffened, afraid they would come to start another fight.

“Do you guys… want to fight or something?” He asked.

But no one hit him or anything. Baku started laughing, as if he had told a joke. Hyuntak rolled his eyes, but even he had an amused smile on his lips. Suho couldn't have been more confused.

“What's going on?”

“We didn't come to fight, you idiot,” Hyuntak replied, kind as always.

Baku gave him a shove, scolding his friend.

“What Gotak meant was that we talked a lot about everything.” Suho's eyes shone with anticipation. “And we decided to join your band.”

What?

“Are you serious? Really?” Suho asked, fearing that it was just another prank from the universe.

“Absolutely,” Baku replied, confident.

Suho felt like crying again. But he held it back, and instead, calmly walked over to the newest members of his band.

“Thank you so much! Thank you so much, really.” He thanked them, even bowing. “We can finally compete!”

Juntae smiled happily, and Sieun's expression was satisfied.

I did it! We did it! It's too good to be true.

“Wait a minute.” Suho interrupted his own thoughts, not wanting to celebrate before his time. “But you guys decided this out of the blue? You seemed super against the idea yesterday.”

Baku and Hyuntak stared at each other. Hyuntak sighed, taking his phone out of his pocket. He clicked on a video and gave it to Suho to watch.

It was a normal interview. A guy with glasses sat in an arrogant posture, while a woman pointed a microphone at him.

“There are rumors that Eunjang will compete again this year,” the woman said. “Do they pose a threat?”

The guy laughed. He laughed out loud like a real maniac.

“Threat? No, no.” He replied in a provocative tone. “I would beat Eunjang's band even if I played alone.”

Hyuntak paused the video. He stared at his phone as if it were the one to blame for all his problems. Baku put his arm around Suho's shoulders.

“That bastard is Seongje. And we thought it would be a lot of fun to prove him wrong.”

Suho grinned. Not only were they going to compete and win, they were going to humiliate the psychopathic Seongje and that Baekjin guy. Those guys deserved a good beating for what they did to their bandmates.

“Let's end him and that damn Baekjin,” Hyuntak added, very excited to pay back what they did to him.

“That’s what I like to see!” Suho replied. “Juntae, you can sign us up for this competition!”

Juntae nodded. He began typing on his laptop, finally completing their application. Suho was close to shouting in excitement, but Juntae cleared his throat to get his attention.

“Guys.” He called. “We only have one month until the competition day.”

Suho sighed deeply. It was a short time, but at least they had a chance.

“Relax, we can do it,” Suho replied, but Juntae's gaze didn't calm down.

“That’s not the worst part.” He turned the laptop toward them. “We have to present a 100% original song.”

Suho saw the moment when everyone's gaze turned desperate. Of course, the universe would not give him any rest.

I think my problems are just beginning.

Chapter Text

Let's win, Yeah!

Our band is awesome.

Let's rock, Yeah!

We celebrate.

“This is the lyrics I wrote, what do you think?” Suho asked, a silly smile on his face.

He showed the notes in his notebook to the other band members. As the leader, they gave him the responsibility of writing the lyrics, but everyone else would help with the composition. The problem, however, was that Suho had only played covers his entire life.

Okay, it was late for a supposed musician, but his routine didn't give him time to compose anything.

An awkward silence filled the room until it was broken.

“It took you a week to write this?” Hyuntak asked, not even trying to hide his disappointment.

“It’s… Different.” Juntae commented. Even he was trying hard to say something nice.

“Try again.” Sieun signaled, pleased with his own provocation.

Suho rolled his eyes. Sure, he could do a better job, but a little support never hurt anyone. He placed his notebook on the table and sat down on the club’s couch. He held back a sigh, tired of his sole task.

“Man, I think these lyrics are really cool!” Baku praised, sounding more sincere than he should.

“Finally, someone who understands me!”

Suho stood up from his seat, offering a high five that Baku returned without complaint. Despite not having known each other for long, Suho already considered him a great friend. They spent more time together than others, had the same sense of humor, and were equally dramatic.

It was like finding your soulmate — without the romance part.

“Of course, the guy with the 99 IQ would like it.” Hyuntak snorted.

“You'll never forget this, right?” Baku asked, tired of hearing the same taunt since he had taken that damn test.

“Never.”

The two continued arguing, but Suho paid no attention. He picked up his notebook, staring at the ridiculous lyrics he had written. He sighed, afraid that his terrible lyricism would guarantee their defeat.

As Juntae tried to break up Baku and Gotak's fight, Sieun walked up to him. Suho braced himself for the harshest criticism yet. Unfortunately, Sieun was quite blunt regardless of his target's feelings.

“I know, it's horrible,” Suho said before he could be criticized.

Sieun rolled his eyes.

“Stop being so dramatic.” He signaled. “I know you can do better than this.”

During the week, Suho took the opportunity to improve his sign language studies. He still had a lot to learn, but he could now sign and understand some complete sentences, unlike before. This allowed Sieun to use his notepad less, which was used for signs that Suho was not yet familiar with.

“I don't know if I can... It's not just insecurity; I've never really composed anything before.”

“So what? Are you going to give up that easily?” He teased. “How disappointing.” He signaled, closing his hands towards his chest.

Suho held back his smile. Sieun had such a unique and peculiar way of supporting him, but he wouldn't trade it for anything. The boy didn't make his words more gentle and caring; he said what was on his mind. He had that power of not caring about what others thought, a power that Suho envied.

“You sure know how to cheer someone up.” Suho joked, ruffling Sieun’s hair affectionately.

Sieun tried to pull his hand away, but he didn't use even half of his strength. He lowered his head, trying to hide the small smile that spread across his lips.

“Well, I failed,” Suho admitted. “But what about you guys? Any progress in terms of musicality?”

The rest of the boys walked over to the two. Baku picked up his bass, playing a few notes as an example.

“We’re all rock fans, right?” he asked. “And Juntae prefers pop. Gotak and I have been working on the beat, and we thought an 80s pop-rock vibe would suit us.”

“Yeah, right.” Gotak agreed. “Right now, our biggest inspiration is Journey's 'Don't Stop Believin'. I think people miss songs like that.”

Suho opened his mouth in surprise. They had the same amount of time as a week, but while he could barely write a paragraph, Baku and Hyuntak were completely advanced.

“Wow.” He said, impressed.

“Let's play some of what we've created so far,” Gotak said, walking over to his drums.

The rhythm was simple, but it would work for the competition. A little improvement in the arrangements would be enough to give the song a different touch. Suho tried not to get upset; they were in the same band after all.

“I loved it,” Juntae said. “Can I help with the harmony?”

“Sure, feel free,” Hyuntak replied.

Even Juntae, who also had no experience composing, seemed to understand what he was doing. In a way, it was kind of humiliating to be the leader and creator of the band while also being the worst musician.

“Seriously.” He said, to no one but himself. “And you, Sieun, any progress?”

Sieun nodded. He took out his sketchbook, where he drew different ideas for the band’s look. Most of them were incomplete, though still interesting.

“I tried,” he signed, pouting his hand and tapping his cheek lightly. He wrote the rest of the sentence in his sketchbook.

'But honestly, I need you guys to decide on a band name so I can do a better job.'

Suho’s eyes widened. Name? Damn, the name! They had too little time, and Suho had already wasted a week of not only his work but Sieun’s as well.

“Damn… I thought the band’s name was Eunjang or something.” Suho confessed, putting his hand on his neck in embarrassment.

Sieun stared at him as if he were holding himself back from attacking him right there. He sighed, placing his hand on his forehead and shaking his head negatively. He didn't even need to say anything for Suho to understand his feelings.

“You need a unique name.” He signed.

“Unique?”

Honestly, Suho wasn't good with names. How could he come up with a name that was unique yet good enough for his band to be recognized? Each responsibility was harder than the last.

“I… I don’t know.” He confessed.

“Come on,” Sieun complained. “Something that means a lot to you.”

His family? His music? These were all too cliché and predictable answers. Suho had no idea what to name his band. Which was ironic, since it was his idea in the first place.

“I feel like a failure,” he complained, watching the rest of the band discuss their new song.

“Relax.” Sieun signaled. “You have time, no rush.”

“Thanks.”

But the conversation didn't calm Suho's heart. In addition to creating the lyrics, he now also had to create a name. Who knew that having dreams meant you had to fight for them? Damn it that he didn't follow through on his plan to become a simple waiter forever.

“Guys,” Suho called the boys' attention. “Today I have to work at the restaurant.”

“Is this bad?” Juntae asked, worried.

“No.” Suho looked down at his feet, gathering his courage. “I just… I wanted to take you guys there. To meet my friend. Yeongi, she’s amazing.”

Luckily, Mrs. Kim left the restaurant under his supervision, as she had an appointment. It was the perfect opportunity to take his band there.

The group stared at him in silence. Suho almost gave up on the idea, but Baku let out a loud shout before he could.

“That's cool, man! Is the food there good?”

“Of course, that's your question,” Hyuntak scoffed.

Suho allowed himself to smile. He could already see Yeongi getting along with Baku, but teasing him with Gotak. He could see her taking care of Juntae and asking Sieun a million awkward questions.

“It's always good to meet someone new,” Juntae added.

Sieun was the only one who wasn’t excited, but he was never excited when it came to meeting new people. Even so, his gaze towards Suho was almost suspicious, which only made him more anxious.

“Is there a problem?” Suho asked.

Sieun shook his head but wrote something down right after. He handed the paper to Suho and crossed his arms as if he were already expecting an explanation from him.

'You never told me about this friend. Why? I can't know about her?'

Panic washed over Suho. He really didn’t expect Sieun to be the kind of person to get upset over something like this. He quickly shook his head, writing down his best explanation.

'Of course you can. I just forgot to tell you about her, I was too worried about the band.'

Sieun accepted his answer, but something still bothered him. He approached Suho, ready to clear his real doubt.

“Girlfriend?” He signed, lowering his middle fingers and running his thumb across his cheek.

Instead of being embarrassed, Suho started laughing. He laughed out loud, wondering what could have made Sieun jump to such a conclusion.

“Girlfriend? Yeongi? Yuck.” He felt disgusted just thinking about the possibility. “That brat is like my annoying little sister.”

Sieun’s closed expression quickly changed. His eyes lit up, and a small — almost imperceptible — smile spread across his lips.

“That's good.” He signed, moving the palm of his hand in front of his chin.

Suho tried not to think about the obvious reason why Sieun was relieved by his answer. As long as he ignored the problem, it wouldn’t exist.

“Anyway, come to the restaurant after school. You'll enjoy it, I promise.”

“Are you going to introduce your friends?” Yeongi asked, cleaning the restaurant with him.

“That's right, they'll be here any moment.” He replied, peeking outside.

Luckily, there weren’t many customers in the restaurant, and their boss allowed them to chat with their friends as long as they continued to do their jobs. She even said she would know if they misbehaved.

“You're going to love them, seriously,” Suho stated, but Yeongi gave him an uncertain look.

“Am I going to love a bunch of annoying teenage boys?” She asked, purposefully bumping into his shoulder.

“Yes, that describes you perfectly, too.” He teased.

Yeongi prepared to retort, but a few seconds of silence were enough for her to accept her fate.

“You know what? You have a point.” She admitted, more cheerfully. “Wait a minute. So I'm going to meet that boy you like?”

Suho's cheeks burned. He placed his hands over Yeongi's mouth, preventing her from embarrassing him in a public place. The girl just smiled, blinking her eyes in an innocent and angelic way.

“I don't like him.” Suho denied it, even though he didn't believe his words.

“Imagine if you did.” Yeongi teased, taking his hands away from her face. “Seriously, I haven't seen you committed to learning anything other than music in years. But now you've learned more about sign language in a week than you learned about math in 10 years.”

Suho was tempted to retort, but he didn’t have a good enough answer. Of course, the other boys were also learning sign language, but even Sieun was impressed by his speed and effort, which surpassed the norm. No one learned in such a short time unless it was urgent.

And communicating with Sieun was urgent.

“Whatever, just don't say anything weird to him, okay?” He asked, afraid that Yeongi would say more than she should.

“Your secret is safe with me.” She stated, as trustworthy as a snake ready to strike.

“Sure.”

They served a few more customers until their friends finally arrived. They all walked in together, with Baku making a scene as soon as he set foot inside.

“We're here, bro!” He shouted, being judged by the few customers who were finishing their meal. “Look at this, this smell is making my mouth water!”

“Keep your voice down, man.” Hyuntak scolded.

He wore the hood of his sweatshirt in an attempt to hide his embarrassment.

“You guys really fucking arrived!” Suho shouted, as excited as Baku.

Hyuntak seemed to want to hide underground.

“Seriously, these crazy guys are just embarrassing themselves.” He complained.

“Let them have their fun, Tak,” Juntae asked, chuckling softly.

He held Gotak's arm, who didn't seem bothered at all. For someone who was stressed out by everything, he was surprisingly patient when it came to Juntae.

Maybe it was because, unlike the rest of the group, Juntae wasn’t chaotic and noisy. And even someone as calm as Sieun could irritate Gotak if he tried. Juntae was the only exception.

Sieun arrived right behind them. His eyes wandered everywhere as if it were the most interesting place he had ever seen. On the one hand, Suho was already getting used to his overreactions.

He realized that all the things in his daily life that he considered simple and outdated were new to Sieun. His motorcycle, the restaurant... Would he think the same about his home? Could it be that, unlike his insecurities, Sieun saw value in everything that Suho ignored?

“What's wrong?” Sieun signed.

Suho looked away, realizing he had been staring for too long. He coughed, trying to hide his embarrassment.

“Nothing.” He signaled back.

Sieun didn't believe it for a second, but he didn't argue.

“Well, now you can sit down,” Suho ordered, pushing his friends to an empty table. “Today I will serve you.”

He prepared to take their orders, hoping they would eat like normal human beings instead of the pack of starving animals they were.

“Don't forget about me, big head.” Yeongi teased, standing next to him.

“Of course not. Guys, this is Yeongi, my friend.” He introduced her, seeing the boys' faces light up. “And Yeongi, this is my band. Sieun, Juntae, Baku and Gotak.”

He pointed to everyone at the table, who were doing their best poses to impress their new friend. Baku, being the extrovert he was, was the first to extend his hand to Yeongi, who accepted his handshake.

“I heard you play, too.” He said.

“Yes, I do!” She replied, full of enthusiasm. “Much better than Suho, in fact.”

The boys all laughed in amusement. Hyuntak, in particular, seemed to agree even without hearing the girl play. Suho would be offended if he didn't agree in some way. He and Yeongi had similar skills, but she would definitely do a better job composing.

“Not that it's too difficult.” Hyuntak teased.

Suho prepared to argue, but Sieun stomped on Hyuntak's foot hard before he could even move.

“Hey! What the hell, Sieun?” Hyuntak complained, rubbing his sore foot.

“Shut up.” He signaled, closing his hand on the boy's face.

Gotak huffed stubbornly but didn't say another peep about the matter.

Suho’s heart raced. Sieun was genuinely offended whenever the boys teased him. Suho might say he was his prince charming, but Sieun was more like a loyal guard dog.

“Relax,” Suho signed. “He’s just joking.”

Yeongi watched the interaction, suddenly very interested. She had that wicked smile, like when she was up to something that would make Suho regret being born in the first place.

“You’re Sieun, right?” She asked, and Sieun answered her with a nod.

Her smile grew wider.

Suho placed his hands on her shoulders in case she tried to get too close to Sieun. But Yeongi didn't care, laughing in amusement at his obvious anxiety.

“Hi. I'm Yeongi.” She signed. “How are you?” She opened her hand in front of her chin and gave a thumbs-up.

Suho’s eyes widened. Sieun was momentarily shocked, but his expression softened. He answered Yeongi, looking excited.

“Hi. I'm fine, and you?”

Yeongi jumped up and down in joy as if that little conversation were a million-dollar prize. Suho didn't like her excitement, but he was happy that she had watched him learn sign language and that she had also made an effort to communicate with his friend.

Sieun deserved the whole world to speak his language.

“Anyway, go sit down quickly,” Suho ordered.

The boys obeyed, sitting around the central table. They began to make their orders — many orders — purposely making his job difficult.

Baku smiled as he ordered almost the entire menu. Hyuntak followed suit, enjoying Suho's suffering. Juntae, kind as ever, ordered a simple meal and a drink. When it was Sieun's turn, Suho handed over his notepad so he could write down the order himself.

When he picked it back up, he was surprised to see that it was empty.

“You're not going to ask for anything?” He asked, worried.

Sieun shook his head.

“I'm not hungry.” He signed.

Suho might always be starving, but anyone would be hungry at this point. Sieun was clearly lying, but he didn't understand why. Did he not like the food and didn't want to admit it? Was he too shy to eat in front of others? Or was he on one of those crazy diets?

He wanted to insist, but he didn’t want to pressure Sieun in front of the others. It might embarrass him. So he decided he would look for the answer later when they were alone.

“Come on, Yeongi.”

They started to head to the kitchen, but Yeongi suddenly stopped. Suho turned around worriedly until he realized that the girl's wrist had been grabbed by Sieun. The friends looked at each other, confused about his reaction.

Sieun handed her a piece of paper from his notepad. Suho came closer, peeking without even trying to hide it.

'You can stay here and meet the boys, Yeongi. I'll help Suho today.'

A teasing smile spread across Yeongi's lips. Suho took a deep breath, trying to calm his heart that insisted on going out of control.

The two of us? Together? Alone?

Before Suho had a chance to protest, Yeongi practically yanked Sieun out of his chair.

“You know what? Great idea!” She praised, sitting in Sieun's place. “I'm going to rest and get to know these guys. You can also get to know each other better in the meantime.”

She gave an obvious wink like she was in a slapstick romantic comedy movie from the 2000s. Suho gave her his best murderous glare, even though he knew it wouldn't affect her in the slightest.

“Alright, let's go.” He agreed, knowing it was a losing battle.

He could hear the collective “oooohhhhh”s of mockery from the rest of the group as he led Sieun to the back. His friends acted like a bunch of elementary school kids, the ones who kept accusing you of liking anyone nice to you.

Suho just raised his hand, giving them the middle finger. The group just laughed even louder, disturbing the peace of the people at the other tables. If they drove away his customers, Suho would definitely get revenge.

“Ignore them.” He said to Sieun, who was blushing with embarrassment. “Let's go.”

Suho was organizing some boxes in the back. When Sieun offered to help, he didn’t expect the boy to just watch him work. But honestly, he looked so adorable just sitting there watching, that Suho didn’t mind.

Sieun nudged him, getting his attention.

“Do you work every day?” He asked as if such a possibility were absurd.

“Well, it depends on the job,” Suho replied. “The restaurant has one day off per week. I only make deliveries 3 times a week. And I help with moving on the weekends… Yeah, I think I work every day.”

It wasn’t something unusual for him. But Sieun’s eyes widened in astonishment. A boy like him must have never worked in his life, so it was always funny to see him surprised by Suho’s routine.

“Don't you get tired?” Now, he looked genuinely concerned.

If only he knew that working was one of Suho's least problems. He didn't want to worry Sieun, but this was still better than lying.

“Of course, I do.” He confessed. “Anyone would. But it's worth it.”

“Why?”

Suho smiled. He thought of his grandmother and Yeongi. If necessary, he would work himself to death just to provide a better life. He would tire his body to exhaustion if it would make their lives more bearable.

Something like working every day was a small sacrifice to see them smile.

“Because I need to take care of my grandma and Yeongi.” He answered, leaving his task aside for just a moment. “We don't have much money, so... I have to do triple!”

Suho gave his best smile as a way to show that everything was fine. But Sieun wasn't convinced. That worry was still present in his expression.

“What about your father?” He signed, running his hand over his chin and placing the back of his hands on his lips.

Suho’s eyes widened. Thinking back, he hadn’t told Sieun about his family. And he knew he should have, that he wasn’t ashamed of who he was, but… Saying, ‘Yeah, I’m a poor orphan who has to take care of his grandmother’ was like admitting all his weaknesses to the world.

Sieun seemed to interpret his silence as an answer.

“Mom?” He ran his thumb across his cheek, placing the back of his hand on his lips.

There was no point in lying. Sieun would find out eventually anyway. But Suho hated that something as simple as talking about his life made him feel weak and pathetic.

Suho ran his hand across his neck as if to cut it, making the death sign. Sieun's eyes grew even wider.

“Yeah, they died.” He admitted, as if saying it out loud made it all more real.

“Sorry.”

“Relax… It’s been a long time.”

An uncomfortable silence filled the room. Suho prepared to return to work, thinking that was the end of the conversation. But then, Sieun nudged him again.

“Do you miss them?” He asked, turning his fist over his chest.

For a moment, Suho didn’t know what to say. Not because he didn’t miss his parents, but because he never talked to anyone about it besides his grandmother. It was weird. He was used to listening to other people’s problems, but not talking about his own.

He thought about ignoring the question. But the idea of opening up to someone outside his family was liberating.

“I do.” He replied. “But… I'm also very angry with them.”

He didn’t even tell his grandmother about this part. He didn’t want to burden her with his negative feelings. But for some reason, he felt that Sieun wouldn’t judge him.

“Why?”

“Well… They died in a car accident on the highway. But they weren't just traveling.”

Talking about it out loud was scary. But the fear slowly faded, and it felt like a weight was being lifted off his chest. Sieun didn’t interrupt him; he just continued listening, curious.

“They were going to move to another city that day. The day of the accident.” He confessed, remembering everything. “My father was obsessed with music; he wanted to have a career at any cost. But he never succeeded.”

He still remembered his father, stressed out by yet another failure. His grandmother losing her patience, his parents' first argument. The day his father asked him to keep trying.

He thought of that day as a beautiful memory. But as much as his father encouraged him, Suho knew his motives were more selfish than he admitted. He wasn't encouraging Suho so his son would succeed. But because he saw him as another version of himself, someone who would make his dreams come true if he failed.

“Anyway… He got an opportunity to play in another city. But Grandma said it was risky, that he couldn’t lose his job. So he and Mom decided the best solution was for them to move there alone. Without me and Grandma. Can you believe it? That day, they abandoned us.”

Anger still burned in his chest. How could they? Leave their son behind, leave the responsibility to an old lady? At the time, Suho didn't understand how parents as amazing as his could do something so terrible.

He didn't know how to deal with the feeling. The admiration, gratitude, and longing for everything they had done for him, the happy and sweet moments. But also the anger, resentment, and hurt for having left him behind.

“The worst part is… If they were alive, I don’t know if they would ever come back.”

The air grew heavier. However, in contradiction, Suho felt lighter. There was no one else he could tell his darkest thoughts to.

“I just… I don’t want to end up like my father. Become obsessed with my dream, abandon my family, and… Ruin my own life.”

Suho didn't realize the tears were streaming down his face until he felt them fall. He tried to hide his face, embarrassed to do this not only in front of Sieun but also during his work hours.

“Sorry… I’m crying for nothing.”

Suddenly, a body collided with his. Suho opened his eyes in surprise, realizing it was Sieun, hugging him. His short arms brought Suho closer to his body as if he needed him to breathe.

Suho hugged him back. He held onto Sieun tightly, afraid that he would slip away if he didn't hold him tightly enough. He didn't know how long they stayed in that position until Sieun pulled away.

Suho reluctantly let go of him, missing his touch as soon as he lost it. When Sieun handed him his notepad, he expected a consolation like the one he wrote to Juntae. But it was a few words.

'You are your own person.'

Sieun didn’t need to explain anything. He didn’t say ‘I’m sorry’ or give a fancy speech. He just shared the words he knew Suho needed to hear.

I'm not my father. I'm Ahn Suho.

“Thanks.” He signed. “I think I have to get back to work now.”

Suddenly, a noise similar to a chair falling was heard. Suho ignored it, thinking it was just a clumsy customer.

But then that voice came.

“You son of a bitch!”

Gotak?

“You're still so fucking hot-headed.” A male voice replied. It was pure mockery, very similar to the voice of the guy in the video that the boys showed him.

Holy shit. It's Keum Seongje.

Suho despaired. Of all the times, it was very unlucky that Seongje would appear right now. He looked at Sieun, trying to hide his fear.

He was unsure whether he should take him along or simply lie and say he was going to sort something out. On one hand, he didn't want Sieun getting into a fight, but on the other, he knew the boy wouldn't forgive him for lying.

Suho sighed.

“Sieun, there's some kind of fight going on outside.” He warned. “I'll go check, and you stay here, okay?”

Sieun shook his head. Of course, he wouldn’t accept being left behind.

“No. I'll go with you.” He signed, too determined to be convinced otherwise.

“Okay.” Suho accepted. “But please stay behind me. And let's avoid physical violence, okay?”

Sieun wasn't too happy about the last part of the deal, but he accepted. How could someone so adorable be so violent? Honestly, not even Suho liked fighting that much.

At least Sieun obeyed him, staying behind him. Suho walked slowly, trying not to draw attention. He would take a better look at what was happening before intruding. After all, he wanted to avoid any problems for Mrs. Kim's restaurant as much as possible.

They crouched down, getting a perfect view of what was going on. It was Gotak's chair that had fallen backward. He had probably pushed it in anger, which was a relief since no one had committed any aggression so far.

The band and Yeongi were all standing. Seongje wasn’t the least bit intimidated, and next to him were two other boys, who must have been from Ganghak as well. Both guys were tall and clearly troublemakers. But while one had an apathetic expression, the other was grinning like a maniac.

Seongje stood like a leader, holding a cigarette in his hand. Which, by the way, was not allowed in the restaurant — not that anyone cared.

“What do you want, Seongje?” Baku asked, stepping in front of Hyuntak. It was his way of protecting him.

“Wow, how rude.” Seongje laughed ironically. “I missed my bandmates. Didn't you?”

“Stop stalling,” Hyuntak ordered, losing his patience.

Seongje sighed as if he were disappointed.

“You guys are still so annoying.” He teased. “You know what? When I heard the rumors, I thought… No, they wouldn’t have that courage.”

He surrounded the group, like a predator watching his prey.

“But then I saw the list of participants this year. And holy shit… Eunjang was actually on the list.” He took a drag on his cigarette. “So I wanted to meet my opponents.”

“Don't even try, you just want to start trouble.” Hyuntak accused, his face getting redder by the second.

“Maybe.” He replied, not at all guilty. “I'm kind of bored these days. You guys are going to be my new entertainment.”

It was hard to read the intentions of a guy like Seongje. Suho wondered how Baku and Gotak managed to stay in the same band as him for so long.

“Wait, is that the drummer?” The grinning guy asked, pointing at Hyuntak. “Man, he's horrible. I've seen him lose to a middle school kid.”

Hyuntak's face turned even redder — if that was possible.

“Fuck you, Dongha!” Dongha wasn’t intimidated by Gotak’s shouts. “You and Seongmok are just Seongje’s pathetic followers.”

Seongmok, the apathetic, quiet guy who hadn't joined the conversation until now, decided to open his mouth.

“Pathetic followers? I already beat Baku on bass before you guys created that horrible band. Baekjin and Seongje carried that shit on their backs.”

Baku, who was trying to keep the peace, certainly lost his patience after such a comment.

“As if! If it weren't for me, Baekjin wouldn't even—”

He interrupted himself, realizing he would say too much.

“Anyway, my replacement is the most important,” Seongje said as if he hadn’t heard a word of the discussion. “Hey, shorty. Do you play well?”

He approached Juntae, who cowered in fear. Seeing them side by side was like seeing the cliché of the big bad wolf and the little lamb. He didn't even have time to intimidate him, as Baku and Hyuntak formed a protective barrier in front of him.

Suho sighed deeply. He looked at Sieun, knowing he couldn’t run away anymore. Luckily, the customers had left, and no one—not even Mrs. Kim would be able to see the possible fight.

“Don't follow me.” He signaled, hoping that Sieun would obey.

“Where the hell is the leader anyway?” Seongje asked as if he had predicted his approach.

He was like a damn predator, who could smell blood and fear from miles away.

Suho came out of his hiding place, approaching the confusion and being stared at by everyone involved. Yeongi, who had been silent and confused until now, breathed a sigh of relief when she saw him.

“I'm here,” Suho replied confidently.

Damn, that sounded like a movie line! I was really cool in that one!

An awkward silence stretched out. Seongje stared at him, adjusted his glasses, and even squinted, trying to see him better. When he did, he was excessively surprised.

Maybe… He thought I was so cool that he got scared?

But then Seongje laughed. He laughed out loud, holding his stomach. His breathing became uncontrolled, frighteningly loud. Seongje sucked in air as if it were escaping from his lungs.

Dongha joined in his laughter, but Seongmok kept his face closed, indifferent.

Suho lowered his head. His cheeks burned. He felt like a kid trying to impress the school brats again.

“Man, what a coincidence,” Seongje said, approaching Suho. “Holy shit, I got a feast of idiots today.”

Suho tried not to be intimidated. He just stared back at Seongje, without backing down or cowering.

“Do I know you by any chance?” He asked, genuinely curious.

Seongje's smile widened even more. What a bizarre guy.

“No, but I know you.” He replied. “I saw you that day, ruining Mr. Oh's party and letting the cake fall all over him. It was hilarious.”

Seongje laughed nostalgically as if remembering good memories.

Suho didn't want this to be his first impression of his psychopathic opponent. But honestly, it could have been much worse. Although it was still annoying to know that Seongje was at the party, near Sieun. Again.

“Get out of here if you're not going to order anything. “ Suho replied. “This is a restaurant.”

Baku and Hyuntak begged him with their eyes not to interfere. Juntae shook his head, fearing what his future would be like if he fought with Seongje. Yeongi, on the other hand, held her cell phone as if it were an improvised weapon.

Seongje took another drag on his cigarette.

“Relax, we're leaving now. I don't eat cheap food.” He teased, a wicked smile forming on his lips.

Suho clenched his fists. Rich bullies were always like this, using his financial status as an attack, wanting him to be ashamed of who he was. But Seongje wouldn’t take the pleasure of bullying him.

“Then get out of here.” He ordered.

“You know, the day of Mr. Oh's party, I remember being so angry.” His laugh, once amused, now sounded irritated.

Suho held himself back from asking him why. He wasn't interested.

“Like… Damn, this loser managed to get into Sieun's room, and I didn't? Holy shit, if I knew there was competition, I would have fucked him sooner.”

The rage, that burning flame that Suho had been trying so hard to contain, exploded. He pulled Seongje's collar hard, forgetting all self-control. Son of a bitch. Suho didn't care if he broke the whole place anymore, as long as Seongje got broken with it.

“Shut the fuck up.” He didn't shout. Suho spoke softly, sounding as threatening as he could.

And apparently, that pleased Seongje. He gave a maniacal smile, without a hint of fear in his eyes. It was annoying, the way he only shook his head slightly, more curious than threatened.

“Did that piss you off?” He asked, satisfied. “Damn, I didn't know you guys were actually together. Did I lose him to this?”

“I told you to shut up,” Suho repeated, gripping his collar tighter.

The rest of the band approached. They looked just as angry as Suho, surrounding Seongje's friends. Even Yeongi was irritated, clutching her phone. The look in her eyes towards Suho made it clear that if things got out of hand, she would call the police without hesitation.

“Or what? Are you going to hit me?” He brought the tip of his cigarette closer to Suho's face. A threat to burn him? The guy was really crazy. “I want to see you fucking try.”

However, before things could get out of hand, Seongje was punched hard in the face. The problem? Well, it wasn't Suho who attacked him.

Sieun practically jumped at him. His fist collided with Seongje's cheek as if it were nothing, sending him flying backward. Seongje put his hand to his face, glaring at the person responsible for his pain.

Dongha and Seongmok approached Sieun, clearly threatening him for daring to defy their leader. But Seongje waved them away. The unpredictable bastard had a smile on his face as if the beating was pleasurable.

Suho immediately stepped in front of Sieun. Damn, he had asked him not to come out of hiding. Before, he was only afraid of the fight he would get into with Seongje. But now? Knowing that the psychopath had hidden intentions, he wanted him as far away from Sieun as possible.

“I told you not to follow me,” he whispered, though Sieun didn’t even look at him properly.

The boy was focused on Seongje, his gaze burning with anger. They were two idiots, putting themselves at risk to protect each other.

“Look who showed up,” Seongje teased. “You know, being dumped for a guy like that… It hurts my ego a little.”

The way the two of them stared at each other seemed much more intimate than Suho had expected. As if Sieun hadn't told him the whole story. He felt an uncomfortable tightness in his chest, a strange and unpleasant sensation.

“Go away already!” Suho ordered. If Seongje continued to stand there, staring at Sieun, then he wouldn’t be able to control himself anymore.

“Sure, we're leaving now.” He looked at his friends. “Let's go, guys.”

The trio started walking towards the exit. They were like a bunch of arrogant brats, giving their best threatening glares to his band. Dongha left with that weird smile, and Seongmok walked away disinterested, without even looking back.

But Seongje turned to Sieun one last time before leaving.

“Hey, Yeon Sieun.” He called. “You're still my fucking type. I can't wait to have you back after I humiliate your boyfriend in the competition.”

Suho's blood boiled. He didn't even have time to retort, as Seongje walked out the door with the same arrogant posture. As if he were a king. As if he were infinitely superior to Suho.

Rich, strong, and talented. And to make matters worse, he knew Sieun. It was like his biggest insecurities rolled into one person.

A tense silence fell over them. The situation had everyone on edge, and no one knew how to bring up the subject. They would discuss Seongje later, but right now, all Suho wanted to do was spend time with his friends.

“Hey.” He called. “Let's eat before it gets cold.”

The meat was juicy. But unlike usual, the group ate in silence. No one felt like talking, even though they clearly had a lot of questions.

Suho especially. Ever since Seongje left, he couldn't stop thinking about his words.

Dumped? Have him back? Were they… ever together?

Sieun had been avoiding his gaze ever since the commotion. Suho tried to convince himself that he was just tense, just like everyone else. But it seemed like he hadn’t told him everything about his relationship with Seongje. Why? Maybe they hadn’t really fought, but what if they had done something else? Plus, why did Sieun hide things from him? He was never completely honest.

He doesn't trust me?

The thought hurt him more than it should have.

Damn, even something as simple as avoiding eating. Sieun didn't tell him why he didn't eat anything, even though he was hungry.

Suddenly, Juntae ended up spilling sauce on his pants. This caused some laughter from the group, who were more relaxed.

“My bad. I'm kind of clumsy.” He said, wanting to bring some lightness to the atmosphere.

“No problem,” Suho replied.

He couldn't even laugh like his friends. His mind was far away, too focused on the boy who was clearly ignoring him.

“Relax, I'll clean it for you,” Hyuntak offered.

“N-no, you don't need to—”

Hyuntak grabbed a napkin from the table. He leaned over, ready to wipe Juntae’s pants. But the boy jumped out of his chair before he could. His eyes were twitching with panic.

“Don't touch me!” Juntae shouted.

He stared at Hyuntak, but his gaze was unfocused as if he were somewhere else.

The tense atmosphere returned with a vengeance. Juntae hyperventilated, failing to control his breathing. Suho’s concern increased twofold.

“Juntae? Is everything okay?” He asked, but the boy was still shaking.

“I’m sorry, I… I didn’t mean to scare you.” Hyuntak said. It was the most fragile he’d ever sounded as if the thought of hurting someone else scared him.

“I… need to go to the bathroom.”

That was all Juntae said before he ran off. This wasn't right; he wasn't just tense, he looked like he was going to have a panic attack at any moment. He shouldn't be alone in this state.

Suho stood up, ready to follow. But Sieun grabbed his wrist, pulling him back to his seat.

“Don't follow him.” He ordered.

What?

The anger from earlier hit him again. Not to follow him? The boy was shaking, completely lost. And shouldn't Suho follow him? It had to be a joke. Sieun didn't even look at him again, as if he was expected to obey.

He nudged Sieun, getting his attention. No, the argument wouldn't end whenever he wanted it to, like it always did.

“Why not?” He signaled.

Sieun snorted in annoyance. As if Suho were an idiot who didn’t understand something obvious. Seriously? Really?

“Because it’s rude. Leave him alone.”

Rude? Great, so worrying about a friend was rude?

“I’m sorry.” He replied, too loudly. “I didn’t know worrying was a crime. Some of us have feelings, you know?”

He knew he shouldn't have responded so rudely. But everything was getting on his nerves, and he was tired of being forced to put up with it and not argue.

Sieun’s neutral expression turned angry. He began writing on his notepad. Even his handwriting looked angry.

'You don't even know what happened. Keep your feelings to yourself.'

That was the last straw. Suho rested his hands on the table, gripping it tightly.

“Of course, I don't know!” He shouted. Loud enough that the group stared at him in shock. “You never tell me fucking anything! I don't know what happened with Juntae. I don't know what goes on in your house, or why Beomseok hates me now. And I don't know what the fuck you have with Seongje, but you didn't tell the whole story!”

When he finished speaking, Suho had to catch his breath. Ever since he met Sieun, they had never fought. Not like this, at least. Now he didn’t know what to do. The air was still heavy, but his chest felt light.

“I'm going to get some air.” He warned.

Suho ran out the door. The cold wind cooled his face, but it didn’t take away his worries. It was unfair.

He didn't want to fight, but he didn't regret what he said. He didn't know anything, and how could he fix things if no one told him? He wasn't a mind reader, and he certainly couldn't guess what was wrong.

He took a deep breath, trying to calm himself. He wasn’t an explosive person, and now he felt a little embarrassed for yelling at Sieun in front of all his friends, even though he wanted the boy to hear him. It should have been a private conversation.

As if reading his mind, Sieun appeared outside. He stood beside him, as lost as Suho. Damn, they didn't even know how to argue. But Suho just wanted an answer, even if Sieun didn't tell him anything else.

“Sieun.” He touched his arm. “Please be honest. What happened between you and Seongje?”

“Nothing.” He signed.

Suho didn't want to lose his temper again.

“I know that's a lie.” He replied. “Did you… Had any kind of relationship?”

Sieun narrowed his eyes. He was already irritated just by Suho's question. As if he had no right to ask anything.

“Answer. Did you?” His tone of voice was firmer this time.”

“Why do you want to know? It's none of your business.”

Shit, he was going to explode again.

“Because he said weird stuff about you! And I'm worried.”

“What stuff?”

Suho swallowed hard. His cheeks burned at the thought of telling Sieun about this. But if he wanted honesty, he needed to be honest too.

“He said that if he had known he had competition, he would have slept with you sooner.” He whispered, hoping no one would hear.

Suho looked away as soon as he told him. He didn’t even want to know Sieun’s reaction to such nonsense. Sieun nudged him, and he didn’t seem as affected as Suho expected.

“Kiss.” He signed, lowering the fingers of his hand except for the thumb and rubbing them together.

“Did you… Kiss him?”

Sieun nodded.

Suho stared straight ahead, not knowing what to say. He didn't want to admit it, but he felt uncomfortable just thinking about Sieun and Seongje together. The guy was weird and aggressive, and honestly, he shouldn't be that good of a kisser.

The selfish part of him wished Sieun had hated the kiss.

“Do you like him?” he said, praying with all his might that the answer would be no.

“No.”

The anger has almost completely dissipated.

“What a relief.” He said. “Because… He’s weird, right? I don’t know, I don’t think he’d be a good boyfriend.”

Sieun looked at him as if he knew exactly what he was thinking. Which was kind of scary. He wrote something down on his notepad.

'Don't worry. I'll deal with Seongje. He won't mess with your band.'

Sieun hoped this would bring him relief, but Suho's nervousness only increased.

“Deal with him? What do you mean by that?”

'He comes to my house sometimes, remember? I can threaten him, convince him to leave you alone.'

He must have been kidding.

“No!” Suho shouted, louder than he intended. “I’ll deal with him. Don’t even think about going near him.”

Sieun frowned. They were going to argue again.

“You don't rule me.”

Suho tried to control his nerves. Damn, why did Sieun think worrying was a crime? Obviously, he didn't want the boy near a weird psychopath who had an unrequited crush on him.

“I'm just telling you what's best for you. Just listen to me this once.”

From the murderous look he received, Suho must have said the wrong thing.

“You don’t even know me!” He signed, which felt like a stab straight to Suho’s heart. “I don’t need your orders.”

“You're being irrational! What if this guy tries something?”

“I defend myself.”

“And you think you can handle that guy? I won't be there to protect you.”

Sieun started signing faster and stronger. Suho got lost at times, but he got the message right.

“Do you think I'm a weakling? I don't need you to defend me! I've been on my own my whole life!”

Sieun walked away, not even giving a chance to respond.

“Sieun!” Suho called, knowing it was useless. “Arguing with you is impossible, you’re so stubborn!”

Sieun raised his hand, giving him the middle finger.

What a brat!

“If I find out that Seongje went to your house, I'll break in again! I'll break in, okay!?”

Suho didn't even follow him. He let Sieun walk away like the spoiled brat he was. He held himself back from screaming; he was so angry.

But he was not alone for long. His friends appeared at the door and had clearly heard the entire argument.

“I think you went too far, dude.” Baku opined.

“Well, I would also be upset if the person I like kissed Seongje,” Gotak concluded, which only made the situation worse.

“Problems in paradise are hard to solve,” Yeongi said noisily. “But I think he only needs some time alone, don’t worry.”

That group would drive him crazy, but not as much as a certain someone.

Yeon Sieun. You're gonna drive me crazy.

Chapter Text

“You’re late again, seriously, Sieun?”

Of course, the first thing he would see when he woke up would be his brother annoying him. They didn't even argue last night, not only because they needed to sleep soon, but because Sieun refused to talk after his small problem with Suho.

Small, because it wouldn't be hard to solve. Suho was stubborn; he would eventually understand his reasons. Heck, he would even thank him for taking care of Seongje alone.

Of course, Sieun should have chosen his words more carefully. But Suho would understand. He always did.

“Can’t you leave me alone even in the morning?” He signed, seeing Beomseok’s frown deepen.

“I would. If you would listen to me and stop coming back so late.” He approached, blocking his path at the bedroom door. “What would you do if Dad caught you, huh?”

“He didn't.”

Sieun pushed his brother away, tired of the argument before it started.

Things were getting complicated between them. Beomseok continued to discuss how the band was a bad idea, etc.

“Sieun.” Beomseok blocked his path again. “Seriously. You promised you wouldn’t let the band get in your way.”

“And I won't. I just want to get out of this house. You should try the same.”

“What did you say?”

Beomseok's eyes widened. It was true, he had been so stressed out these past few days that he didn't even seem like himself. This house was driving them crazy; it wouldn't hurt to get some fresh air for a few hours.

“Beomseok, you’re not even sleeping properly!” He accused, pointing to his dark circles. — “Stop worrying about me. Go out for a while, I’ll deal with Dad myself.”

His brother made an even more disapproving face.

“Sieun, I won’t let you deal with Dad alone. You can hate me, but I’ll stay on your case until you’re safe.”

He sighed, feeling guilty knowing that he was the reason Beomseok had no peace these past few weeks.

“Besides, who would I go out with?” He asked, full of hurt. “My only friend changed schools, and he keeps putting my brother in danger.”

“Suho doesn't put me in danger.” He said, despite his anger, because he would defend Suho even if he hated him.

“So why does he keep keeping you out late?”

“Because he doesn't know anything. I didn't tell him about Jinwon.”

His confession made him rethink what he had said to Suho the day before. Sieun had not been honest with him. Even after the boy had shared something as intimate as his feelings about his family.

Beomseok sighed. He was also tired of arguing. His eyes were half closed, his body thinner, and his temper more explosive.

Unlike Sieun, he didn’t have a group of friends he could count on. He was always alone, whether it was at school or in that cursed mansion. And even his only friend, Suho, wasn’t as close to him anymore. Sieun felt like he had robbed his brother of something.

“Should I tell Suho the truth?” He asked, much more patiently.

Beomseok looked just as doubtful as he did.

“I don't know... Knowing him, he'll meddle. It's kind of dangerous, especially since Dad already hates him.”

His brother was right. If Suho found out about what was happening in his house, he would try to get Beomseok and Sieun out of there at any cost. But Suho wasn't rich; Oh Jinwon could ruin his life with a click.

Sieun shook his head. It would be selfish. Honestly, he was always being selfish. He brought trouble to his brother, who only wanted to help him. Disrupting Suho's life with things that weren't his fault.

Not to mention the mess with Seongje last week. He would still be a pain in the ass to Baku and Gotak, but if it weren't for Sieun, he would leave Suho alone. The only reason Seongje would be after him now was because of his jealousy and stupid inferiority complex.

Which, by the way, was also partially his fault.

“You're right.” He signed. “I can't cause any more trouble for Suho.”

Beomseok smiled, patting him on the shoulder.

“Great. Now, are you going to tell me what happened yesterday?” Sieun sighed. He had no choice.

Beomseok was his brother, of course, he noticed whenever Sieun was upset. And it's not like he was subtle.

“Nothing much. Suho and I argued.” He confessed.

He still felt irritated that Suho doubted his ability. He would beat Seongje in a fight. But he knew there was no way Suho could be sure of that.

“Did you argue? That's rare. Why?”

Sieun braced himself, knowing his brother would hate the answer.

“Seongje.”

Beomseok's eyes almost popped out.

“I hate that guy.” He said, too honestly. “He's so annoying. Dad loves that jerk.”

Beomseok's anger returned with a vengeance. Sieun couldn't blame him. Unlike the crazy delinquent he was in front of the other teenagers, Seongje was a saint with the adults. Oh Jinwon always compared him to Beomseok, saying that his brother should be like him. It was unbearable how much he preferred Seongje to be his son instead of either of them.

“Anyway, why did you guys argue about Seongje?” Beomseok knew the answer; he just wanted to stop Sieun from avoiding it.

“You know. He… He found out about our thing, and Seongje went to make trouble because they're going to compete.”

“Thing?” Beomseok teased. “You call that disaster your thing?”

Sieun sighed. It was already annoying enough to have Suho and Seongje on his case; he didn't need his brother reminding him of his mistakes as well.

“We were two confused idiots. It wasn't the best relationship in the world.”

And it wasn't. The thing was, Sieun and Seongje had a lot in common. Broken families, a passion for music, and an insatiable curiosity about exploring other boys' bodies. At the time, they just decided to combine business with pleasure.

But obviously, it wouldn't be that simple. Seongje was explosive and jealous. Sieun was rude and distant. They were teenagers with too many problems at home, and they never learned how to build healthy relationships.

Every week, there was a new fight, a reconciliation kiss, and Beomseok worried that his father would find out about everything. Luckily, neither Oh Jinwon nor Mr. Keum knew about their adventures even after their “breakup.” If they did, Jinwon wouldn’t have let Seongje into his house, and he certainly wouldn’t have left him alive either.

“Yeah, it wasn't.” Beomseok agreed. “And it would be terrible to repeat the experience, right?”

Sieun looked at him suspiciously.

“What do you mean by that?”

“You know very well what I mean.” He replied, not at all intimidated by his gaze. “Sieun, whatever you have with Suho… It will end badly. For the three of us.”

Beomseok tried to walk right past him, but Sieun grabbed his wrist. There was something deeply bothering him about Suho and Beomseok's friendship, and he needed to tell his brother.

“Beomseok. Please talk to Suho.” His request surprised him. “I know you’re angry, but Suho doesn’t know why. He thinks you hate him now.”

“But… I don’t hate him.” He admitted, stunned that for Suho, that was even a possibility.

“Then tell him that. Don't ruin your friendship because of me.”

“Sieun…”

Beomseok looked down. He reached his hand up to Sieun’s head, gently ruffling his hair. A shy yet melancholic smile spread across his lips.

“Nothing I do is your fault.” He signed before walking out into the hallway.

Sieun didn't even go after him, being haunted by his own thoughts.

He knew that his relationships would never work out until he got rid of Jinwon. And someone as good as Suho deserved more than to have a hidden and dangerous life with him.

I don't want him to get hurt because of me.

It was a boring Saturday. Sieun wanted more than just to be stuck in his thoughts. He couldn’t even study or paint like he used to. Suho and Seongje must have cursed him or something.

He sighed, tossing and turning in bed for the third time. But the vibration of a new message coming from his cell phone filled him with relief. Sieun practically jumped on it, opening the messaging app.

Juntae

Sieun, can I come to your house?

Seriously, I need help!!

Sieun

.You can

Sieun stood up, preparing to welcome his friend. Out of everyone in the band—except Suho—Juntae was his closest friend. He learned sign language quickly, and he sometimes preferred writing to speaking. This made it easier for them to communicate.

Last night was stressful for everyone. But Sieun was relieved that Juntae wanted to talk. It was obvious that he needed to, seeing as how panicked he was in the restaurant. Sieun knew that the whole story with Hyoman was upsetting him, but Juntae refused to tell anyone, including his parents.

As long as he trusted him at least, Sieun would be at ease. Juntae was a bit like him in that sense. He kept things to himself to the point of almost exploding and was too afraid of appearing weak. But he was much stronger than cowards like Hyoman.

It wasn’t long before the doorbell rang. Sieun went to the gate, opening it for Juntae to enter.

The boy was a complete mess. Drenched in sweat, breathing fast, with dark circles under his eyes, and a forced smile. But the most shocking part was that Juntae hadn't fixed his hair or put on his usual makeup. No foundation, no blush, and not even his favorite pink lipstick.

Something was very wrong.

“Hi Sieun. I-”

Sieun didn't even let him finish speaking. He pulled his wrist so he would follow him into the house, where his friend could finally explain to him what the hell was going on.

They walked past the staff without being interrupted. Juntae was overly polite and well-behaved, which at least stopped Jinwon or anyone else from getting on their nerves. They probably just saw him as a friend from a similar social class to Sieun or something.

Baku, Gotak, and especially Suho, wouldn't even get past the door.

Sieun took Juntae to his room. He locked the door, just to ensure their privacy.

Juntae practically jumped on his bed, trying to control his breathing. It took him a few days to understand that Sieun wouldn't kill him for touching his things. Now, he was so comfortable in his room that he felt like a part of it.

“What happened?” He signaled.

Juntae sat up in his bed at an absurd speed. He swung his feet back and forth nonstop. Until he gave a long, drawn-out sigh.

“I messed up,” he said, his lips trembling. “I messed up yesterday, Sieun.”

“Relax. ” He asked, sitting next to him on the bed. “What happened?”

Juntae looked away. He grabbed the hem of his coat, tightening it and rolling it up. His fingers were shaking from the force he was using.

“Do you remember… That I freaked out with Tak?” He continued, after gathering enough courage to tell. “Yesterday, at the restaurant.”

Sieun nodded.

“Well… Then, when I went to hold hands, he looked away. He didn’t touch me for the rest of the night, and he even avoided looking at me. I texted him, but all he said was sorry. ”

Juntae put his hands on his head.

“He must think he is the problem, but he’s not. I am.”

“No.” Sieun denied. “It’s not the fault of either of you.”

But Juntae didn’t seem to believe him. It was unfair that Choi Hyoman would live his life normally as if nothing had happened, while Juntae would be haunted forever by something that wasn’t his fault.

“Still, I upset him. I yelled at him like that; he must have felt horrible.” His gaze begged for help. “What do I do?”

But Sieun didn’t know how to fix the situation either. He had an idea, but he knew that Juntae would completely disagree. After all, they were very similar.

Sieun wrote in his notebook, hoping to better explain his thoughts.

'Juntae. I know you'll disagree, but maybe you can tell him the truth. Not everything, just enough for him to understand you. Just what you're comfortable telling.'

Juntae's eyes widened.

“I can't. What if… What if he never looks at me the same way again?”

Tears streamed down from his already watery eyes. Juntae tried to wipe his eyes, clearly embarrassed. Sieun felt just as lost as he did.

“It’s so… unfair.” It wasn’t just sadness. Juntae was crying with anger. “Hyoman has disturbed me for years of my life. And now that he doesn’t even look at me, I still think about him all the time. He’s like… stuck to me forever.”

Sieun didn’t answer him; the shock was too much. They had spoken briefly about Hyoman before, but this was the first time Juntae had opened up about the subject. And Sieun wanted him to feel comfortable enough to tell him everything because deep down, he knew that the situation on the stairs couldn’t have been the first time Hyoman had done something so disgusting.

“Sieun… If I tell you something, promise not to tell anyone?”

Sieun nodded. He approached Juntae, signaling clearly.

“I promise. You can trust me.”

Juntae took a deep breath. His body was still shaking, but he was much more in control. He took Sieun’s notepad and wrote without stopping. When it came to sensitive matters, he preferred to write. When he was done, he handed it to him, looking away towards his room.

'The stairs weren't the first time. Hyoman stole a lot of things from me, including my first kiss. I've dealt with these types of guys before. Because they think I'm cute for a boy because they know about my sexuality. And now, I feel like I'll never get rid of them. I want to kiss Gotak, I want all my first experiences to be with him. But I shudder at the thought of getting too close. What if he gives up on me when he finds out how difficult I am?'

Sieun’s fingers gripped the paper tightly. It was so fragile, it could easily tear under his touch. He wasn’t an emotional person; few things got him worked up. But reading those words, and thinking about everything Juntae had endured…

I want to kill Choi Hyoman. But staying by Juntae's side is more important.

Then Sieun turned the page. And for the first time, he felt comfortable telling something he had never told anyone. Because thinking about that moment still made him feel weak.

'I haven't been through everything you've been through, Juntae. But Hyoman sexually harassed me on Eunjang's first day of school. I just want you to know that Gotak deals with a lot of hardships in his life, but you will never be one of them.'

A comfortable silence filled the room. Juntae lay down on the bed as if all the weight had been lifted from his body. Sieun followed suit, lying down next to him. He stared at the ceiling, large and beautiful, but so suffocating.

“Thank you, Sieun,” Juntae said, turning to him. “It still hurts a lot. But it’s a relief to be able to share this pain with someone.”

A smile, fragile but true, spread across his lips. His face was still wet with tears, and an invisible wound that would never completely heal. But Sieun would make it more bearable for his friend.

Now, he knew exactly what they needed.

“Juntae… Let's break something!”

Juntae's peaceful smile was replaced by a worried frown.

“What!?”

Sieun was followed by Juntae to the entrance of the establishment. He wanted to surprise him, so he didn't tell his destination until they were already inside.

Juntae stared at the different items scattered around the room. Electronics, glass bottles, cups, plates, and household appliances. It was a huge mess. A man handed them a complete safety kit, including helmets and goggles. Finally, he handed them two baseball bats, which made Juntae’s eyes almost pop out.

“Sieun… What is this place?” He asked, afraid to hear the answer.

“Rage room,” Sieun replied, a mischievous smile on his face. 

Juntae stared at him, not fully understanding his answer.

“It's for you to break things, Juntae.”

“Break things!?”

His eyes scanned the room, finally understanding its purpose. He tightened his grip on the bat in his hand, uncertainty obvious from his unsteady posture.

“Breaking things is rude. My parents will kill me if they find out about this.” Sieun held back his eyes from rolling. Even in times like these, Juntae thought of others first.

“Forget your parents.” He ordered, even seeing Juntae's frightened expression. “Think about your anger. Take it out here, break everything.”

Sieun didn't give him time to deny it again. He gripped the baseball bat, raising it upwards and hitting a pile of bottles. The shards flew away, such was the impact of his blow.

He could already feel the relief after eliminating some of his nervous energy.

He looked at Juntae, expecting him to do the same.

“You can do it.” He encouraged, giving him a push.

Juntae swallowed hard. He positioned himself, his hands shaking as he lifted the bat. He closed his eyes and hit the bottles with minimal force. Some of them shattered, much slower and more intact than Sieun’s.

He opened his eyes, staring at his mess. His posture still screamed uncertainty, but infinitely lighter.

“So? How are you feeling?” Sieun signed.

Juntae gave a small smile. He pressed the bat harder, breaking the glass bottles that were intact. This time, the impact was huge.

“I feel… Light. And powerful.” He confessed. And for the first time, Juntae wasn’t shaking with anxiety.

“So what are you waiting for?” Sieun teased, positioning himself next to him.

Sieun didn't even notice how long they stayed there. They broke everything, including a television, laughing like crazy. The liberating feeling was priceless.

Sieun and Juntae had a lot in common. Not just their bad experiences. It was as if they were always holding themselves back. Whether it was anger, sadness, or fear, they never showed what they were feeling.

Juntae was controlled by his parents; he was expected to be the perfect son, the one who never makes mistakes, who never freaks out, who does what he is told. In a way, his parents never taught him to deny, to defend himself, to count on the help of others. He wouldn't tell his friend, but Sieun partly blamed them for everything that had happened to him. Since Juntae said that he would never tell his parents what happened.

'They have a lot to worry about. I don't want to disrupt their lives,' his friend told him.

And Sieun understood perfectly. He was controlled by a man who didn’t even care about him, and by a woman who called herself his mother but was never there. When you get used to dealing with everything on your own, it becomes difficult to accept help.

And that made Sieun think of Suho. He had dismissed his concerns and denied his help because he thought he could solve everything on his own. But in the end, his words and distance only hurt Suho, who only wanted to help him. He had been unfair, so concerned with his feelings that he forgot to think of others.

In the end, there was only one TV left to break. Sieun stepped aside, satisfied enough, and allowed Juntae to break it himself.

Juntae's attacks were still strong, but this time, they were slow. As if he needed to take advantage of every crack.

“Fuck. You!” He shouted each word separately as he hit the television. “Fuck you Choi Hyoman!”

Even when there was nothing left to break, Juntae continued.

“I fucking hate you!” It was the loudest he had ever screamed. “You ruined my life! I hope you die!”

He kicked at the already broken shards, as if he could destroy them more if he tried hard enough. When he was done, he stepped back, staring at the damage and chaos they had caused.

“I want to destroy him. I want him to feel what I felt.”

And then Juntae sat down on the floor. His crying was unstoppable. It was loud and uncontrolled and shrill. It wasn't pretty, it wasn't pleasant. It was simply real. And that was all that mattered.

Sieun sat down next to him. He didn't comfort him, didn't tell him to calm down. He allowed his friend to scream, to let out all the pain he was feeling. To curse the whole world.

Sieun just stood by his side.

And that was enough.

Sieun and Juntae were walking through the mall.

They left the rage room, dying of exhaustion and hunger. Then Juntae came up with the idea of eating at the mall's cafeteria. He wanted to do some shopping, so he asked Sieun to accompany him.

Sieun watched him walk into different stores. Juntae would walk around the entire place, but would come away empty-handed. There was never anything good enough for his taste; he was picky even when it came to something as simple as a necklace or an earring.

But his peaceful walk was interrupted. Suddenly, Juntae pulled his wrist, hiding them both behind a wall.

“What was that?” He signed, confused.

“Look.”

Juntae pointed forward. Sieun followed his gaze, seeing two people standing side by side.

Seongje and Na Baekjin. Today is not my lucky day.

What were those troublemakers doing at the mall? They seemed surprisingly casual, although Baekjin had the same grumpy expression as always. They were in front of a music store, which was a relief. Maybe they were just buying instruments, not plotting something evil.

“They’re scary,” Juntae commented, gripping his arm tightly. “Sieun, let’s go.”

Sieun shook his head. He had told Suho that he would deal with Seongje; this was a good opportunity to find out if he was up to something. Sieun had expected Juntae to disagree, but the look of panic in his eyes was worrying.

“Sieun, please, let's go.” He tried to pull his arm away in vain, since Sieun wouldn't budge. “Please, Seongje said weird things about you. Please!”

It was then that Sieun understood that Juntae was not worried about a fight. His friend was trembling, trying to get him out of the place at any cost. Juntae was not afraid of Sieun fighting with Seongje.

No. He was afraid that Seongje was someone like Hyoman.

Sieun turned to calm his friend down. Seongje might be an arrogant jerk, but he wasn’t someone disgusting enough to do something like that. When it came to the sexual advancement of their relationship, he was annoyingly patient.

But before Sieun could say anything, two people stopped in front of him. He could tell who they were just by Juntae’s trembling.

“What a coincidence!” Seongje shouted, receiving a reprimanding look from Baekjin. “I miss your mouth.” He spoke at the same time he signed.

Sieun rolled his eyes. Seongje wasn’t helping his case one bit. Juntae’s eyes doubled in size.

Seongje knew surprisingly a lot of sign language. It wasn't as much as he should have, since he often made the excuse that he was too busy to learn. Plus, he prioritized signs that had something to do with a romantic relationship.

It was annoying that he had learned the sign for kissing first. Just because, in his words:

“The first thing I noticed about you was your lips. So learning the sign for kissing was more important than the sign for hello.”

It was nonsense. But Sieun was a hormonal teenager, so he didn’t complain or think much about it. It was kind of pathetic, the way both he and Seongje accepted each other’s apologies as long as they still had a thing.

God, he hated that word, even though he was the one responsible for it.

“Is that Baku’s new band?” Baekjin asked, trying not to sound too interested.

“Relax, the only one capable of stealing your Baku is still Gotak.” Seongje teased, not even paying attention to Baekjin's murderous look. “Sieun is too busy sucking up to that idiot Suho.”

Seongje was like a child. His childish teasing was just a way to get his attention. In fact, he hadn’t changed at all.

This didn't bother Sieun, but Juntae practically jumped in front of him. He stretched out his arms, even though he was scared to death, using himself as a human shield for Sieun.

“Don't go near him.” He ordered, his voice breaking.

Seongje, who had a carefree smile on his face, knitted his eyebrows together in confusion. He should have noticed that something wasn’t right. Baekjin, however, approached Juntae, too focused on his own anger to notice anything.

“Is this a challenge?” He asked, adjusting his posture.

Sieun looked around. Luckily, the mall was full of makeshift weapons, so they could lose the two of them if necessary. Juntae was still shaking like a loose board.

Baekjin smiled. That jerk clearly enjoyed the fear he caused in others. Especially those who were close to Baku. Sieun didn't understand the strange relationship between the two.

“What? Have you lost your courage?” Baekjin stepped closer, his smile growing with every step.

Sieun prepared for a fight. But before either of them could move, Baekjin was shoved so hard that he almost fell to the ground.

Hyuntak. He was the one who pushed Baekjin as if he wanted to kill him—and maybe he did.

“Fuck! Is this a family reunion?” Seongje teased, his eyes doubling in size with excitement.

Baekjin and Gotak stared at each other. There was a lot of hatred and resentment hidden inside, certainly not spoken by either of them. After all, just like Sieun, they were better with their fists than with words.

“Don't touch him, you son of a bitch!” Hyuntak shouted.

He clenched his fingers so tightly that they were turning white. Gotak’s short temper was nothing new, but the fury was too much even for him. He might hate Seongje, but what he felt for Baekjin was much more like betrayal.

The betrayal of a friend he trusted.

“And what are you going to do?” Baekjin challenged, coming face to face with him. — Kick me?

That was cruel beyond belief. Juntae practically jumped to Gotak’s side, pulling on his arm, just like he had done with Sieun earlier.

“And then you could break his other knee!” Seongje added, giving a few crooked kicks with his leg in an attempt to mock.

“Tak, don't listen to them. Let's go.” Juntae asked, trying to drag him. His teary eyes were red.

But Sieun noticed. Hyuntak wasn’t paralyzed with anger. It was with fear. As if his body remembered the pain and refused to budge.

“Tak? How cute!” If Seongje didn’t shut up, Sieun would do it for him.

Baekjin’s gaze was intense. He was looking at Gotak and Juntae, but this time it wasn’t with anger. It was a lost look. As if no matter how hard he tried, he would never understand why they stood in front of each other, even though they were trembling with fear,

“Go away,” Gotak ordered. “If you don't want to get hit.”

Seongje laughed. He wasn’t intimidated, but his laughter was almost dejected now. Maybe he was thinking the same thing as Baekjin.

“Hey Baekjin! Maybe Baku is free from Gotak now.” Seongje touched his friend's shoulder, who didn't move a muscle.

Baekjin didn't even notice Seongje's provocations. He was too focused on Gotak. His sharp eyes, always confident, were now uncertain.

“Tell Baku… I miss him.”

It didn't sound like an order. It was a request. Fragile and oddly soft for someone as powerful as him.

Baekjin started walking, heading towards the exit. Seongje rolled his eyes, disappointed at missing the chance to fight.

“Wait for me!” He shouted, losing his playful smile as he followed Baekjin.

Hyuntak maintained his defensive posture until he was sure the threats were gone. He turned to Juntae, his gaze as worried as his.

“Are you okay?” They both asked at the same time.

The tension dissipated for a moment. Hyuntak relaxed his shoulders, giving a small smile. Juntae gave his typical chuckle, low and shy.

And Sieun felt like an intruder.

After the confusion, they went to a more private place. They sat around an empty table, where no one could hear them.

“So…” Juntae began, unsure. “Yesterday, you avoided me… Because you were angry?”

Hyuntak's eyes widened, as if such a possibility was absurd.

“Of course not.” He replied, determined.

“Then why?”

“Well, because you got scared because of me. You were shaking the rest of the night, Juntae, because I touched you at that time. I don't even have the right to look at you.”

He looked down, shame clear in his guilty posture. Now, it was Juntae who felt guilty.

“No! Tak, it wasn't your fault that I acted like that.” He confessed, resting his hands on the table.

“It wasn’t?” Hyuntak asked.

It was sad, but also kind, that Hyuntak had taken the blame for something that was beyond his control.

“So… Why did you act like that?”

Juntae clasped his hands together. His fingers were tightly gripped, and his breathing was labored. Sieun placed his hand on top of his, slowly separating it from the other. He let Juntae hold his hand instead of squeezing his own.

It didn't magically make everything better. But it did make it more bearable.

“I… It’s hard to talk about it.” Juntae admitted.

Gotak's gaze softened.

“If I tell you something, too, do you think it will be easier?”

He didn’t let Juntae’s trembling shake him. Hyuntak was always called hot-headed, but to Sieun, he was patient. There was no rush to hear the truth, nor was there any desperation to help Juntae. It was a calm, peaceful, and comfortable atmosphere.

“I think so,” Juntae replied, nodding.

Then Hyuntak took a deep breath. His serene gaze hid nervousness, his own fears. Which he would tell them, just to make things easier for Juntae.

“When… Baekjin broke my knee,” he said, keeping his voice steady. “It was the worst time of my life. I felt weak, helpless. I had always protected others, and now I needed protection.”

Sieun could picture it perfectly. A younger, more impatient Gotak, having to spend his days in the hospital, recovering without being able to do the things he loved. Without being able to take care of his mother.

“One day, I freaked out. Baku would always come visit me, so I yelled at him, sent him away. Not because I was angry with him, but because I was angry with myself. I didn't want my best friend to see me like that, weak and pathetic. I felt vulnerable. I felt like... He would see me differently.”

Hyuntak took a deep breath before continuing. It must be difficult, recalling painful memories that he could never forget. Especially after seeing Baekjin that same day.

“But what I didn’t realize was how much this affected Baku. He already blamed himself for everything, and he thought I blamed him, too. It was only when I told him the truth about my fear of our relationship changing that things worked out. Baku told me that nothing in the world would make him see me differently. That I would always be the stubborn Gotak who loved to tease him.”

A soft smile spread across his lips. His posture relaxed, now that his mind was filled with fond memories.

“Well, what I mean is… I’m not going to say it didn’t affect me. I still freeze in front of Baekjin, and I tremble whenever people get too close to my knee. The scar will still be there.” He confessed, sounding more confident with each word. “But Baku didn’t act any differently. He didn’t become overprotective, nor did he stop teasing me. No, he was much more subtle. He would push me away whenever he saw Baekjin, and he would be careful when he touched my leg. And then I realized that Baku didn’t think I was weak. He only cared about me.”

His entire speech made Sieun think back to his own situation. Suho didn't think he was weak for wanting to protect him from Seongje; he simply cared about him. Sieun was so used to taking care of himself that the idea of trusting someone enough to take care of him was scary.

But pushing Suho away without explaining anything to him would only make him feel confused and guilty. Just like Baku and Hyuntak felt.

Then there was his brother Beomseok. He was always worried, but Sieun ignored him, knowing what he was going through, and let him deal with his fears alone. His heart sank. Not only had he been a terrible friend, but a horrible brother as well.

Juntae squeezed Sieun's hand tighter.

“Tak, I'm so glad you trust me enough to tell me something like that. It must have been hard.”

“And I hope you trust me, too. Only tell me if you feel comfortable doing so.”

Juntae took a deep breath. Sieun didn’t let go of his hand, but he moved away enough so that he didn’t feel suffocated.

“Well, you know Hyoman, right?” Hyuntak nodded. “Before I joined the band, he used to bully me and some other boys a lot. But after a while, he started to get weirder. He…”

Sieun noticed the moment Juntae froze. Neither he nor Gotak rushed him. Sieun just held his hand tighter, and Hyuntak moved a little closer to the table. Juntae took another deep breath.

“He started making weird requests. Before, I was just the idiot who brought him his snacks, but I guess that wasn't enough. He sexually assaulted me. More than once.”

Sieun knew how hard it was to say those words. It was strange to admit that what happened to you was not something small or insignificant. It was like feeling the weight of reality after trying to ignore it.

Hyuntak’s eyes widened. Sieun knew he was burning with anger. Yet, his posture didn’t change at all. He didn’t shout, he didn’t panic, he didn’t make the situation worse. He just got closer to Juntae, waiting for him to finish.

“That's why I freaked out at the restaurant. It wasn't your fault. I just... I think of him every time someone gets too close. I was afraid that you would treat me differently. That I would make your life harder.”

“Juntae,” Hyuntak said his name softly, as if it were heavenly. “Believe me, you will always be the same kind Juntae, the one who made my life easier. Is there anything I can do to help you?”

Tears fell uncontrollably from Juntae.

“I don't know. Just hug me!” He asked.

And so Hyuntak did. He hugged Juntae, just as he would have done before. Never too tight, but always warm. And his eyes, already teary, soon began to shed tears as well.

“I don't know what to do, Tak.”

“It’s okay, we'll find out together.”

And Sieun slowly let go of Juntae's hand. He left, knowing that the two of them needed privacy.

It wouldn't be easy, not for Gotak, and certainly not for Juntae. But now, he would have many people to support him. He was no longer alone.

And then Sieun realized.

I'm also not alone anymore.

Sieun arrived home when it was already dark. He didn't even check his phone, knowing that there would be dozens of messages from a worried Beomseok and an angry Jinwon. Sieun didn't care about Jinwon, but he wanted to apologize to Beomseok in person.

But when Sieun entered the house, it wasn't just Jinwon and Beomseok waiting for him in the living room.

Mom?

His mother, elegant as always, was wearing a long black dress. In fact, Jinwon and Beomseok were wearing suits, as if it were a party and not a simple dinner.

“Sieun, good evening, dear.” His mother said, as if she hadn’t been missing for days. “Aren’t you going to greet the guests?”

And only then did he notice the family waiting for them on the other side. Seongje, along with his scary father and his threatening mother. Shit.

I hope Suho was joking about breaking into the house.

Sieun didn’t allow himself to stand still for long. He bowed, watching Seongje’s irritating smile grow.

“Didn’t you check your messages?” Oh Jinwon asked, trying to keep his tone polite. “Go get ready, you’re embarrassing me.”

His mother gave Jinwon a light push, as if scolding him.

“Calm down, dear, he just got late. Sieun, get ready, okay? I've already picked out your suit.”

He held back his eyes from rolling. She was always like this; she would disappear for days, leaving him alone with that monster, but then she would come home all nice and acting like she was the mother of the year. And of course, she loved to control everything, including what he was going to wear.

Knowing he had no choice, Sieun obeyed and went up to his room. He put on the suit that was on his bed and fixed his hair, which was completely messy due to his activity with Juntae. He sighed, staring in the mirror at that boy who looked nothing like him.

He grabbed his cell phone, taking it with him. Just in case.

Afterwards, Sieun went down to the kitchen. Everyone was sitting around the table, waiting to be served like the useless bunch of people they were. He hated the food at “family reunion” dinners—or whatever Jinwon called them.

He sat down next to his mother, knowing that it was the place she had chosen. And to make matters worse, he was right in front of Seongje, who had a very satisfied smile on his face. It was like facing his karma.

“Mrs. Oh, you look elegant as always.” Seongje’s mother complimented, without a hint of sincerity.

Mrs. Oh. Sieun hated that she no longer used the surname Yeon.

“Well, not as much as you, Mrs. Keum.”

I hope this dinner ends soon.

“As for our business in politics,” Oh Jinwon began, talking to Seongje’s father.

Sieun didn’t even look at his lips, not at all interested in the conversation. It was annoying that his mother, as intelligent as she was, now just sat there without participating in the conversation. Her only job was to look pretty and stand by her husband’s side.

Those arrogant men thought they were so clever, treating their wives like objects that could be discarded the moment they lost interest. Sieun had tried to have this discussion with his mother before, but it never got anywhere.

“That’s the role of a politician’s wife. I’m supposed to smile and keep up appearances. That’s also supporting his career, you know?”

His mother had always been cold and distant, but she had never been… quiet. Or obedient. Her arguments with his father had made that abundantly clear. Oh Jinwon was molding her, just like he had done with Beomseok, and just like he had been trying to do with Sieun for years.

Suddenly, Sieun felt his phone vibrate in his hand. He picked it up, opening a new message.

Suho

Is everything okay there?

I know you went out with Juntae, if you don't tell the truth, he will

Is Seongje at your house?

Sieun couldn’t let Suho enter his house. No way, he still remembered Oh Jinwon’s words perfectly. If he broke in, Suho would only be harming his future.

Sieun

Suho, don't come here

Seriously, Jinwon hates you enough

If you break in, I won't talk to you anymore, I swear

Suho

Suho Express on the way, choo choo!

I'm going to kill him.

This was terrible. It was a curse from the universe, a cruel joke designed to torment him.

Sieun didn’t even have time to lament. His mom touched his arm, catching his attention.

“Sieun, don't use your cell phone at the table, it's rude.” She whispered.

He didn't want to part with his phone, not now. But Sieun didn't have much of a choice. He put the phone away, seeing the way Beomseok looked at him worriedly. He must have noticed his inner despair.

“Seongje, I saw that you ranked first in your school’s rankings.” Jinwon praised, like the ass-kisser he was.

Seongje smiled. Not a real smile, it was that polite facade he put on when he talked to his father’s friends.

“Yes, Mr. Oh. I've never been out of first place.” He boasted.

“It's impressive. I wish Beomseok would do the same, but he hasn't made me proud yet.”

Beomseok gripped the corner of the table tightly. His murderous gaze directed at Seongje was just a worried face to the others.

“Well, I wouldn’t blame him that much,” Seongje said, staring back at him. “After all, it’s not something everyone can do.”

Beomseok gripped the table as if he were holding himself back from jumping on Seongje. The exchange of glances was so intense that everyone felt the change in the atmosphere.

“Seongje.” That was all Mr. Keum said, as if his name alone was a warning.

Seongje didn't retort, but Sieun could see that anger in his eyes every time his father opened his mouth.

They were finally served. The waitresses began to bring dinner, that tasteless food that Sieun could no longer stand the smell of. And to make matters worse, when they put the food on his plate, he noticed that he received even less than Beomseok and Seongje.

Sieun glared at his mother, knowing she was the one responsible.

“Well, dear, it seems like you’ve gained a little weight since last time. I’m helping you lose weight; it’s important for your health.” She smiled, as if it were a great kindness.

Maybe that was why she never learned sign language. Sieun could retort all he wanted, but she wouldn't understand. Even so, he decided not to keep quiet.

“Stop pretending you care about my health. You just want to keep up appearances; you care more about what others think than you do about me.”

All eyes turned to him. Beomseok's concern, Seongje's proud smile, his mother's confusion, and Oh Jinwon's anger. He no longer cared what they thought.

“Sieun. Please refrain from using that language if others can’t understand it.” Jinwon ordered, as if it was a concerned request, and he hadn’t punished Sieun for speaking his own language.

Before Sieun could give Beomseok a heart attack, Seongje interrupted the conversation.

“It's not entirely his fault; bad influences do that.” His smile grew even wider.

Beomseok didn't need to move. Sieun himself would jump on Seongje if he didn't shut up.

“What do you mean, Seongje?” Jinwon asked, eager to find a reason to criticize Sieun.

Sieun stared at Seongje. His gaze was very clear. Talk about Suho, and you’ll regret coming to this dinner.

Seongje shrugged, acting like he didn't care.

“Well, it's none of my business. But that Ahn Suho who showed up at the party? It's kind of weird that he follows Sieun around, taking him everywhere at night.”

That was the last straw. Sieun slammed his fist against the table, holding on to it to get up. He knew his mother and Jinwon were scolding him with their eyes, but all he cared about was sparing Beomseok and finishing off Seongje.

“Follow me. Now.” He signaled.

He immediately went outside, knowing that Seongje was right behind him.

He opened the door, feeling light as he could breathe fresh air. The cold wind didn't bother him; it was a relief. Sieun sighed deeply, turning to Seongje, who was trying to look innocent.

“What do you think you're doing?” He signed.

“Me? Well, I'm keeping bad influences from surrounding you.” He tried to joke, but Sieun wasn't in the mood for his humor.

“Seongje. I’m serious.”

Seongje’s fake, playful smile faded. He frowned, as if, like Sieun, being outside forced him to face his true feelings.

“I'm angry. Very angry at you, and that stupid band.” He said, avoiding his gaze.

There was something almost childish about his demeanor. But not in his typical way, where he tried to make jokes about everything. It was like actually seeing a child who hadn't learned how to deal with what he felt.

“Why?” Sieun asked, wanting him to be honest.

Seongje took a deep breath.

“It’s stupid. You said you’d never date, that you wouldn’t commit. But the way you look at him… You’ve never looked at me like that before.” In all their time together, Sieun had never seen Seongje look so insecure.

It was true. He had always been clear about how much they had nothing. But he hadn’t thought it would upset Seongje.

“That day… When you said you would never have anything serious with me. It hurt like hell.”

It was the day of their fateful “breakup”. Seongje wanted something more serious and asked him out. But Sieun didn’t want to date while he had to deal with Jinwon and his difficulties. However, he wasn’t honest. He was rude, saying that Seongje was making things up and that he would never date someone like him.

He made a mistake by choosing to hurt him rather than be honest. The same mistake he was close to making with Suho.

“I’m sorry,” he said. Seongje was a jerk, but Sieun never apologized for the way he treated him.

Seongje's eyes widened.

“Whatever. It’s just always the same.” His thoughts were jumbled. “Back in the band days. Baku and Gotak were best friends, and I knew they never trusted me like they trusted each other. And now with Baekjin. It doesn’t matter that he’s with me; he thinks about Baku all the time. I just…”

Sieun just watched him. It was the first time Seongje had spoken so much about his feelings. His chest tightened because, for a moment, he forgot that Seongje was also just a teenager with a troubled family. Just like him.

That didn't justify his nonsense. But Sieun understood him better because of it.

“I’m tired of being the second option,” Seongje admitted, something that certainly hurt his pride. “It’s annoying. You don’t want a commitment, but you’ve only known Suho for a short time, and it seems like you’re already dating.”

Suddenly, Seongje stopped his speech in the middle. He stared at the entrance gate, as if he were listening to something outside.

“What is it?” Sieun signed.

Before he could answer, Sieun's mother appeared at the front door.

“Boys, did you order anything? A deliveryman wants to come in.”

Deliveryman? Sieun prepared to deny it, but Seongje gave an evil smile, as if he was planning something.

“Yes, I did,” Seongje stated. “You can let him in.”

Sieun stared at him blankly. He was sure that Seongje hadn’t ordered anything. His mother nodded, going back inside.

Sieun turned towards the gate, but Seongje's fingers grabbed his chin, forcing his face to turn towards him.

“Sieun… If you and Suho couldn’t be together anymore. Then, would I still have a chance?”

He tilted his head, as if he was about to kiss him. Sieun didn't even have time to ask him what the hell was going on before the gate slammed open.

They both turned to it, coming face to face with a shocked and furious Ahn Suho. Shit.

Fucking Keum Seongje.

Seongje's smile grew even wider—if that was possible. As for Suho, he ran towards the two.

“Don't touch him, you bastard!” He shouted, jumping at Seongje completely out of control.

He punched him in the face, knocking Seongje into the yard. And Seongje laughed, knowing that the noise would attract the attention of his parents. And that he had succeeded in carrying out his plan to screw over Ahn Suho.

Suho, who had only appeared to save Sieun.

It's all my fault.

Chapter Text

"Seriously, Yeongi, he's so stubborn!" Suho complained again.

After their argument, Suho returned home with Yeongi. He couldn't stop thinking about Sieun. How could he be so cold? Suho was just worried, but he was treated like a control freak.

"Of course I don't underestimate him!" he stated, remembering Sieun's baseless accusations. "I just… I don't want him to get hurt."

Seongje scared him. It wasn't just jealousy, if only it were. The guy was weird and clearly hadn't gotten over his feelings for Sieun. Plus, his weird talk about sleeping with Sieun. He gave him the creeps, and Suho wanted him as far away from any of his friends as possible.

"Suho, try to see his side," Yeongi advised. "He's the type who's always taken care of himself; he probably thinks protection is a sign of weakness."

“But it's not. And I don't know how to show him that.”

It was frustrating. Because deep down, Suho understood the feeling perfectly. In fact, it was ironic—and infuriating, to say the least—that all the band members acted exactly the same way. All were incapable of accepting help.

Juntae never told anyone what was wrong, raised by strict parents who held him too tightly. Gotak always tried to act tough, even when he was scared, because he had to protect his mother from a young age. Baku put on a smile and refused to show his true feelings, having lived with a drunken, explosive father who was always angry.

Sieun had distant parents and a stepfather who clearly didn't fulfill his role. And Suho lost his parents at a young age and had to be responsible for his grandmother and later Yeongi. It was no surprise that neither of them knew how to deal with their feelings, or even talk about them.

The situation even reminded him of Beomseok, who was angry with him, but wouldn't say why or be honest about it. It wasn't hard to guess that his father was the reason.

Even Yeongi had her difficulties, having been kicked out of her home and relying on a criminal to survive. Suho didn't even want to think about what would have happened to her if he hadn't found her.

"Suho." Yeongi caught his attention. "Do you remember what I was like when I first started living here?"

Suho remembered perfectly. If Sieun was stubborn, then Yeongi was twice as stubborn. She refused to accept any help, constantly fought with Suho, and even attempted to run away from home once.

“I remember,” he admitted. “You were like a skittish kitten, trying to scratch me all the time.”

Yeongi chuckled, giving him a light push.

"Even when I lived with my parents… They never cared about me," She confessed, losing her typical amused smile. "So I thought that to receive help, I had to give something in return. Just like when I worked for Gilsoo."

Suho sat beside her on the bed. He held Yeongi's hand, comforting her as she had done so many times for him before.

"It took me a long time to accept that you and Grandma just wanted to help me. After being alone for so long, it was strange getting used to having you all protecting me. I also felt weak sometimes."

The day she ran away from home was when everything changed. Suho and his grandmother searched everywhere for Yeongi, even though it was nighttime and dangerous. And when they finally found her, she cried nonstop. In a way, she had never been allowed to do before.

“Why did you come after me? Why do you care about me? I’ve never done anything for you!”

It was that day that they hugged for the first time. Suho cried with her, begging her to never disappear again. When they returned home, his grandmother made hot chocolate and cared for Yeongi as her granddaughter.

It wasn't easy getting close to her, nor gaining her trust. Yeongi had been abandoned by the adults who were supposed to care for her, and she was afraid of the one who promised her protection. It was obvious she would be suspicious, and even a little aggressive at times.

But she just needed time. Things settled down, and suddenly, Yeongi was part of the family. She and Suho argued and fought. Yeongi was still evasive and argumentative from time to time. But now they were more patient with each other, and Suho understood that some fears and traumas never go away.

They just affect you less when you have a support network to help you if things get too difficult.

"I remember. I wasn't very patient with you at first either," he admitted, embarrassed.

"Of course not. Do you really think two traumatized brats will be patient?" She joked, giving a teasing smile. "What I mean is... You can't force Sieun to accept your help, just like you couldn't do that to me. But you can stay by his side, show him you won't abandon him. You've built a relationship of trust with me, Suho, because you're a good person."

He squeezed her hand tighter. It was strange to remember that younger, more scared Yeongi, who had no one to help her.

"Then you'll do it. It won't be easy, but your stubbornness is strong enough to stand up to Sieun's." She teased.

Suho let himself laugh, some of his despair fading away.

“It's funny. Not just the band, but all of us… We're always trying to be each other's heroes. Even if we're a bunch of weak idiots.”

And suddenly, an epiphany. Suho left his seat, startling Yeongi, who let go of his hand. He jumped on his backpack, opening it, and pulling out his notebook. He grabbed his pen, nearly empty of ink, and scribbled what he called handwriting.

Weak Heroes

"Yeongi!" He jumped, showing her the notebook. "I already have a name for our band!"

"Weak Heroes?" she asked, reading with difficulty.

"That's right! Weak Heroes!" he repeated, as if he wanted the whole world to hear. "The band Weak Heroes will be recognized by this entire country one day!"

Yeongi laughed, watching him jump around the room to burn off his energy.

And suddenly, it wasn't just the band's name that came to mind.

“Yeongi… I think I know what our first song will be about.”

Suho rode his motorcycle as fast as possible.

Gotak told him about his encounter with Juntae and Sieun at the mall, and the intrusion of the weirdos Baekjin and Seongje. Suho texted Sieun—just in case—but when the boy desperately replied, telling him not to come, Suho knew he had a mission to accomplish.

The plan was simple: pretend to be a delivery man—which he was—and wait for Beomseok or Sieun to let him in. No convincing was needed; he just had to get in and make sure Seongje didn't cause any trouble.

He arrived in front of the mansion, looking as scary as ever. He parked his motorcycle and got off, heading toward the gate. He rang the doorbell, hoping it wouldn't be Jinwon who saw his face on the camera.

“Anyone home!?” He shouted.

A voice coming from the intercom answered him.

“Good evening… Who might you be?” The voice was feminine, carrying the elegance typical of someone who lived there.

"Good evening, madam." He bowed. "I'm a deliveryman. Someone placed an order at our restaurant."

She went silent for a moment.

“Order? Well, I'll check with the boys.”

He straightened his posture, tapping his fingertips repeatedly on his leg. Time moved slowly, a cruel but everyday challenge for him. The gate was finally open.

Suho opened it, entering as fast as his legs could carry him. He forgot his plan, coming face to face with something he wished he hadn't seen.

Seongje held Sieun's chin. He tilted his head so he looked ready to kiss him, a satisfied smile on his face. Suho wasted no time; even if Sieun hated him for it, he wouldn't stand still.

“Don't touch him, you bastard!”

He leaped at Seongje, punching him square in the face. He knocked him to the ground, dirt sticking to his shoes and leaves flying around him. Seongje laughed, unaffected by his attack.

He clenched his fists, punching him again. Sweat poured down madly, mixing with the beads of blood forming on his knuckles. Someone was trying to pull him away, but his legs remained firmly in place.

It wasn't until two people pulled him hard that his body lost its rigidity. He kept his fist raised, aiming at Seongje, who was bleeding from his nose and mouth. He spat blood, which stained the green, well-supported plants surrounding them red.

Only then did Suho realize where he was. Two men, tall and strong, were holding him. One of them was the security guard who'd chased him that day. He controlled his breathing, which had been ragged and agitated for longer than he could count.

"Let me go!" he shouted, flailing his arms in an attempt to free himself. It was useless; the combined strength of the two men held him in place.

Sieun appeared before him, his face unusually impressed. His eyes followed the trail of blood, landing on Seongje lying on the ground. His gaze, however, didn't linger on him for long. He walked over to Suho, his hands cupping his face, gently cradling it.

Suho closed his eyes. The touch was warm, soothing. It made everything peaceful, even in the chaos around them.

"I'm sorry," he said, opening his eyes. "I'm sorry if I scared you. I didn't want him to hurt you."

But it wasn't fear that dominated Sieun. That boy, always expressionless, now shone. He had the most beautiful smile Suho had ever seen. For a moment, he forgot his first meeting with Sieun.

He had attempted to stab him that day.

This boy loves violence.

It was liberating. To have someone who would love the ugliest part of him. The lack of control, the violence, and the rage.

Suho smiled back. But it didn't last.

"What's going on here!?" Oh Jinwon yelled, his face red and his fists clenched.

Suho knew someone would show up. But given the noise, he expected more people to emerge from the mansion.

Why is he the only one who came? Where are the other adults?

Jinwon tugged on Sieun's wrist, using enough force that the boy lost his balance and let out a small groan of pain. His breathing quickened again.

"Hey, don't hurt him!" He tried to move, but the guards held him in place.

"I'm his father, you brat! Don't interfere!" Jinwon shouted, tightening his grip.

His vision was getting blurry. He dug his nails into his palms, feeling the pain of the small cuts he'd inflicted on himself.

"It's you again, Ahn Suho," Jinwon said, his eyes focused on him. "I knew something was wrong. You brought him here, you brat!" He accused Sieun, pointing at him.

Seongje stood up. Even he had lost his smile, walking crookedly and grimacing in pain.

Jinwon raised his hand, slapping Sieun squarely on the cheek.

“Son of a bitch!” Suho yelled.

How dare he? Not only assault him, but he did it out in the open, without caring if Suho and Seongje were watching.

Where's his mom? Where's Beomseok?

His body didn't stop moving for even a second. The grip on his arms tightened, pain seeping through his muscles. Sweat trickled down his forehead, mixing with his blood. He felt dizzy, but all he wanted was to escape and teach that damned man a lesson.

Seongje's eyes widened. He walked over to Jinwon, swallowing hard.

"Mr. Oh, Sieun didn't bring him. This crazy guy came alone, seriously." He had a desperate look on his face. Now he was worried? After what he'd done?

"Now you're defending him? Bastard!" Suho wanted to cover that smile in blood. "You didn't care when you tried to screw me over, damn it! Think about Sieun, it's his life you're ruining!"

"What? No, I…" Something akin to guilt appeared in his eyes as he stared at Sieun. But his pride shouted louder. "You're the one ruining his life! With your stupid band that keeps causing trouble."

Seongje approached, his gaze full of contempt, as if Suho were an animal that needed to be restrained. No matter how hard he tried, his fist couldn't reach the bastard's face.

"Wake up, Ahn Suho. You come from a family of failures. Someone like you won't be able to do anything for Sieun."

It hurt more than any punch Seongje could have thrown at him.

Suho looked at Sieun as if needing an answer. A denial, anything that would tell him Seongje was wrong. Sieun pointed to himself, then rubbed his palm over his chest, and pointed back at Suho.

He held his breath as he recognized that sign.

“I like you.”

I like you.

It was as if his eyes were lying to him. But no, it was real. Sieun had just told him he liked him. A smile of pure adrenaline spread across his lips. He wanted to respond with sign language, but he couldn't move his arms.

“Me too! I like you too!” He shouted, oblivious to his surroundings.

All he could see was Sieun. His smile, lovely and genuine. His eyes, brimming with unshed tears. Everything about him was beautiful, just like the paintings he created. He was everything that was most beautiful and most violent in the world.

Jinwon became even more enraged. He looked at Suho as if he were responsible for all his problems—and he kind of wanted to be.

"You damn brat! You better never show your face in this house again!" Sweat trickled down his neck, staining his perfect suit.

It was funny that a teenager from humble origins could threaten him with his mere existence. Jinwon wasn't as unbeatable as he thought he was.

“And you.” He turned to Sieun, squeezing his wrist. “I told you not to use sign language in this house.”

“What!?”

Suho knew Jinwon was a cruel man. But he didn't think he'd be capable of forbidding someone from speaking their own language. This was another level of evil, so high that Suho didn't want to leave that house under any circumstances. At least not without taking Sieun with him.

“How dare you? That's his language! How is he supposed to communicate?”

Even though his body begged for rest, Suho wouldn't budge. Whether it was adrenaline or pure rage, something kept him from giving in. He'd never felt so strong, but he'd also never felt so scared.

He was scared. Genuinely scared of leaving Beomseok and Sieun with that man, with no one to protect them.

"That's none of your business. Guards, get him out of here!" Jinwon had lost his patience.

Suho began to be pulled toward the exit. His strength doubled, desperate to escape. Sieun felt the same way, trying to free Jinwon's hand from his wrist. And when he couldn't, Suho noticed that violent glint in his eyes.

Sieun bit Jinwon's hand, and Suho knew the intensity of that pain. The man jumped back, screaming in agony. The bite mark was visible on his hand, a reminder of Sieun's abilities. He was like a tiny agent of chaos.

“You brat!”

Suho's smile widened, his heart beating faster. He was mesmerized, transfixed by the boy who fought without giving up.

Sieun tried to run toward him, but Jinwon grabbed his hair, pulling him back. It was enough to fill Suho with a strength he didn't even know he had.

He kicked one of the guards in the leg, knocking him loose. With his free arm, he wasted no time punching the other guard in the face, knocking him backward. He started walking toward Sieun, and Jinwon's eyes widened.

But then, footsteps were heard inside the mansion.

"What's going on here!?" a woman shouted. It was the same voice from the intercom.

Jinwon let go of Sieun's hair, straightening his posture as if he were an innocent man.

Suddenly, Beomseok appeared alongside the woman, whom Suho guessed was Sieun's mother, given their resemblance. Two more adults also emerged, immediately rushing to Seongje.

"Son, you're bleeding!" his mother screamed, holding him.

Seongje's father only glanced, but his focus was on Suho. As if having a poor kid in the yard was more important than his son bleeding on the ground.

"Who is this delinquent?" he asked, crossing his arms.

Suho could barely enjoy his freedom. The guards grabbed him again, now recovered.

Jinwon looked at Beomseok, a dangerous anger in his expression.

"I told you to keep everyone inside." He kept his tone low, but his gaze remained menacing.

But Beomseok was unfazed.

"Mrs. Yeon wanted to check. It's her right, since it involves her son, isn't it?" He responded in kind, not even flinching at his father's intimidation.

Even though their relationship was no longer the same, Suho smiled proudly.

Sieun's mother walked over to him. Her posture was elegant, but her gaze was worried. Jinwon stepped away from Sieun, letting her check on her son.

"Sieun, what's wrong, my love?" She touched his cheeks, noticing the way Sieun flinched in pain.

"Your son brought that delinquent home," Jinwon accused, pointing at Suho. Mrs. Yeon glared at him, as if she'd already chosen her side.

No. I won't let that happen.

"Don't listen to that son of a bitch! He hit your son!" Suho shouted, oblivious to how everyone stared at him like he was crazy.

"What?" Her eyes wandered from Jinwon to Suho, searching for the liar.

"Stop making up stories. You're an uncontrolled mutt. Look at the state he left Seongje in."

There was no defense in this. What happened to Seongje was entirely his fault, and now he regretted not having controlled himself. Of course, Jinwon would use something like this to discredit him.

"I… I just defended Sieun." His voice, already tired from shouting, was a plea for Mrs. Yeon to listen to him.

But she was suspicious of him. The way she pulled Sieun closer, as if Suho were a threat about to hurt him, made that clear.

"Son, let's go back inside. I don't want you around those kinds of people," She accused, holding Sieun's hand.

But Sieun broke free. He began shaking his head, trying to explain the situation with signs. Signs his mother didn't understand. Suho couldn't understand. They were his family, but they hadn't even made the effort to learn his language? Worse, they'd forbidden him from using it, deprived him of a basic human right.

"Seongje warned you today that this Suho guy was following him. He's manipulating Sieun, trying to turn him against us. And just now he tried to do the same to you. Don't believe him, love." Jinwon's speech was full of venom.

Suho tried to break free again, but his strength was running out.

“No! Please…” He begged, even though his voice was cracking. “Just let me talk to him, and then I’ll leave!”

Mrs. Yeon now looked torn. Suho didn't care if they expelled him; he just needed to talk to Sieun, needed to make sure he was safe.

Sieun touched his mother. He began to sign, knowing that this sign she would understand.

“Please. Please, Mom.”

Jinwon must have known he was about to lose, the way his face was getting redder by the second. Mrs. Yeon sighed deeply, and she reached up to Sieun's head, smoothing his hair.

"Okay. You can talk for a few minutes. But I don't want that boy showing up here again."

"Thank you! Thank you." Sieun smiled, running to Suho.

Jinwon wanted to argue again, but it was safer to agree if he didn't want Mrs. Yeon to believe Suho's words. He sighed, motioning defeatedly for the guards to release him. They reluctantly complied.

His arms were finally free. The pain was unbearable, racking every muscle. But all that mattered to Suho was the boy in front of him. Sieun jumped into his arms, and they hugged tightly. He didn't care if others were watching; it was a relief to feel Sieun's every breath.

Suho pulled away slightly to have a perfect view of his eyes.

“Let's go outside, talk in a more private place.”

Sieun nodded. Suho held his hand, leading him away from the cursed mansion.

And then, as the air from outside filled their lungs, they could finally breathe.

The night breeze carried the loose leaves. Suho hadn't noticed before, but the mansion seemed lonely. It stood apart from the other houses scattered throughout the neighborhood. It was surely a deliberate choice made by Jinwon.

Suho was still trembling, but his pain was insignificant compared to Sieun's. He stared straight at the boy, the wind ruffling the unruly strands of his hair. He was always majestic, while Suho was a mess.

His clothes were soiled with dirt, the leaves scattered over his body, and the mud stuck to his shoes. Not to mention the sweat and blood staining his skin. Even so, Sieun's eyes shone, as if he were the most beautiful thing he'd ever seen.

“I…” Suho began, not even sure what he was going to say.

“Silence,” Sieun ordered, not giving him time to think.

And like the idiot he was, Suho obeyed. Because no matter how hard he tried to come out on top, he would always give in when it came to Sieun.

"I'm sorry." Suho's eyes widened. Of all things, he hadn't expected Sieun to apologize. " Yesterday, I was a jerk. I wasn’t sincere."

His heart warmed. For some reason, something as trivial as an apology was enough to reassure Suho that Sieun cared as much as he did.

"Okay, I… I was a little impatient too," he admitted, remembering the stress of the previous day.

"I want to be honest now," Sieun replied, his eyes determined. "I don't want to lie to you anymore."

“And there is nothing I want more in this world.”

It was true. For the first time, Suho forgot about the competition, the band, everything. He just wanted to listen to Sieun, hold his face, and wipe away his tears. He wanted him to feel comfortable being vulnerable. To understand that allowing himself to be protected would never make him weak.

Sieun sighed deeply. It was hard to be honest after hiding things for so long.

“About Seongje… We had a… Thing.”

Seongje annoyed the hell out of him, but Suho held back a laugh at Sieun's choice of words. Thing.

“We kissed, we went out for a while, but… We broke up.”

It was still annoying, but it was also a relief to know that their affair was a thing of the past. But one thing still worried him about the whole thing with Seongje.

“The moment I arrived… Was he, like, pushing it?”

Sieun shook his head.

"No, he just wanted to screw you over. He's a jerk, but I wasn't nice to him either," he admitted, lowering his head.

It made sense. Even though he still hated Seongje, he understood that Sieun made mistakes, just like Suho himself. After all, it was impossible to be right all the time, and understanding this sooner would prevent them from putting each other on a pedestal.

"I understand. I've been with people before. There's nothing wrong with that." Suho commented, seeing Sieun's eyes widen.

“Who?” He asked, desperate.

Suho held back a laugh. He thought he was jealous, but Sieun seemed even worse than him.

"A girl, but nothing came of it. Then there was a boy who looked just like you, by the way." He teased, watching Sieun cross his arms. "But if you want to know, no one messed with me like you did."

Sieun's face flushed. He gave a shy, satisfied smile. He pushed Suho lightly, as if the only way he knew how to deal with good feelings was through violence. Which was ironic.

“Well… Besides, there’s something else I want to tell you.”

“Go ahead.”

Sieun avoided his gaze, and Suho understood that the conversation would become more serious.

“Do you know Hyoman?”

Suho nodded. It was impossible to forget that bastard. His disgusting smile that never left his face, and his passion for tormenting Juntae.

“On the first day of school, he sexually harassed me. I hit him, and that's why he doesn't like me.”

“What?”

Suho couldn't contain his shock. Suddenly, everything made too much sense. And Sieun didn't need to tell him anything else for him to understand what he and Juntae had been trying so hard to hide from the others.

He clenched his fists, a sudden urge to get someone else's blood on his hands.

"That bastard. I'm sorry this happened, Sieun." He leaned closer, unsure whether to keep his distance or not. "If you want, I can finish him off for you."

Sieun laughed ironically.

"Finish off Hyoman? Only if I participate." He smiled, as excited as Suho about such a possibility.

Maybe it wasn't healthy, the way they both got excited at the thought of violence. But at least they had that in common.

“Well, there's one last thing I have to tell you.”

Suho looked at him closely. Seeing the way Sieun's good mood had vanished, he knew exactly who the subject was.

“You can tell me anything. I'll just listen, I promise.”

Sieun took a deep breath.

“My parents divorced a few years ago. They were always fighting, and I was usually the reason.”

Suho remembered how frightened he'd been the first time he'd seen his parents argue. It was terrifying to imagine that something like that was Sieun's everyday routine. He was just a child, probably blaming himself for his parents' problems.

“Neither of them wanted to learn sign language.” It was clear how much it still hurt him. “So my mother hired a teacher to teach me.”

It was unbelievable. How could his parents not make an effort to understand their son's language? The more he thought about it, the less sense it made. Suho wanted to punch something again.

“That teacher's name was Cheong-ah. I always loved painting, but she was the one who taught me to love music. The painting you saw that day, someone playing the guitar… That was her.”

And then Suho remembered. It was no wonder the painting seemed so vivid, since it was someone Sieun admired. It reassured him, knowing that Sieun wasn't completely alone during his childhood.

"And what happened to her?" he asked, knowing things had ended tragically.

"Well, when Mom married Jinwon, he fired her. He said I already knew enough of that damn language."

Suho's anger only grew. That man had taken away from Sieun all the people who could help him, and then tried to make him incapable of communicating. As if he didn't have the right to express his feelings like any other human being.

"It should be obvious by now. But Jinwon isn't a good father to Beomseok. He's only been so angry with you because he was worried about me. The problem is Jinwon, Beomseok just… projected some of that anger onto you."

Suho needed a moment to process everything Sieun was telling him. He didn't know if the whole story with Beomseok was relieving or making him more anxious. On one hand, it was good to know that he wasn't the one his friend hated, and that their relationship still had a chance to be fixed. But on the other hand, it was kind of scary that Beomseok was projecting his negative feelings onto him.

He didn’t know how to deal with it.

“So… You’re saying that Beomseok and I can still be friends, right?”

Sieun nodded.

“I think you two should talk.”

And Suho felt the same way. Even though he'd made new friends, he missed Beomseok. He didn't want to lose their friendship, and now he could explain to Beomseok that it was never his intention to hurt Sieun.

"Sieun, I'm really worried about you," he admitted, still thinking about the scene from earlier. "I don't want you going back to that house. Neither Beomseok. That Jinwon is scary."

"It'll be okay. Mom will be there." Even though he tried to reassure him, Suho could see that he was just as scared as he was.

"If you want, I'll take you to my house right now," he offered, but he knew it was crazy.

In the end, Jinwon was a powerful politician who would have brought Sieun home without any problems. And he was also afraid of leaving Beomseok alone at a time like this.

"Suho. I know you're worried, but I ask you not to do anything. Please, Jinwon has threatened you before." His eyes were watering, and Suho's heart sank.

Threatened me? To make matters worse, that man was using him to control his children. Suho hated the thought that everything had gone wrong because of him. He shouldn't have broken into Sieun's room that day, but if he hadn't, he would never have met someone as incredible as Sieun.

And living without knowing him felt like a waste.

"I'm sorry. I ruined your life." The tears kept falling. "Seongje was right. I can't give you anything. I'm an orphan, I have no money, and every time I try to help you, I just make things worse."

It was unfair. Suho didn't choose to be born this way, but life chose for him. He wasn't even sure if the band would work out, or if it would just drag Sieun and the other boys down the drain. Everyone was risking their lives for his dream, and what were they getting in return?

Suho couldn't control his tears. Sieun was the one who should be crying.

Sieun cupped his cheeks, just as he had before. Those same warm, comforting, and dangerous hands. Even with his blurred vision, Sieun was still stunning. Those eyes, as deep as the ocean, told him everything without words.

And then Sieun moved closer. He stood on tiptoe and pressed his lips against Suho's. It wasn't desperate. It was chaste, gentle, and insecure. Just like them. Sieun pulled away, his eyes as wet as Suho's.

"Don't ever say that again," he ordered. "You saved my life, Suho. Before you showed up, I thought I was going to die."

And now they were both crying. Like two children who had to grow up too fast. The pain, the confusion, and everything they couldn't handle. It was like an avalanche of emotions, attacking them without hesitation.

“You know what? My dream isn't to have a lot of money or to have an incredible house. It's not even to be a successful painter.”

This took Suho by surprise. He thought that just as his dream was to be a famous musician, Sieun would want something similar.

“No. My dream is to have a family. To be surrounded by people who love me. And you made that come true.”

Suddenly, he understood. Sieun wasn't in his club just because he loved music. He wanted a place to belong, where he could have real friends who would never judge him. Friends who cared about him.

“Sieun. You also made my dream come true.”

Because it didn't matter whether the band would succeed or not. Suho not only found a group of friends, but he also found a life partner. Someone who helped him not feel lonely, who carried the weight of his responsibilities alongside him.

Maybe deep down, this was his true dream: to have someone to support him, someone he could trust and who would allow him to rest and find peace, after so long carrying the weight of the world alone.

It was a relief. Suho could finally rest. Breathe freely, sleep peacefully.

Live. He could simply live.

Suho brought his hands to Sieun's waist. He pulled him closer, leaning down until his lips touched his again.

This time, it wasn't chaste. The kiss was deep, desperate, and heated. As if they pulled away, they'd lose all the air they could breathe. Sieun lifted his arms, wrapping them around his neck. Suho tightened his grip on his waist.

There was no gentleness in their touch. But all Suho could focus on was the soft lips that met his, making room for his tongue. He'd kissed before, but never this way, almost clumsily. Sieun knew how to melt his entire posture.

“What the fuck are you guys doing?”

They separated immediately, turning to the intruder who prevented Suho from getting a taste of paradise anymore.

Holy shit. Beomseok.

His friend?—crossed his arms, watching from the sidelines as Suho devoured his brother. Beomseok was furious, and while he wanted to talk to him, now didn't seem like the best time.

“We… Well, I…”

Suho wasn't sure which answer would make Beomseok less angry.

"Sieun, go inside," Beomseok ordered. "Seriously, they're suspicious of the delay."

Sieun gave Suho one last look. He waved goodbye, reluctantly entering the house. They had barely parted, and Suho's heart ached as if they had already been away for weeks.

“Beomseok, I—”

"You still don't get it, do you?" He interrupted, approaching Suho. "You're making everything worse, Suho. If you want Sieun to be safe, you have to give up now."

That same insecurity hammered in his head, fueled by everyone around him. But what they thought didn't matter; Sieun told him he'd saved his life. And Suho would believe him, even if his stupid brain disagreed.

"No," he replied, seeing Beomseok's surprised expression. "I won't give up. Sieun told me everything, Beomseok. I can help you."

He hoped that somehow this would change Beomseok's mind. If he understood that Suho cared about him too, maybe they could rekindle their friendship. But Beomseok's eyes darkened.

“Help us? Do you think you can help me?”

Suddenly, the person in front of him no longer seemed like his usual friend. His posture was intimidating, a biting coldness in every word. Completely different from the gentle Beomseok who cowered in shyness.

"When I was bleeding from being beaten so badly, you weren't there to help me," He accused, pushing him back. "When it became clear something was wrong with me, you just ignored it. But now that Sieun is involved, you want to help us both?"

Suho could hear every beat of his heart. He didn't know what to say. How long had it been? How long had Beomseok been begging for his help, and he hadn't seen it? Maybe he had. Maybe he had just ignored it, just as Beomseok had accused him of doing.

"It's not fair!" He yelled because he was tired of feeling guilty. "You never told me anything, I'm not psychic, fuck! How was I supposed to know?"

He grabbed Beomseok's collar, that anger from earlier still bubbling in his every thought.

Anger at Jinwon for mistreating his children, at Mrs. Yeon for ignoring, at Seongje for his selfishness, and at Sieun for not telling the truth.

At Beomseok for blaming him.

"Of course you didn't notice," he replied, not letting himself be intimidated. "Your life is so fucking easy, Ahn Suho. You don't even have any real problems, and you still decided to cause more for us!"

“Don't talk about what you don't know, Fuck!” His grip tightened.

Suho may not have gone through what Beomseok did—he certainly had a good family. But he still faced hardships, many of them financial, which someone like Beomseok would never understand.

“I have problems too. I have to work to support my family alone. You don't have to do that.”

It was nonsense. A pointless argument, where neither of them would emerge victorious. Because maybe they would never truly understand each other. Maybe it was their fate, unable to maintain a friendship, shattered by both their traumas. Traumas they couldn't heal, no matter how hard they tried.

"That's why you're chasing Sieun, right?" Beomseok teased, venom dripping from his mouth. "The money. You just want our money."

Suho raised his fist. He wanted to punch Beomseok in the face, force him to understand that he couldn't just say whatever he wanted. But he still thought of Sieun, who loved his brother. Who would never forgive Suho for hurting him.

"Go on, hit me. It's all you guys know how to do." He brought his face closer, daring Suho to cross the line.

But Suho wouldn't fall for his bullshit. He knew what Beomseok wanted. An excuse, a reason to hate him without guilt, to see him as a bad person.

Suho released him, leaving him to stumble backward.

"You didn't mean any of that, Beomseok. I know you didn't," he said, watching Beomseok's shaky, ragged breathing. "Then I'll forgive you. But if you say something like that again, not even thinking about Sieun will stop me from teaching you a lesson. Got it?"

Beomseok smiled, a bitter smile, full of anger.

“You think you're the boss of me, don't you? You think you're better than me?”

His eyes were unfocused, as if deep down, it wasn't Suho he wanted to say those words to.

“Beomseok.” Suho stepped closer, a final warning. “Don’t cross the line.”

And then he left, climbing onto his motorcycle. He didn't stay to listen to Beomseok's screams or frustration. He felt angry, not just because his friend was uttering such absurdities. But because he understood him, so much so that he couldn't hate him.

School is going to suck.

"School trip? Seriously, that's terrible!" Gotak complained.

When Suho returned to school, he expected a lot. But receiving the news that they would be going on a school trip and spending a few days camping certainly took him by surprise.

"Terrible? It's perfect," Baku retorted. "We can completely focus on our music; our parents won't be able to disturb us."

He had a point. Suho was kind of relieved to know that Sieun would be away from home for a few days, away from Oh Jinwon. And they could spend some time alone, just the two of them. Without anyone to disturb them.

Suho blushed at the thought. He stared at Sieun, who was giving him a provocative look. Damn, he knows what I'm thinking.

“Are you kidding? I can concentrate on music at home; the idea of being stuck on a campsite with a bunch of idiots is terrifying.”

On second thought, Gotak was right. Suho didn't even want to think about what he would do if he had to put up with Hyoman any longer. As if seeing him at school every day wasn't torture enough.

"Sieun, what do you think?" Suho asked, wanting his opinion.

Sieun shrugged.

“Being away from home is always good for me.”

"Well, then it's decided," Suho stated. "Let's use these days to focus on music. Let's go, Weak Heroes!"

Everyone stared at him in shock.

"What did you call us?" Gotak asked.

Oh yeah. So much had happened that Suho completely forgot to mention that he had chosen a band name.

“Well, I've been thinking, and I think that's the perfect name for our band.”

No one seemed very convinced.

"Perfect? Are you calling us weak?" Gotak was already preparing to pick a fight.

Suho rolled his eyes. It was better to be honest.

"No. I talked to Yeongi, and I noticed we have something in common," he said, seeing his friends' interest grow. "We're always trying to be each other's heroes. And we fight, even when we're not strong enough to do so."

He looked down, expecting the boys to tease him. But when he looked up, his friends seemed almost moved.

“I… liked it,” Gotak admitted.

"Me too," Juntae chimed in. "It has a very beautiful meaning, Suho."

“You know, I think it’s awesome, man!” Baku shouted excitedly.

Suho looked at Sieun, waiting for his approval like a puppy wagging its tail.

“It’s perfect,” he signed, a proud smile on his lips.

Suho ran to him and hugged him, lifting him and spinning him around the club.

“Thank you! I only got this idea thanks to you.”

Sieun slapped him on the arm a few times, embarrassedly asking him to put him down. Suho complied, grinning from ear to ear. Only then did he look at the other boys, each with a more shocked expression than the last.

“What was that?” Baku asked, interested.

“N-nothing, we-”

“Kiss.” Sieun signed before Suho had a chance to respond.

“What!?” The three shouted in disbelief.

Suho definitely hadn't expected Sieun to tell the truth so easily. He hadn't planned any speeches, and now he wasn't sure how to explain the situation. Well, they weren't dating yet or anything.

“Are you two together?” Gotak asked, his eyes shining with curiosity.

“Well, I… We, I mean…”

Saved by the bell, Juntae interrupted the conversation.

“Guys, I don't want to spoil the mood, but... As the school president, I was given some extra information about the trip.”

Everyone lost their smiles. Suho straightened his posture, already bracing himself for the next bomb the universe would throw at him.

“We won't be the only school at this camp.”

Shit. He swallowed hard, already anticipating the rest of the conversation.

“What other schools will be there?”

Juntae took a deep breath, knowing they would hate the answer.

“Ganghak and Byeoksan.”

His heart almost jumped out.

Not only would he have to deal with Seongje and Baekjin, his adversaries, but he would also have to face an angry Beomseok and a revenge-seeking Yeongbin.

I'd better get ready.

Chapter Text

His clothes clung to his skin, and sweat dripped down his neck. The intense sunlight was nearly blinding. Suho couldn't stand the heat, especially if he were forced to travel with a bunch of other sweat-stinking teenage boys in the same enclosed space.

"Gotak, you were right," he admitted, fanning himself.

"I told you, man," Gotak replied. He was miserable, as if his natural hatred was heightened by the sun.

They both sighed, apparently neither of them could stand the dry weather.

"Come on! Camping can be super fun!" Baku tried to cheer them up.

The thing was, though, he was also dissatisfied. But not because of the sun. Baku's problem had a first and last name: Na Baekjin. And now his friend had no escape. They would meet, whether they liked it or not.

Baku tried to control his breathing, maintaining his forced smile.

"It'll be okay, man." Suho touched his shoulder. "I bet there'll be so many people there that we won't even find Baekjin."

"What? Like I was thinking about him." Baku scoffed, rubbing the back of his head.

Suho didn't answer. It was obvious that Baekjin was all he could think about. Baku was the type who loved to sleep, but dark circles had darkened his eyes since the news of the trip and Juntae's warning.

Gotak gave his friend an unimpressed look.

“Seriously, when are you going to get over this jerk?”

Baku and Gotak stared at each other. They had very different opinions about Baekjin. Even though they were best friends, their relationship turned into a tug-of-war when Baekjin was the subject. Suho understood both sides, although they didn't seem willing to reach a compromise.

"Suho," Baku called, ignoring Gotak. "Want to sit next to me on the bus?"

Gotak glared at him, as if going alongside someone else was a personal offense to their friendship. Suho didn't want to get between them.

“Well, I—”

"I don't want to sit next to a guy who gets irritated by everything," Baku teased, crossing his arms.

"Oh really? I didn't even want to go with you!" Gotak replied, clearly lying. "I'm dating now, I'm going with Juntae."

Gotak smiled proudly. The two were pecking at each other like two children. It was common to see them teasing each other and even arguing from time to time, but now that it was the Baekjin topic, it sounded more serious than usual.

Suho stepped between the two because he had something to say, too.

"Hold on. Gotak can't go with Juntae if I go with Baku," he protested, thinking about his own plans.

“Why not?”

"Because then Sieun will be alone. Thanks for trying to separate us, by the way," he complained, and now the three of them were looking at each other, annoyed.

Seriously, why did he have to deal with their problems? It wasn't his fault that Baku and Gotak were fighting; he still wanted to sit next to Sieun on the bus and have a peaceful ride.

"Damn, were you two born stuck together?" Baku complained, earning a murderous glare from Suho. "What? It's not enough that Gotak is always on Juntae's case, and now you're going to become Sieun's shadow?"

It was the first time Baku had sounded angry. But Suho was angry too, and the unbearable, skin-searing heat wasn't helping.

"You're just jealous because you don't have a boyfriend," Suho replied, pointing his finger like a 5-year-old.

"And who are you to talk about us?" Gotak added. "You're the one who can't forget Baekjin's ass!"

“Gotak!” Baku and Suho shouted in despair.

Holy shit. The other students, who were chatting around him, fell silent, interested in listening to the conversation.

"Did I lie?" he teased, not at all affected. Baku looked ready to explode.

“Shut the fuck up!”

Baku went after Gotak, but Suho got between the two before any physical violence could occur.

"Hey, no fighting," he ordered, even though none of them were in the mood to obey him. "The heat is stressing us out, that's all."

Baku snorted, unconvinced. He stuck his tongue out at Gotak, then looked away. It was funny, even their arguments were childish, like watching two brats who couldn't accept losing.

"Everyone!" Juntae called. "It's time to get on the bus."

He held a list in his hands. As the school president, it was his duty to check the attendance of all the students.

"Our bus is number three," he warned. "We'll be divided by class, so we'll spend more time with one class from Ganghak and one from Byeoksan."

Baku gave Suho a murderous look, as if he were to blame for such an absurd decision.

"Come on. We wouldn't be so unlucky as to get Baekjin's class." He tried to calm him down, but deep down, Suho knew that yes, they would be unlucky.

Sieun appeared, walking toward them. Suho sighed in relief. At least he'd have company that would make it all worthwhile. He stood beside him, already preparing to flee Baku and Gotak and sit next to Sieun.

"Shall we sit together, Juntae?" Gotak proposed to his boyfriend.

However, Juntae gave him a guilty look.

"Sorry, Tak, Sieun, and I decided to sit together." He said, touching Sieun's shoulder, who nodded.

"What?" Suho didn't even try to hide his indignation. "You're not going with me?"

“Sorry. I want to talk to Juntae.”

Despite the apology, Sieun didn't look the least bit guilty. He shrugged, giving Suho a weary look, as if he were freaking out over nothing. That guy knew how to get under his skin.

"So why don't you date Juntae?" Suho asked, letting his childishness get the better of him.

Baku complained about him, but Juntae was the one who was always glued to his boyfriend. The two were together at every opportunity, leaving a jealous Suho behind. Sieun just smiled, as if his reaction was funny.

“Maybe I'll date.” Was his mocking answer.

“You brat!”

Sieun didn't even listen. He grabbed Juntae's hand, leading him to the bus, and boarded with him. Damn Juntae.

Juntae laughed in amusement, even giving Suho a teasing wave, making it clear that Sieun would belong to him on this trip.

Gotak wasn't even fit to take care of his boyfriend. He just watched the scene, like the obedient idiot he was. Well, not that Suho was much different.

"Gotak, he just said he might date Juntae!" Suho warned, knowing his friend didn't understand sign language as well as he did.

But Gotak wasn't angry. In fact, he blushed. His face turned red, he looked away, and he even forced a cough in an attempt to ignore the conversation. Suho's blood boiled, and his eyes doubled in size.

"You son of a bitch!" Suho practically jumped on Gotak, grabbing his collar. "Stop having inappropriate thoughts about my boyfriend!"

That bastard. Of course, he wasn't mad at the idea; the pervert must have been having all sorts of fantasies about Juntae and Sieun together.

“I'm not, man! I swear!” Gotak defended himself, trying to pull Suho off of him.

Baku just laughed, enjoying the scene.

"Man, I'd love to see more of this, but we have to get on the bus," he reminded them.

Suho let go of Gotak, upset at the interruption. They couldn't waste any more time; they had to get on the bus quickly or they would miss the trip. Suho sighed deeply, standing next to Baku.

"You know what? I'm going to sit with Baku," he said, making Baku smile victoriously.

They got on the bus, followed by an upset Gotak.

As if the situation weren't bad enough, Sieun and Juntae were sitting in the front seats. But the only available seats left were in the back, far away from Sieun.

Suho's day had already started badly. But it got even worse when he noticed the empty seats. One bench next to Hyoman, and two in front of him. Suho and Gotak stared at each other, sharing the same thought.

"You know what? I'd better sit next to Hyoman," Baku offered, panicked.

"No," Gotak denied, his eyes blazing. "Let me sit next to him."

But Juntae touched his boyfriend's hand, catching his attention. His gaze was apprehensive, probably afraid of what stupid thing Gotak would do if he actually sat with that jerk.

"Tak, don't do anything stupid," he ordered, his voice firm as stone.

Gotak sighed, knowing he would never do anything Juntae didn't want.

“Okay, I won't.” He agreed, gently stroking Juntae's hair.

Juntae smiled, satisfied. Suho rarely saw those two fight. Although Gotak could be an immature teenager at times, he was always patient and mature with Juntae. It was good to see that Gotak was allowing himself to be childish like the rest of them, but remaining responsible with his boyfriend.

The same was true for Juntae, who was teasing his friends much more freely. In a way, their relationship only benefited them. They were mature, but they allowed each other a safe place to act like the children they never were.

“You, too, behave yourself,” Sieun ordered, but he had an amused smile.

Unlike Juntae, who preferred peace, Sieun loved it when Suho misbehaved. That boy must have been desperate to start a fight with Hyoman, too.

"As you wish, princess," he teased, earning a light slap on his arm from Sieun.

The trio finally made their way to the back of the bus and sat down on the benches. Hyoman stared at them, as dissatisfied as they were with their seating arrangement.

"Are you kidding? I'm going to sit with Baku's lackey?" He teased, but Gotak wasn't the least bit affected.

"You'd better keep quiet if you want a peaceful trip," Gotak threatened. There was no hint of humor in his tone.

Hyoman looked away, turning to the window. Coward. That son of a bitch was only brave when he had his friends to defend him; alone, he wouldn't even dare face any of them.

Suho sighed deeply. He should use the travel time to do something useful. He opened his backpack and took out his notebook. He had made progress on the song's lyrics, though there was still room for improvement. But at least it was divine compared to his initial idea.

"How's the lyrics coming along, man?" Baku asked, peeking over.

“I think I'm making good progress. What about you?”

"Look, I'm biased, but I think the song is turning out awesome," he admitted, his eyes shining. "You just need to finish the lyrics so we can get the rhythm right."

Suho smiled, but inside he felt more nervous. He had to finish the lyrics quickly so they could finally finish the song, not to mention they needed time to practice.

He would finish writing the song at camp, and neither Seongje, nor Beomseok, nor anyone else would stop him.

Suho opened his eyes with a start. He noticed the bus had stopped, parked in a forest. He looked down, noticing his notebook lying on the ground. Shit.

"Fuck, did I sleep?" he asked Baku, who was looking out the window as if he could already see his death.

“Yeah. How lucky you are.” He complained, his eyes so wide they looked like they wanted to pop out.

Before he could console his friend, Juntae walked to the middle of the bus. He pulled out his student list again.

"All right, let's wake up," he ordered. "Everyone, as soon as I call your names, you can get off the bus."

Suho was relieved that his name was so close to Sieun's on the roll call. It didn't take long for Juntae to finish checking. Suho practically jumped on the bus when it was his turn, wanting to escape that furnace.

The sun was still scorching, but at least they could breathe fresh air. He wasn't sure where the campsite was, as it all looked like scrubland. He'd never camped before, but Suho was comfortable with nature, so he didn't worry much until he got there.

"Okay, Ganghak and Byeoksan's students are on their way here," Juntae announced, barely hiding his worried look at Gotak and Baku.

Baku's eyes roamed the entire room, searching for someone in particular. Suho wanted to talk, but he wasn't sure how to start the conversation. Besides, he needed to be by Sieun's side in case Seongje showed up.

Speaking of the devil, the Ganghak students filed out of their bus. Baku was shaking like jelly, clearly nervous. Even Gotak let go of his anger, giving his friend a few comforting pats on the shoulder.

"I'm fine, don't worry," Baku repeated for the sixth time that day.

It was irritating how often he repeated words that were lies. Baku wasn't doing well at all; he needed a good night's sleep. And he wouldn't get that if he had to sleep next to Baekjin.

This gave Suho another worry.

"Juntae," he called. "How will the division be at bedtime?"

If the universe makes me sleep next to Beomseok and Seongje, then it really has an evil plan against me.

"Honestly, Suho… I know as much as you do," Juntae said, which didn't calm him down at all.

Seongje and Baekjin got closer, but not enough to cause a stir. Seongje had an almost lost look in his eyes, as if unsure of what to do after his last argument with Suho. If the guy would just avoid him, that would be one less problem.

Baekjin, on the other hand, made it clear he was staring at them. However, his gaze didn't even pass Suho. No, he was completely focused on Baku, barely blinking. Baku stared straight ahead, pretending not to notice the obvious stare.

“What an obsessed guy. “ Gotak scoffed.

"Gotak, don't start," Baku scolded, his gaze firm.

Gotak snorted, crossing his arms.

“Oh, sorry. I forgot that for you, the jerk didn't do anything wrong.”

This was terrible. His friends had been arguing since that morning, relentlessly. None of them would focus on the song they had to finish, not while Baekjin was around.

"Damn it, you don't change the tune!" Baku accused. Suho had never seen him yell at Gotak so directly.

"It's hard to change the tune when your friend likes the guy who screwed you over." His eyes burned with anger.

Suho swallowed hard. He should do something before the fight gets any worse. But then Baku opened his mouth again.

“Fuck! I already told you I hate Baekjin as much as you do!”

It was precisely the moment when the students fell silent. Baekjin's eyes widened, his gaze still fixed on Baku. And this time, Baku looked directly at him. The tension was almost palpable and could have been cut with a razor.

“What? What's wrong?” Baku asked. “Are you surprised I hate you?”

His voice was shaky, sounding nothing like himself. Even Gotak dropped his defensive posture, worried for his friend. Baku was always smiling, so seeing him trembling with anger was frightening.

But Baekjin was unfazed. He gave a wry smile, sneaking up on Baku. The guy even moved like a snake.

"Hey, Baku. The only thing you hate about me is that you can't forget me." He teased, purposefully patting Baku on the shoulder before walking away.

Seongje whistled, his maniacal smile returning. He walked over to Baku, looking overjoyed to have someone to tease.

"You two better settle this lovers' quarrel soon," he ordered, amused. "I can't stand hearing him say he misses you anymore."

"Seongje. Fuck you." Baku replied, not at all intimidated. Seongje just laughed.

“Nah. Someone took that fun away from me.”

His gaze landed directly on Suho. It was menacing; Seongje must have been seething with anger at him. Anyway, only one of them was dating Sieun, and it wasn't Seongje.

"I guess you'll have to have fun some other way," Suho replied, smiling carelessly.

Seongje put his hands in his pockets, walking arrogantly towards him.

"Hey Suho. I'd keep an eye on your fun if I were you," he warned, pleased to see the irritation on Suho's face.

What did he mean by that?

The atmosphere between Baku and Gotak was still tense. But now, Suho had to find Sieun. How had he disappeared so quickly? And where had he gone? Unfortunately, he had a hunch.

Suho walked over to the Byeoksan students. Half of the students cowered in fear, and the other half gave him murderous looks. Some looked awed, but that didn't bring him any satisfaction.

And then he found Sieun in front of Beomseok. But there was a problem: Beomseok wasn't alone. No, right next to him were Yeongbin and those idiotic henchmen who followed him everywhere. Suho swallowed hard.

What? Why was Beomseok standing next to the guys who were bullying him? Maybe they were threatening him? Thinking about it, ever since Suho was expelled, there was no one to protect him.

He prepared to defend him, but then Yeongbin put his arm around Beomseok's shoulders, who didn't even flinch at the touch. But the gesture wasn't hostile; it even seemed... friendly? What the hell?

"Hey, Beomseok, who's the jerk?" Yeongbin asked, pointing at Sieun.

His gaze was interested. Interested in a way Suho knew all too well. The look he got when he found a new target. Shit .

But Beomseok didn't answer him directly. His gaze was as anxious as Suho's. He began using sign language.

“Sieun, don't follow me during this camping trip. I'm serious.” He ordered.

He knew what Yeongbin was capable of, and he wanted to keep Sieun away from him. But then, why was he by his side? Why were they friends now? It didn't make sense; Beomseok was too kind to be friends with people like that.

"Why? Did you make new friends?" he asked, looking happy for his brother. Suddenly, Suho didn't want Sieun to know what kind of friends those were.

"What the hell?" Yeongbin's smile grew even wider. "Is he deaf?"

Beomseok's gaze was pure despair.

“Seriously, Sieun, go away.” He ordered, but Sieun was too stubborn to obey.

Suho had to intervene. He walked over to the group, standing next to Sieun. He placed his hand on his shoulder, getting his attention.

“Sieun, Juntae is looking for you.” He lied. “Go there, before he freaks out.”

He knew it was a low blow, but Sieun always rushed when it came to Juntae. He nodded, waving goodbye to Beomseok. Suho took a deep breath. Great, but now he had another problem to deal with.

Yeongbin stared at him. It was obvious he was still angry about their last fight. Suho would be too, if he'd lost as pathetically as he had.

"Well, if it isn't that loser Suho," Yeongbin teased.

"Loser?" Suho laughed wryly. "Only one of us lost the fight. And it wasn't me."

He clenched his fists. He couldn't be around Yeongbin, not after what he'd done. Things were working out now; he couldn't let that spoiled brat mess with his head.

"Yeah, and only one of us got expelled," Yeongbin added. "Looks like you're still hanging out with idiots, huh? Who's the deaf one?"

Suho took a deep breath. He controlled himself. Yeongbin no longer had any power over him. Suho shouldn't listen to him. But God, he just wanted Sieun to have peace. Yeongbin could tease him all he wanted, as long as it was just with him and no one else.

"Yeongbin. Say whatever you want about me, but don't come near Sieun." He threatened, his body trembling.

Yeongbin smiled, as if he'd found gold. Shit. He shouldn't have said anything; he was just giving Yeongbin more reasons to mess with Sieun. In this case, Suho didn't mind crossing the line to protect his boyfriend.

"Yeongbin, I think he's in love." The tall, ugly henchman sneered, approaching Suho.

"Taehoon's right," the other henchman agreed, the short kid with the ugliest haircut Suho had ever seen.

Suho wasn't intimidated. He tried to remain indifferent, refusing to let Yeongbin think he had any power over him.

"Suho, I knew you were an orphan," Yeongbin said the word with enjoyment, knowing the effect it had had on Suho earlier. "But I didn't think you were a faggot, too."

The trio of idiots laughed. Beomseok kept his head down, avoiding their gaze. He didn't laugh along, but he clearly wasn't in the mood to defend his friend either. Friend. Were they even friends?

"Everyone!" Juntae called, always saving Suho before things got too serious. "Everyone, gather around! Let's head up the trail."

Suho's anger was replaced by laziness. Trail? Hadn't they already reached the camp? Gotak was as disheartened as he was, but Baku gave his first genuine smile of the day.

"The trail will take us to the camp. Please proceed in a single file and be careful."

Suho looked around, wondering where the adults supposedly responsible for his safety were.

“Dude, where are the teachers?”

"They said this would be a good activity to practice camaraderie. So they're already waiting for us there," Juntae replied, astonished, as if such an absurd idea were brilliant.

“Holy shit!” Gotak yelled, glaring at the trees as if they were to blame for his suffering.

Juntae laughed at his reaction. He stood in front of everyone, organizing them. Honestly, Juntae was a better leader than Suho ever would be. Even the brutes were obeying him.

“Very well, follow me!”

The students all let out a collective sigh. Now they had to climb a trail under a hot sun alongside the worst people in the world. It couldn't get any worse.

Suho walked beside Sieun. It was too dangerous to leave him alone, especially with the number of sharks surrounding him. Sieun didn't seem to notice his concern; he walked calmly, listening to music on his headphones.

Baku was with them, while Gotak walked ahead with Juntae. He was excited, enjoying the trail with his eyes wide open. Too wide. Watching Baekjin, who took each step with difficulty, as if he were a prince who didn't want to get his shoes dirty.

"Man, Baekjin hates hiking," Baku said with a nostalgic laugh. "He always used to run away from my hikes."

Suho let himself laugh with his friend. It was obvious that despite all the resentment, Baku missed Baekjin deeply. They'd been friends for many years; there was no way to forget a relationship like that overnight.

“I noticed.” Suho joked, receiving a light push from Baku.

But then Suho heard that annoying, all too familiar laughter.

"Holy shit, he walks like a faggot." Yeongbin scoffed, pointing at Baekjin.

The trio of idiots laughed loudly and outrageously. Baku stopped walking abruptly. He turned back, glaring at Yeongbin and his pathetic followers. They didn't know what a mistake they'd made. Suho chuckled internally.

"Repeat what you said, you son of a bitch," Baku ordered, sounding like another version of himself.

There wasn't that typical goofy smile on his face. No, Baku was grimacing, his jaw set, his brows furrowed. His body was like a wall, blocking the idiots' path.

Suho could see sweat dripping down Yeongbin's forehead. That coward.

“I told you he walks like a faggot,” he repeated, failing to hide his fear.

Baku grabbed him by the collar and slammed Yeongbin to the ground. The students stopped following the trail, curious about the source of the noise. Baku stomped his foot down, nearly crushing Yeongbin's fingers. The jerk trembled.

"Listen here, you piece of shit." Baku crouched down, getting close to his face. "If I catch you saying something like that again, I'm going to throw you off the cliff."

Baku wasn't bluffing. His threat was real; he would do something like that without a doubt. Yeongbin must have thought the same, judging by the way he nodded. Suho breathed a sigh of relief, thinking the confusion would be over.

"Wow, I didn't know you cared!" Baekjin shouted, loud enough for everyone to hear.

Baku turned to him. Suho expected to see that same anger, but he knew Baku's expression well. Guilt. He felt guilty. And in that moment, Suho knew that perhaps neither he nor Gotak knew everything that had happened between them.

“Baekjin, I—”

"Don't even start, Baku," Baekjin warned. "Damn, I wish you'd said that back then. But you just kept quiet."

Baku didn't argue. He lowered his head in shame. Baekjin huffed and walked away beside Seongje without even looking back.

You just kept quiet. Suho turned to Beomseok, as if by default. He was afraid their friendship would be destroyed, just like Baku and Baekjin's. But Beomseok looked away, talking to that bunch of jerks.

What should Suho do? How should he fix things?

"Suho," Baku called after him. "When we get to camp, can I tell you something?"

Baku sounded uncertain, almost small. When it came to Baekjin, that big, intimidating guy became a child. Suho nodded, already imagining the topic of their conversation.

"Sure. You can tell me anything, Baku," Suho said, giving him a few friendly pats on the shoulder.

“Thanks, man.”

Sieun touched his arm, getting his attention.

"Why did Baku fight with that guy? I couldn't read their lips." He asked, pointing at Yeongbin.

Suho swallowed hard. He should tell the truth, tell him that Yeongbin was a jerk and that Sieun should stay away from him. But what would he think of Beomseok if he knew? After all, he was friends with the guy now.

So he decided to lie.

"Honestly, I didn't hear them very well. He must have said something stupid," he replied, trying not to get nervous at Sieun's suspicious look.

“Do you know him? Is he Beomseok's friend?”

Shit. Couldn't he just drop the subject? How would Suho even begin to explain that this guy was the reason for his expulsion? He never even thought he'd tell Sieun this story at some point.

"Well, I do. But they weren't friends when I was studying there." He told the truth. "I don't know if they are now."

Beomseok walked alongside the trio, even after what they said about Baekjin. Didn't he care? Maybe he just wanted to fit in.

Suho sighed deeply. They would have to talk, whether Beomseok liked it or not.

"Thank God!" Gotak shouted as soon as they finished the trail.

But Suho didn't even have time to celebrate. The tents weren't even set up, there was no fire, no food. It was already getting dark. Was this a torture technique or something? The teacher, who had been sitting waiting for them, stood up, more comfortable than any of them.

"Congratulations! You've arrived!" She smiled proudly. "Now, I'm going to divide you into groups to complete your tasks. Some will set up the tents, others will gather kindling for those who will build the fire!"

Suho desperately wanted to wipe that smile off her face. Gotak snorted, joining Juntae in setting up the tents. Suho would choose gathering kindling any day. He turned to Sieun, ready to ask for his help, but someone tapped him on the shoulder.

"Hey, Suho." It was Baku. "Let’s get some kindling? So we can talk in private."

Oh no. Suho promised he'd talk to him, and he knew he wouldn't have such a perfect opportunity. But he didn't want to let Sieun out of his sight, especially with Yeongbin circling him like a vulture searching for carrion. It wasn't because Sieun couldn't defend himself; quite the opposite. He would finish Yeongbin off, and the last time Suho did that, it brought him a lot of trouble.

"Sieun," he called, touching his arm. "I'm going to go get some kindling with Baku. Don't leave Gotak and Juntae's side, okay?"

Sieun rolled his eyes, unconcerned.

“Relax, Beomseok is here.”

He couldn't tell Sieun that this was the part that worried him. Not Beomseok, but the people he was hanging out with. But Suho had already complicated the brothers' relationship enough; he didn't want to add fuel to the fire.

"I know, but keep setting up the tents, okay?" he asked, because trying to boss Sieun around was like asking to be disobeyed.

“Obviously. It's much more fun than picking up sticks.”

Of course, the boy with the perfect report card preferred any activity that relied more on brains than brawn.

Luckily, Yeongbin and his idiot friends were out of the way. Lazy as they were, they would let the rest of the students complete their assignments.

Suho began walking alongside Baku, heading deeper into the forest. When they were far enough away from the rest of the students, Baku let out a deep sigh.

"Look... It wasn't just Baekjin who was a jerk," he admitted, his voice fragile. "I did some stupid things when we were friends, too."

Suho nodded. He'd guessed this when he'd seen the way Baku talked about Baekjin. It was obvious he partly blamed himself for how their relationship ended and everything that had happened between them.

"What he did to Gotak is unforgivable, and he can hate him forever. But it was different with me," he said, starting to gather some twigs. "I was the one who messed up, made him distance himself from us."

Suho also picked up some twigs, remaining silent. He waited until Baku calmed down, preparing to say what he so desperately wanted to.

"I vaguely talked about my father before," Suho remembered. According to Baku, his father was a drunk who was always fighting with him. "But I didn't tell you everything. And the way Yeongbin spoke today reminded me of him."

Baku's jaw clenched. Hurt was evident in his eyes, just as anger was evident in his clenched fists. Even though he'd never met Baku's father, Suho already hated him. He hated many adults.

"Well, he's… very homophobic. He always complains about me not being man enough." He paused, composing himself. "So, I was a homophobic brat too."

Suho thought about his grandmother. She'd openly accepted him when he'd come out as bisexual. He hadn't thought much of it, but he was very lucky. He imagined Baku as a child, repressing who he was, and doing the same to others.

"I used to say some stupid things to Baekjin when we were kids, you know? Act like a man, boys don't do that, it's a girl thing. He said the boys at the orphanage picked on him, and I thought if he fought like a man, that wouldn't happen anymore."

Everything Suho had heard about Baekjin before made him see him as a monster. He still understood Gotak's anger, but hearing about a completely different side of him made him understand Baku's guilt and longing as well.

"So I taught him to fight." This was, without a doubt, his biggest regret. "It's my fault he became violent. He was such a sweet boy before that. But I ruined everything."

"No," Suho disagreed, touching his shoulder. "You may have said something stupid, Baku, but Baekjin hurt other people by choice."

Baku didn't look convinced at all.

“But how much choice did he have? If he lived surrounded by people who hurt him? If I hurt him, too?”

And Suho couldn't answer that. Because, after all, did Beomseok have a choice? Could he stay away from Yeongbin when he was alone and unprotected at that school? When was his father responsible for hurting him?

“I don't know.” He answered honestly.

Because maybe, he and Baku had as much choice as Baekjin and Beomseok did.

"It's just... I think I messed up." Baku continued the story. Apparently, he had as many answers as Suho. "One day, I was at my dad's restaurant. Baekjin came to see me unexpectedly, so I didn't even know he was going to show up."

Baku stopped walking abruptly. As if he were being transported to a past that still haunted him.

"He was wearing makeup, my dad saw it, and... You can imagine what he said, right?" He gave a humorless smile. "He talked so much shit, I've never been so embarrassed in my life. To make matters worse, he did it in front of the customers. He practically kicked Baekjin out, saying horrible things to him."

Baku's eyes were teary. He was still affected by that day, those memories, by his guilt.

"And I stood there. I always defended him, but this time I said nothing," he confessed. "Because he was my father. I didn't dare to stand up to him; I let Baekjin be humiliated. I saw him running away and didn't even apologize. After that day, things... changed between us."

Suho wasn't sure how to respond. It was a complicated situation, even for him. But he could see what Baku so desperately wanted to do, but lacked the courage to.

“Baku. I think you should talk to him.”

"But how? This won't fix our relationship." His frustration was evident. He kicked a rock, trying to distract himself.

"Well, maybe it won't." After all, relationships were easily broken, but it took too much work to repair them. "But I think you both want to apologize. And it's better to say you're sorry than to suffocate yourself with guilt."

Baku's gaze softened. He gripped the twigs tightly, bringing them closer to his chest. As if trying to keep them safe.

"I think you're right," he agreed. "Thank you, Suho."

His heart warmed. For the first time that day, Baku smiled genuinely. Suho didn't think his advice was worth much, but his chest swelled with pride at the thought of having helped his friend, even if only a little.

"Well, I think we have enough kindling," Suho said, noticing how full his arms were. "Shall we go back?"

"Go ahead," Baku replied. "I'll go find Baekjin."

Suho hadn't expected him to agree to talk so quickly. This was just proof of how much Baku truly missed his friend.

“All right. Good luck, man.”

Suho returned to camp when it was almost night. The forest was getting dark, and he hoped Baku wouldn't get lost. Someone like Baekjin wouldn't get very far anyway.

Suho put the sticks down, immediately looking for Sieun. Beomseok was setting up a tent alone, clearly left behind by his supposed friends, who had given him all the work.

He walked over to Gotak and Juntae, who were checking off a list of chores like camp counselors.

“Hey.” He called out to them. “Where’s Sieun?”

Juntae gave him a questioning look, as if he should know the answer.

“Well, he just went to look for you.” He replied, anxious for his reaction.

Panic gripped his body. He could hear every beat of his heart, accelerating with every second. No. Please, no.

"Where to? Did he go with someone?" From Juntae's guilty look, the answer was pretty obvious.

“He said he was going with Beomseok's friends.”

His soul nearly flew out of his body. Shit. He'd forgotten Gotak and Juntae were leading the way, and they probably hadn't even heard the commotion between Yeongbin and Baku.

Didn't fucking Yeongbin ever rest? He ran to Beomseok, anger burning in his chest. His brother disappeared with those bastards, and he didn't even notice?

"Beomseok!" he shouted, not caring if all the students were listening. "Where did Sieun go?"

Beomseok jumped in fright, noticing his presence. He began to look around, panic filling him when he couldn't find his brother anywhere.

“Shit!”

"Juntae just said he left with Yeongbin." Beomseok's eyes widened. "You didn't even see your own brother leave?"

"I just got here, damn it!" he replied, pushing his chest angrily. "I just got back from the forest."

Suho laughed in disbelief.

"And you left him here knowing what kind of person Yeongbin is?" He grabbed Beomseok's collar, just like last time. "You're putting Sieun in danger!"

"Am I putting Sieun in danger?" he asked, the same anger growing. "It's so fucking ironic to hear that from you!"

Before either of them could say something they regretted, Suho felt a gentle tap on his shoulder. He looked back, finding Juntae and Gotak, whose expressions were confused and worried.

"I'm sorry I let him go," Juntae said. "Gotak and I will wait in case he shows up. You must look for him before it gets any darker."

And then Suho felt like an idiot. He was so focused on fighting with Beomseok that he forgot the most important part. It didn't matter whose fault it was; they just had to find Sieun.

Suho released Beomseok, who softened his gaze. He must have realized the same thing.

"You're right. Let's go to the forest." Suho agreed, leaving the camp and being followed by Beomseok.

It was so dark that it was hard to see. Suho swallowed, imagining Sieun alone with those jerks, completely lost. He started walking faster, hoping it would help him find him.

"Walking faster won't help," Beomseok said. "You have to pay attention to your surroundings."

Suho rolled his eyes. His patience was about to run out.

"Oh, sorry! I didn't know there was a search professional here," he replied sarcastically.

“Yeah, you don't know much.” He teased, crossing his arms.

Suho held himself back from resorting to violence. Sieun was the person who mattered now; he couldn't let himself be distracted by pointless arguments. But he kind of wanted to argue.

"It's funny to hear that from you." He said, already smiling at the childish teasing that would come from his lips. "I don't think you know as much about your brother as you think."

Suho hit the weak spot. He could tell by the way Beomseok's body stiffened. It was a low blow, but he wanted to hit Beomseok where it hurt.

“What are you talking about?”

Suho should have ended the conversation. But damn, he was itching for a fight.

"I'm just saying that you're trying to trap Sieun, but he's very different from you," he replied, staring at a disbelieving Beomseok.

"I'm not trying to trap Sieun, I'm protecting him," he corrected, his posture becoming more tense. "But do you love to meddle in things you don't understand, right?"

Protect him? Suho laughed wryly. Beomseok's eyes darkened. His laughter only made him angrier. It wasn't like Beomseok had done a good job protecting Sieun anyway.

"Protect him? Tell me another one, you didn't even pay attention to him." It was a cruel judgment. Something Suho rarely did.

Beomseok must have been thinking the same thing, by the way his eyes widened.

"I told you not to talk about things you don't fucking know!" Beomseok stepped closer, as if holding back from advancing on him. "You may have just arrived, but I've protected Sieun for years!"

There was real frustration in his voice. Beomseok was yelling, but Suho wasn't in the mood to listen. He was still angry, angry at the things Beomseok had said that day, at the arrogance, at the accusation that Suho was after his money. The kind of shit he was used to hearing.

"Then maybe you didn't do a good job!" Suho accused, and he didn't understand why he was saying things he didn't even believe.

Maybe because he wanted to come out on top, to win another pointless argument. One that didn't really matter, that didn't demonstrate the worth of either of them.

Now, Beomseok looked genuinely upset. And Suho instantly regretted it. He reached for Beomseok's back, intending to deliver one of his trademark friendly slaps. He always did this with Baku and Gotak.

“Beomseok, I—”

"Don't touch my back, fuck!" He yelled, pushing Suho into one of the trees.

The anger, which had momentarily disappeared, returned with a vengeance.

"What's wrong with you? Are you made of glass or something?" And Suho knew it was a stupid thing to say.

For some reason, when it came to Beomseok, it felt like he was always saying the wrong thing. Why? Why couldn't they just understand each other?

“You don't understand, Suho! You don't—”

“You don’t understand!” a third voice shouted, far away from them.

Baku? Suho and Beomseok's curiosity got the better of them. They walked slowly until they found the source of the other argument happening right next to them. It was Baku and Baekjin, both annoyed.

"You don't know what it's like!" Baku continued. "You don't know what it's like to grow up with a violent father. Someone who despises you and makes it clear how much he hates you."

Beomseok's body stiffened. His fingers gripped a log beside them, squeezing tightly.

"And you think you understand me?" Baekjin replied. "You don't know what it's like to grow up without parents, having to take care of yourself and protect yourself from childhood. Because everyone hates you, and no one will help you."

This time, it was Suho who froze. Baekjin's speech was all too familiar, and even though he hadn't grown up in an orphanage, Suho understood what it was like to fend for himself and be looked down upon by others simply for not having parents.

“I know, I know you suffered too,” Baku said, his voice softening. “I’m not asking you to forgive me, just… understand me.”

It was a desperate plea. The longing, the hurt, and the regret—everything could be heard in that simple sentence. Baekjin remained silent, as if unsure of how to respond.

"And will you understand me one day? Even if you don't forgive me?" It was such a sincere question that it sounded childish.

And Baku smiled. His eyes were teary.

"I've always understood you, Baek. Always. And I'm sorry for not making that clear enough. For making you think you weren't loved."

And without even noticing, Suho looked at Beomseok. He was engrossed in the conversation, his body motionless.

Baekjin seemed to be holding back tears. His posture, always so correct and intimidating, now resembled that of an insecure child. Because deep down, that was who Baekjin really was.

"I'm sorry too," Baekjin replied. "For what I did to you and Gotak. I was so angry, I… took it out on you. I could never take it out on the person who truly hurt me."

A silence dominated the conversation. It was comfortable, as if Baku and Baekjin understood each other so well they could guess what the other was thinking. There was still melancholy, anger, and a lot of hurt between them.

But their relationship wasn't lost. It never was.

"I miss you so much," Baku said, wiping away his tears. "Even though I'm angry, I miss you so much."

"Me too. I miss you, and it's annoying as fuck." Baekjin teased, giving a shy smile.

Suho left the place, not wanting to hear any more of their private conversation. Beomseok did the same, walking beside him. They walked away from the scene in an awkward silence that became clear with each footstep.

The forest only grew darker, just like their concern. Maybe that's why they were talking so much nonsense. Like it or not, Beomseok and Suho had something in common: loving Sieun. And Suho shouldn't have dismissed that feeling.

"I'm sorry," Suho cut the silence. "For saying you didn't protect Sieun. It's not true. I know you sacrificed yourself for him many times."

Beomseok sighed, relaxing his posture.

"I'm sorry too," he replied honestly. "For what I said that day. I know you don't want our money; you care about Sieun."

And just like that, the atmosphere became lighter. As if a weight had been lifted from both of their shoulders.

But Suho still had many questions.

“Then why? Why did you say those things?” It still hurt, having heard such nonsense from his friend.

Beomseok suddenly stopped walking. He took off his coat, revealing his shirt. Suho's heart raced.

“What are you—”

Beomseok lifted his shirt, exposing his back to Suho. Oh my God. His eyes widened, shocked by the sight. Beomseok's back was covered in bruises, scattered red and purple marks, wounds that were still healing.

“Oh my God.” Suho's stomach churned.

Why was he still surprised? He knew Oh Jinwon was a cruel man, and yet he expected him not to overstep his bounds. How could he? A father to commit such violence against his own son?

He wanted to vomit. But if Beomseok was strong enough to show him, then Suho would be strong enough to see it. Beomseok lowered his shirt, turning to face Suho.

"I was mad at you," Beomseok confessed, his eyes filling with tears. "Because I thought you had the perfect life. But you don't. And yet, it's like you're better than me at everything."

Suho's eyes were watery. His throat burned, filled with feelings he couldn't articulate. It was suffocating to see his friends in terrible situations, a cycle of violence perpetrated by those who were supposed to protect them.

And Suho wanted to help, God, he really did. But he was also just a kid.

"Beomseok, when I said I'd help you, I meant it!" He said determinedly, wanting his friend's trust. "I don't know how yet, but I'll help!"

Beomseok couldn't hold it in any longer. The tears fell, desperate. Like a cry for help that he couldn't hide any longer.

"I'm sorry, Suho," Beomseok said, his voice cracking. "I was cruel to the only person who was kind to me."

And his heart broke. The anger, the hurt from what Beomseok had said to him, was still there, stuck in his throat. But it didn't hurt as much anymore. Because the person Beomseok was hurting the most was himself.

"I'm sorry too," Suho replied, tears streaming down his face. "I wasn't a good friend. I made you think I didn't care, but I care so much about you, Beomseok."

Beomseok was right about one thing. Suho would never understand him, not completely. Just as he would never be able to understand Suho. Their pains were different, their scars were not the same. But they were equally real and equally painful.

They didn't hug. It would probably take a while for their relationship to return to its former self, for them to be able to live in peace. But Suho was so, so happy he hadn't lost his friend.

Suddenly, Beomseok's eyes widened.

“Sieun?” Suho immediately turned around.

It was indeed Sieun, staring at them with his arms crossed. He was unharmed, without even a scratch.

"Why are the babies crying?" he teased, unconcerned.

Suho was going to kill him.

"Sieun! Where have you been?" He began to touch him, checking to make sure he wasn't hurt.

"We were so worried!" Beomseok added.

Sieun signaled for them to follow. They took a few more steps into the forest until they came face to face with the three idiots, fallen to the ground from being beaten so badly. Suho couldn't help but laugh, pointing at Yeongbin, who had a nasty bruise on his nose.

“Holy shit! You ended them!” He mocked.

"They tried to hit me, but they're pretty bad at fighting," Sieun commented, showing off the twig he probably used as a weapon.

Beomseok, who had been staring at the three of them in silence, also started laughing. He held his stomach, which was aching. The sight was a feast for the eyes.

"What the hell, Beomseok?" Yeongbin complained, struggling to get up.

Beomseok wasn't intimidated. He straightened his posture, much more confident than before.

"You know what? Fuck you. You better leave my brother alone," he replied, receiving applause from an excited Suho.

“That's it, finish them off, man!”

Yeongbin gritted his teeth, almost roaring with anger.

“You fucking traitor! I'll kick your ass at school!”

Suho stepped closer. He grabbed Yeongbin's hair, pulling hard. He was satisfied to see the boy's frightened look, his body trembling with fear. Pathetic.

"If you do anything to Beomseok, I'll send all three of you to the hospital," he threatened, his voice deepening. "Oh, and even if they expel me from the country, I'll find you. Understood?"

His idiotic henchmen quickly nodded, nearly wetting their pants. Yeongbin also reluctantly agreed, realizing that against Suho, he didn't stand a chance.

Suho let go of his hair, letting him fall to the floor.

“It's time for us to go back. I'm going to starve to death, seriously.”

Sieun rolled his eyes, and Beomseok gave a shy smile.

I missed that smile.

When they returned to camp, everyone was already eating marshmallows around the campfire. Suho practically skipped over to Gotak's side, stealing a marshmallow from his twig.

“Hey!” Gotak complained, and Juntae laughed beside him.

Suho gulped it down in one go. He genuinely thought he was going to starve to death. Sieun and Beomseok also sat down beside him.

"Dude, where do we get the marshmallows?" Suho asked, looking around.

Juntae cleared his throat.

"Hyoman!" he shouted, so loud that all eyes turned in his direction.

Hyoman came running in, his legs shaking. The guy was trembling, and Suho found the sight quite amusing.

"Yes, Mr. Juntae?" Hyoman said, his hands behind his back in a perfect soldier's posture.

"Go get more marshmallows, my friends are hungry," Juntae ordered, sounding like a true boss.

“Yes, Mr. Juntae!”

Hyoman ran off, obeying like a puppy with its tail between its legs.

"What did we miss?" Suho asked curiously.

"Man, you have no idea. Tell them, Juntae." Gotak said, holding back his laughter.

Juntae tucked his hair behind his ear, shy of the sudden attention.

“Well... The jerk tried to apologize. Then I kicked him good and told him I'd never forgive him. Now he obeys me like an idiot.”

Suho laughed out loud. The jerk trio of Yeongbin getting beaten by Sieun, and Hyoman getting beaten by Juntae. The night couldn't get any better. Sieun smiled, proud of his friend.

"That's my boy," he signaled, giving Juntae a high-five.

His eyes landed on Baku. He was warming the marshmallows, then handing them to Baekjin. Suho let himself smile. It was good to see that Baku was also regaining his friendship. But then he looked at Gotak, worried.

“Doesn’t that bother you?” he asked. “Baku and Baekjin?”

Gotak glanced at the two.

"I won't say it doesn't bother me," he replied. "But honestly? Baku deserves to be happy, and if Baekjin makes him happy, then so be it." His gaze lingered on Juntae. "Besides, Baku always thinks of me. It's time for him to think of himself."

Even with all the fighting and arguments, it was obvious how much those two loved each other. They would sacrifice their happiness just to see each other happy. Suho was slightly moved.

He got closer to Beomseok. He saw the way Sieun looked at them fondly. Glad that the two most important people in his life were getting along. And Suho would do anything to keep that smile.

Hyoman returned, handing the marshmallows to the three of them, and then running off. It was wonderful to know that Juntae had put that jerk in his place.

Suho began to warm the marshmallows. He stood there for a while, until he noticed the person who kept looking at him and Sieun. It was Seongje who looked away as soon as Suho turned to him.

He was sitting alone, as his partner Baekjin was next to Baku. Suho sighed deeply; the day had left him feeling too empathetic.

“I’ll be right back.” He signaled to Sieun, who nodded.

Suho walked up to Seongje. His eyes widened when he saw him. He sighed in annoyance.

"What? Here to show off?" Seongje asked, whining like a child.

"No, I saw the little boy alone and I felt sorry for him," Suho teased, giving a sideways smile.

“Fuck you! I don't need your pity.”

Maybe not. But Seongje needed something else.

"Maybe," Suho replied. "Look, I'm still really mad at you. But I don't want to fight anymore."

Seongje gradually released his defensive posture.

"So? Shall we become friends?" Seongje teased, his voice getting higher.

"No," Suho replied, rolling his eyes. "Let's call a truce. I know you care about Sieun, and I won't stop your friendship. Just don't try anything funny."

Sieun didn't need to tell him anything. Of course, even with all his tough-guy attitude, deep down he was still a kid willing to forgive his friends. Suho understood that, even if complicated, his relationship with Seongje was still important to him.

"Okay, whatever," Seongje replied, pretending not to care.

Suddenly, Beomseok appeared beside him.

“Suho, do you have—”

His gaze landed on Seongje, the smile replaced by a frown.

"Why are you talking to that guy?" he asked, crossing his arms.

"I miss you too, Beom-Beom," Seongje teased, waving his hand.

Beomseok's face turned completely red. He coughed, struggling to even respond.

"Ew! Don't call me that!" He ordered, backing away from Seongje as if he were a contagious plague.

Suho chuckled, watching the interaction between the two. Perhaps Seongje wouldn't be a concern for a while.

“What were you going to ask, Beomseok?”

"Well, I forgot my bug spray. I was going to ask if you had any." Of course, the rich kid wouldn't get along with bugs.

But the only thing Suho bothered to bring was his notebook to write the lyrics for his song.

“Sorry, I didn't bring one.”

"Hey Beom-Beom, I brought it," Seongje said, smiling as he repeated the terrible nickname.

"Seriously, shut up, man!" Beomseok replied, blushing again. "But yes, I'll take the bug spray."

Suho returned to his friends, letting them finish their conversation. He sat down next to Sieun, who was eating peacefully.

"Suho, thank you so much for talking to Beomseok." He signed, genuinely moved. "You're a good person. You're the best boyfriend ever."

His heart raced. And then Suho realized that some jerks like Yeongbin and Hyoman simply deserved to be beaten. But maybe people like Beomseok and Baekjin needed understanding.

And as long as they didn't cross the line, Suho would forgive them with open arms. He ruffled Sieun's hair, smiling.

“No, you're the best boyfriend ever.” He signed.

And then Sieun hugged him, those same warm, gentle arms. Suho squeezed back, not wanting to let go. He had a perfect view of his friends, who had never felt so light.

Our broken relationships can never be fixed. But we can still build new ones.

Chapter Text

Group: WEAK HEROES! (LEADER SUHO)

Gotak (Demon)

Suho, finish these lyrics NOW!!

Baku (Squire)

Dude, we have a week to rehearse!

Juntae (Angel)

Look, we don't want to rush you. It's just that we don't have much time :(

Sieun (King)

Would you like me to visit your house?

Suho's heart raced. What? Sieun, in his house? Meeting his grandmother? Seeing his messy room, the broken floor, the crumbling ceiling… No. Suho couldn't allow such nonsense.

Suho (The Great)

What?

No! I'm going to finish it, no one comes here!

He looked at his notebook. The lyrics were still incomplete, and having his friends there to help him wasn't a bad idea. But this was his responsibility; everyone completed their assignments except him. It was humiliating.

Besides, he was hesitant about showing his house to others, especially Sieun. It was a matter of pride, as stupid as it was. No one wanted their wealthy boyfriend to see the shack you called home.

Baku (Squire)

Wait, good idea!

Let's go to Suho's house and help him.

Gotak (Demon)

True, let's finish these lyrics already!

Juntae (Angel)

Will this help you, Suho?

Suho (The Great)

No, don't come!

You don't even have my address

Sieun (King)

I'll ask Yeongi

Damn it! Yeongi wouldn't hesitate to send his address. Suho sighed deeply, accepting defeat. Maybe he was freaking out over nothing, but the idea of Sieun in his room still worried him. Well, not just because of his destroyed house.

They hadn't even had time at camp, but here? He could kick everyone out and be alone with Sieun in his room. Just the two of them. His face heated, a warm sensation spreading down his legs. Fuck, no.

The lyrics were more important than any perverted idea. He wouldn't even have time to think about it, since he'd be focused on his task. Still, he should at least relieve himself to avoid any embarrassment.

“Suho!” Yeongi shouted.

She entered his room without asking. Suho placed the pillow between his legs, his face heating up even more. The girl gave him a questioning look before grimacing in disgust.

"You don't know how to knock, do you!?" Suho shouted back, avoiding eye contact.

Yeongi crossed her arms, keeping the same expression of disgust.

"I should tell Sieun about this, he'd love to know," She teased, clicking her tongue. "How disgusting!"

Suho threw his pillow at her, hitting her square in the face. She stumbled backward, her hair a tousled mess, strands flying everywhere.

"You'll see what I'll do to Sieun in this room, brat!" He shouted, holding back his laughter.

“Yuck!” Yeongi complained and ran from the room.

At least he had his privacy back.

Suho sighed deeply. Curse the moment he'd opened his mouth. Now all he could think about was Sieun, in his bed. Come to think of it, he'd never seen him shirtless. Sieun remained modest even in the 104-degree heat of the camp. What was his body like?

He shook his head, pushing away his profane thoughts. Focus. Focus on the music, Suho, that's all that matters right now.

He picked up his cell phone, having an idea for the group meeting.

Group: WEAK HEROES! (SUHO LEADER)

Suho (The Great)

Okay, you guys can come

But come at night, and bring meat!

Let's have a barbecue!

Baku (Squire)

Fuck, that's it!

I knew I could count on you, man.

Gotak (Demon)

Seriously?

You guys will eat and forget to finish the song.

Baku (Squire)

Don't ruin it, Gotak

Juntae (Angel)

I think it's a great idea, Suho

Everyone is stressed, I think it's good to relax a little.

Gotak (Demon)

Said it all

Suho (The Great)

And you, Sieun? Is everything okay with you?

I know that going out at night can be dangerous.

Sieun (King)

I'm going to ask Beom for help

But I'll be smart, that idiot Yeongbin is here tonight

Suho swallowed hard. He'd taught Yeongbin a lesson the day of the camp, but he knew him well. That guy wouldn't give up on tormenting him, and even if Sieun had kicked his ass, Yeongbin was the type to play dirty. If he were weaker than Sieun, he'd find another way to beat him.

Suho (The Great)

If it's too difficult, stay home.

Don't take risks

Sieun (King)

And miss the chance to see your home?

Not even dead

Suho rolled his eyes. His cheeks heated, and a chill in his stomach. The selfish part of him also hoped Sieun would come to his home. He still felt a certain insecurity, but the idea of sleeping in the same bed with him was irresistible.

I'm going to lose my mind.

It was already night before Suho managed to calm down. He was in the backyard, preparing the grill. His stomach was rumbling, eager to eat every morsel of meat his friends would bring. Not to mention the soju, which his grandmother would allow them to drink even if they were underage.

After all, she understood the desires of youth.

"I'm so excited to meet your friends, honey," his grandmother commented, looking outside.

Unlike Sieun's, Suho's house had no protection except a fence, with a gate in the middle that could easily be jumped over by a burglar. Luckily, there was nothing attractive enough about his house to tempt anyone to break in.

"You'll love meeting his boyfriend," Yeongi teased.

"Hey! I haven't told her yet," Suho complained, upset at missing the opportunity to break the news.

His grandmother's eyes widened. A small but meaningful smile spread across her lips. She placed her hands on Suho's face, squeezing his cheeks affectionately.

"You have a boyfriend? Oh my God!" Her smile widened, her dentures becoming more visible.

"That's right," Suho replied, his face flushed. "And he's… Amazing, you're going to love him, Grandma."

And Suho didn't need to be psychic to know that. Sieun might be a tough kid, but deep down, he was a kind and understanding person. His grandmother would see the kindness in his eyes the moment she saw him, and that was the kind of person she loved.

“What is he like?”

"What's the rush? You're going to meet him today," he said, further piquing her curiosity.

"I hope he's treating my grandson well," She said, finally freeing his cheeks.

Suho nodded. Despite all his stubbornness, Sieun was still a protective brat who attacked anything that might pose a threat to Suho. It was adorable, and a little scary, too.

"He's going to treat Suho sooooo well today," Yeongi teased.

Suho felt like he was going to catch fire. That damn brat! His grandmother gave him a questioning look, innocent enough not to understand her granddaughter's implications.

"What does that mean? Are you doing something special today?" She asked, placing her palms together.

Suho gave Yeongi his best murderous glare, and Yeongi responded by flipping him off. He was destined to be around uneducated brats.

“No, ignore Yeongi. She's just talking nonsense.”

Why did she bring that up? Man, I had already forgotten!

His heart raced, unwanted memories from earlier flooding his mind. He barely had time to recover before he saw his friends walking to the gate. It was unnerving to have a perfect view of them.

"Suho! Open up here, bro!" Baku knocked on the gate, not at all embarrassed by shouting so loudly.

Suho obeyed, using the key to open the gate and let his friends in. Each of them carried at least one bag. Suho licked his lips; he could already smell the meat.

“Good evening, Mrs. Ahn,” Juntae said, bowing to his grandmother.

Baku and Gotak quickly followed suit, giving their own much more awkward bows. Sieun bowed too, sweating nervously. Suho held back his laughter; Sieun was taking this barbecue more seriously than necessary.

"Well, there's no need to be so formal. You can call me Grandma." Despite her humility, Mrs. Ahn was more than happy to be treated with such respect.

His friends nodded excitedly, before looking over at the grill in the corner of the yard.

"Okay, I'll prepare the meat!" Baku announced, running off without even waiting for an answer.

"Wait a minute!" Gotak complained, chasing after him. "I'll help too!"

The idiots nearly fell over each other, fighting over who would show off at the barbecue. Juntae rolled his eyes, smiling fondly.

"I'll make sure they don't destroy anything," he said, following his friends much more slowly and politely.

His grandmother watched them, giving a satisfied smile.

"Your friends are so cute," she complimented Suho, ruffling his hair.

Suddenly, her gaze fixed on Sieun. He was still standing in the same spot, unsure of what to do. Suho stood beside him, holding his hand to calm him. Sieun sighed in relief, approaching him.

"Why are you so quiet, dear?" His grandmother asked, her gaze curious.

"Grandma, this is Sieun," Suho introduced him. "He's my boyfriend, and he's deaf."

Sieun's face turned completely red. He looked at Suho indignantly, as if it were absurd to give such news to an elderly woman. But contrary to Sieun's expectations, the woman didn't give him a disappointed look.

Mrs. Ahn smiled broadly, her heart swelling with pride. She approached Sieun, returning his bow.

"You're such a lovely boy. Can you understand me, dear?" she asked, the affection momentarily replaced by concern.

Sieun nodded. His expression was shocked, as if the idea of someone being kind to him was still unbelievable. Suho looked away, not wanting to be distracted.

It was a happy moment for Sieun, and that was all that mattered. But Suho couldn't stop thinking about his family. About the people who deprived him of something as basic as communication, to the point where Sieun was surprised anyone cared about understanding him. It was important for him to understand Sieun; always would be.

"Is Suho being nice to you?" his grandmother asked.

Sieun tried to hold back his laughter, while Suho didn't even hide his indignation.

“Grandma!”

"What's wrong? You're so agitated, you might be scaring him," she accused. Ironic, since earlier she'd been worried that it was Sieun who wasn't being nice to him.

She had no idea how dangerous that supposedly adorable boy was.

"Don't worry, Suho is very good to me," Sieun signed.

Suho didn't even hide his smile. Sieun wasn't much of a word-user, but recently he'd been expressing himself much more freely.

“You may not believe it, but he just said I'm amazing.” Suho boasted, slightly exaggerating Sieun's words.

His grandmother gave him a suspicious look.

"Well, looks like I'll have to learn that language," she said, smiling at Sieun. "Just to make sure Suho isn't lying."

Sieun put his hand over his mouth, more than satisfied with Mrs. Ahn's sharp words directed at her grandson.

"Hey!" Suho complained. "I'm the most honest guy in the world."

"So tell Sieun what you did today!" Yeongi teased, a devilish smile on her face.

Suho's cheeks burned. His brain—without his permission—began to revisit what he'd done in the bedroom. That same desire, the longing to have Sieun in his bed…

"Don't listen to her!" he begged desperately. "She's making things up."

Sieun crossed his arms. He and Yeongi shared a knowing look, as if the story wasn't even news to him. That brat only looked innocent, but he was a ticking time bomb. Suho would kill Yeongi if she had told Sieun anything.

"Why? Don't you want your wish to come true?" Sieun teased, batting his eyes seductively.

Suho swallowed hard. Sweat dripped down his palms, which clutched the air, trying to touch something else. I'm so screwed.

"You know what? I'm going to help the boys with the barbecue." Suho ran away, leaving Yeongi and Sieun laughing, and his grandmother even more confused.

Those two loved to torment him.

Everyone sat around the table, already helping themselves to whatever was within reach. Suho piled his plate high with meat, burning his tongue as he savored the freshly grilled pieces.

Baku and Gotak fought over the pieces of meat, while Juntae ate as if he were in a five-star restaurant. Sieun just stared at the table, making no effort to eat like the others.

Apparently, that was Suho's job now. He grabbed a few pieces of meat and wrapped them in lettuce. It was a perfect wrap. He approached Sieun, bringing it to his mouth.

“Now say aaahhh.” He ordered.

Sieun barely reacted, but the rest of the table fell silent for the first time since the barbecue began.

“Did you wash your hands?” Sieun signed.

Of course, that was his biggest concern.

"Eat it now, it was made by your boyfriend." He smiled, knowing he had already won the battle.

Sieun reluctantly opened his mouth, but his eyes remained glazed. Suho refused to be embarrassed, shoving the wrap into his mouth in front of everyone. Sieun pulled it out with his tongue, licking his lips after chewing.

Baku and Gotak howled like animals, pushing Suho's shoulder harder than necessary. Suho, on the other hand, became even more embarrassed, staring at the table, which couldn't possibly make fun of him. It was stupid, but shame prevented him from looking at Sieun.

His boyfriend didn't even bother, just kept eating, taking some of the meat from Suho's plate. His crotch was getting warm again. No, don't think about it, Suho, he's just eating.

Suho began to scarf down the meat, eating as quickly as he could. He needed to distract himself. As if hearing his prayers, his grandmother suddenly stood up from her seat.

“I'm going to turn on the radio; we need music.”

His friends celebrated, jumping up and down like a bunch of kids.

"That Mrs. Ahn sure knows how to liven up a party!" Baku praised, stealing the last of Gotak's meat.

"Hey! You damn thief!" Gotak complained, turning to his boyfriend in despair. "Juntae, aren't you going to help me?"

"Sorry, Tak, you're so cute when you're angry," he complimented, hiding his mocking laugh.

Gotak's cheeks flushed, but he didn't complain. Suddenly, an invasive and far from innocent curiosity invaded him.

How intimate are they? Have they ever... done that?

Suho shook his head, pushing such thoughts away. It wasn't his business, but perhaps asking Gotak how he felt would make things more comfortable between him and Sieun. Maybe he'd stop being so anxious about the idea of increasing their intimacy.

"Hey, that's from my time!" His grandmother shouted, distracting him.

The song playing was "What'd I Say" by Ray Charles. He was his grandmother's favorite musician; Suho danced to his compositions before he could even speak. That's where his good taste and his passion for rock and roll came from.

"Suho, come dance!" His grandmother tugged on his arm, forcing him to stand up. She swayed her hips excitedly. "Come on, don't just stand there!"

“That's right, rock Suho!” Yeongi teased.

His friends waited anxiously, amused smiles plastered across their faces. Suho swallowed, heat building in his cheeks. He prepared to deny it, being the spoilsport teenager. But one look from Sieun—shining with anticipation—was enough for him to relent.

"Okay, I'll show you how a real dancer does it!" he said, receiving applause from his euphoric friends.

Suho began to sway his hips along with his grandmother, dancing in a way he hadn't done in a long time. It was awkward, strange, but also incredible. He remembered being just a child, imitating his grandmother's steps.

He remembered the promises, the ones he'd made, that one day his grandmother would be the one listening to him. That it would be his songs on the radio. And she never doubted his ability.

“I know, my love. And I’ll be there, at your first show.”

His eyes grew moist. But it was too happy a moment to cry. Suho danced harder, guiding his grandmother, who became more and more agitated, as if she, too, had gone back in time.

His friends didn't watch him for long. Yeongi was the first to stand up, stealing their grandmother for a dance. Baku followed her, swinging his arms so hard he nearly hit Suho in the face. Gotak followed soon after, competing with Baku to see who had the worst dance. Juntae, despite his shyness, joined them, dancing more restrainedly.

Everyone was laughing, bumping into each other like a bunch of idiots. Suho stopped suddenly, missing someone. He glanced at the table, finding Sieun sitting in the same spot. Suho walked over and sat next to him.

"What's wrong?" he signed, curious as to the reason for his sudden shyness.

Sieun took a deep breath. He looked at their friends, dancing happily around Suho’s grandmother.

“Nothing… Your grandmother is very kind,” Sieun praised.

It was sincere, but it wasn't what he was thinking. Something was bothering him, and Suho wanted his honesty.

“She is. Want to tell me what's bothering you?”

“No. But I will.” He replied.

Suho almost laughed at his sincerity. It relieved him to know that Sieun wouldn't hide things from him, even if it was awkward to talk about.

“Sorry, Suho.” He apologized, only making Suho more confused.

“Why?”

“I'm jealous of you,” he confessed.

Suho didn't know what to say. His heart sank, a sudden sadness washing over him. Sieun didn't need to explain why he felt this way, but Suho waited for him to finish. He wanted Sieun to feel comfortable enough to tell him anything.

“Your grandmother is amazing, and so is Yeongi. You have a good family, and they care so much about you. I envy that.”

Sieun's eyes filled with tears. He tried to wipe his face, clearly embarrassed by the situation. All Suho wanted was to hug him, to cry with him. But he knew that would only embarrass him more.

Suho took off his coat and placed it over Sieun, hiding his face. His huge eyes stared at him, still brimming with tears.

"Let's go inside," he signaled, knowing Sieun preferred privacy when it came to conversations like this.

He stood up, keeping his arm around Sieun's shoulders. He made sure the boy's back was to the rest of the group, who were still dancing without noticing anything amiss.

"Hey!" Suho shouted, getting their attention. "We'll be right back!"

Baku and Gotak started howling again, like the idiots they were. Yeongi whistled suggestively while Juntae lectured them all, ordering them to stop their teasing.

He was probably the only one who knew something was wrong, given his closeness to Sieun. It was a different kind of intimacy than Suho had with him, but he knew it was just as important.

Then Suho signaled a thank you, being responded to by a you're welcome from Juntae.

Suho closed the door as soon as they entered the room, just to be safe. He led Sieun to his bed, sitting beside him. He waited for him to calm down in silence, enjoying the comfort of the soft mattress.

It took a few minutes for Sieun to stop crying.

"Do you feel better?" Suho asked.

Sieun nodded. He sniffed, holding Suho's wrist.

"I'm not that emotional," he stated, determined to maintain his tough guy image.

Suho rolled his eyes.

"I told you it's okay to cry." He ruffled Sieun's hair. "Do you want to talk about it?"

“No. I want to talk about your song.”

Suho shrugged. He snorted; of course, Sieun wouldn't miss this opportunity. He took out his notebook, opening the page where he'd sketched his lyrics. He handed it to Sieun, prepared for his judgment.

Sieun read for a few seconds, without showing any reaction. He nudged Suho's arm, handing him back the notebook.

"I liked it. Why can't you finish it? " He asked, pulling his chin up to look at him.

Suho swallowed. The song. Think about the song.

“It’s just… Cliché, predictable.” He crossed his arms. “The typical chase your dreams, except everyone already said that.”

Suho was cliché and predictable. That wasn't a problem, but he wanted to be more than that. To make his lyrics more original, innovative. It was disappointing to think that anyone could have written that. His friends expected better.

"I don't know, I think I'm out of inspiration." He picked up the notebook, unsure of what to do with it.

Suho had always been creative, but when it came to this assignment, his mind went blank. Maybe he was just bad with words. That's why he never got good grades in Korean, though not even in math.

Not because he was dumb, just lazy.

Sieun shook his shoulder, losing his patience.

"Want me to inspire you?" He signed, their thighs touching.

It wasn't a bad idea. Sieun was an artist too, and he knew all about writer's block. But how could anyone else inspire him? Suho had listened to every kind of music since entering the competition, and even that hadn't helped. Was Sieun truly that miraculous?

"Look, you can try," he agreed, slowly moving his leg away. "But I don't know if you'll be able to do it."

His hand was shaking, but Suho maintained the same mischievous smile. He took a deep breath, resting his hands on his thighs. What the hell was going on? Sure, he was a hormonal teenager, but this was too much.

Sieun looked at him curiously. He braced his hands on the bed, crawling between Suho's legs. Shit, what is he thinking?

Suho moved to get up, but Sieun placed both hands on his knees, stopping him. His movements were feline, his gaze provocative. He knew perfectly well what he was doing, and Suho wasn't sure he was ready for it.

"What are you trying to do?" he asked. He tried to move away until he realized he was already leaning against the headboard.

His grandmother and his friends were there, and it was terrible timing. But God, Suho didn't know how much longer he could wait.

“Inspiring you.” Sieun signed confidently.

He unbuttoned Suho's coat, lingering his fingers on each button. He kissed his lips, savoring the sweetness that contrasted with his appearance. Suho finished taking off his coat, tossing it aside. It didn't matter if it landed on the floor or the bed.

Sieun touched his neck, bringing their bodies closer. He sat on Suho's lap, keeping his knees forward, resting next to his thighs. Suho brought his hands to Sieun's waist, kissing him harder.

Sieun put his hands on the hem of his shirt, trying to pull it up.

"You're in a bit of a hurry, aren't you?" Suho smiled mischievously.

He broke the kiss, swiftly ripping off his shirt. Sieun barely gave him time to breathe before colliding their mouths again. Apparently, Suho wasn't the only one eager for this moment.

This time, it was Suho who began removing Sieun's coat. Unlike him, it was slow and delicate. Sieun rolled his eyes at his gentlemanly gesture, stopping their kiss to toss the coat out of his way. The only thing preventing Suho from seeing his chest was the barely there white shirt.

He took a deep breath, touching the hem of his shirt as if it were made of glass. Sieun watched him silently, keeping his hands to himself. Suho removed his shirt, and Sieun did little more than help him, leaving most of the work to him.

His body was beautiful. The folds, the soft belly hidden by all those clothes. It matched perfectly with his cheeks, big enough to pinch. Suho ran his hands over his body, exploring every detail he'd never had the pleasure of seeing.

He grabbed Sieun's waist. He rested his chin on his stomach and looked up. Sieun was sweating, strands of hair falling over his eyes. His face was flushed, but his expression was satisfied.

“You're beautiful,” Suho said.

And there was no more beautiful sight in the world. Sieun cupped his face, his hands as warm as the rest of him. Suho wanted to taste him.

And so he did. He licked Sieun's stomach, kissing his skin. He pulled him down, laying him with his back on the bed. On top of him, Suho continued tasting him, reaching his chest.

Suho stripped off his shorts, leaving only his underwear. He was vulnerable, and yet he'd never felt so secure. He grabbed the hem of Sieun's pants, gently pulling them off. Sieun guided his hands, savoring every touch.

Suho didn't even care where he'd thrown so many pieces of clothing. He had a perfect view of Sieun's legs. The thick thighs, the wide hips, the toned calves. It was selfish of him to take all the most beautiful things in the world for himself.

But Sieun's gaze was uncertain. Was he as nervous as Suho?

"What's wrong?" he whispered, worried.

Sieun took a deep breath. His hands were shaking, and he struggled to make the signs.

“I'm worried. What if you don't like my body?”

Suho couldn't believe it. He had been blessed with the possibility of seeing someone as beautiful as Sieun, and this was what he was thinking?

“Sieun. There's nothing I don't like about you. Your body is beautiful. You are beautiful. You are beautiful.”

Suho would repeat those words, shout them for the world to hear. He wouldn't shut up until Sieun believed him.

"It's not true," Sieun denied. "I know what my mother says."

Suho struggled not to get angry. From what little he knew of Mrs. Yeon, he already disliked her. But on top of everything else, could she insult her own son's body? Suho hated that family more and more.

"It doesn't matter what your mother says. What matters is that you're happy," he said, touching Sieun's face. "And I think every little bit of you is beautiful."

Sieun's eyes glistened with unshed tears. He touched Suho's hand so gently that it was unnoticeable.

"Me too. I think you're beautiful, too." Sieun signed, bringing Suho's hand to his eyes.

Suho wiped away his tears. They were both crybabies.

"Sieun. Back then, you said I have a good family," he recalled. "But that's not true. We have a good family. This family is yours too."

Sieun pulled Suho close, giving him a passionate kiss. Suho would give the world to that boy if he could. But for now, the only world he could give was his own. And he knew Sieun would take good care of it.

Sieun grabbed his hair and guided Suho's head to his neck, as if he knew exactly what to do. Suho followed his lead. He licked and kissed Sieun's neck, enjoying the pleasure of hearing the boy moan a few times.

I hope they listen to music for a long time.

Suho's chest rose and fell. He breathed heavily, catching his breath. Sieun laid his head on his shoulder, as tired as he was. He didn't know how long they'd been in that room, but his friends were smart enough not to knock on the door.

“Holy shit.”

Holy shit. Suho had thought a lot about how he would lose his virginity, but he never thought it would be like this. Awkward, a little weird, but comfortable and safe. Sieun was the one with the most experience, and he guided him through the process.

This only heightened Suho's excitement. Those hands guiding him, while those sharp eyes stared into his. It was chilling, his entire body feeling hot and heavy. Suho wouldn't trade it for anything.

“I… Did I do well?” He asked, embarrassed.

He wasn't the insecure type, but he needed to be sure. Sieun must have had high standards, since he was picky about everything.

“The best.” He signed, and he wasn't lying.

“Better than Seongje?” He smiled provocatively.

Sieun threw the pillow at him, hitting his nose

“Hey!”

"This is my first time too, silly," Sieun replied, pinching his nose.

It hurt. Not that it bothered Suho. Wait? Did he say "first time"?

“What?” He couldn’t even hide his surprise. Sieun nodded, his cheeks flushing. “But you seemed so experienced!”

Sieun was quick and assertive. He gave orders and moved as if it were all part of his daily routine. How could someone act like that on their first time?

"I did my research." He smiled, touching Suho's cheek.

Suho laughed outrageously. Of course, the genius would have already done his research and made sure they knew what they were doing. Sieun didn't allow himself to make mistakes, even in his moments of pleasure. Suho brought his hand to his cheek, returning his touch.

“Good thing one of us did our research.”

Suho would have preferred Sieun to be freer next time, but it was a relief that he made sure everything was safe. Suho was often emotionally driven, so having a companion like Sieun brought him balance.

"So, are you feeling inspired?" Sieun ran his hand over his chest, massaging his abdomen.

"Fuck yeah," he replied, his hair standing on end from the gentle touch. "Do you want to know what the song's going to be called?"

Sieun nodded eagerly.

“Silent song.”

"Gotak, you always get the rhythm wrong!" Suho complained.

"I wouldn't miss if you didn't go off-key on the same note," Gotak retorted.

Ever since Suho finished the song's lyrics, the band had been training furiously. The competition was less than a week away, and Suho needed to secure victory.

“Off-key? I'm not off-key, it's on purpose!

Suho walked over to Gotak's drum kit, but Baku stopped him. He and Juntae shared the same weary look; they were tired of listening to the same argument for hours.

"How about a break?" Yeongi suggested.

Suho asked her to watch his rehearsals and learn the song as well. She helped them and gave them some tips on how to improve the overall composition of the song. Because she knew how to play and sing the guitar like Suho, she picked up the rhythm and melody very quickly.

"I agree," Baku said, putting away his bass. "I'm exhausted."

“Maybe we can get something to eat.” Juntae leaned on his keyboard, breathing heavily.

Taking a snack break didn't sound like a bad idea. Suho hadn't exactly been patient these past few days, but anxiety was clouding his mind. He'd said he didn't care about the competition anymore, but that was a lie. He really cared.

The door opened. Sieun walked in alongside Beomseok. They were carrying a few T-shirts, attracting the attention of the rest of the group.

Suho didn't even have time to ask. Sieun opened one of the shirts, exposing its front. There was a drawing of a guitar wearing a flowing superhero cape. Beneath it were the words "Weak Heroes." Suho's eyes watered.

"He was dying to finish these shirts today," Beomseok commented, handing them out to the rest of the band. Even Yeongi got one.

The boys squealed excitedly, praising Sieun nonstop. Baku was the first to dress it, not minding going shirtless in front of the others. It fit him perfectly.

“Sieun… Thank you so much, I don't even know what to say.” Suho's throat closed up.

“Put it on!” Sieun signaled.

He jumped up and down with excitement, his eyes shining. Suho obeyed, taking off his shirt and putting on the new one. The fabric was comfortable, and the design seemed to glow up close. How had he gotten so lucky? Sieun thought of everything. He always did.

“I made one for myself, too.” Sieun took the only remaining shirt from Beomseok’s arms.

He put it on over his head, too modest to show his belly like the others. At first, Suho thought it was exactly like his own. But then Sieun turned around. "AHN SUHO" was written in the middle, large enough for anyone to read, no matter how far away they were.

Sieun smiled, pleased with the display. How could that boy be real? Suho pulled him close, hugging him tightly. Sieun relaxed, adjusting to his embrace. They fit perfectly.

Suho released him, stroking the unruly strands of his hair.

"You're the best boyfriend ever. That’s the best gift I could ever receive." Suho wiped away the tears.

They'd cried enough. From now on, he wanted to share smiles with Sieun. Warm afternoons, accompanied by a good soju, cuddling, and watching the sunset. All while a song by Weak Heroes played in the background.

Now that he had met Sieun, Suho couldn't imagine his future without him.

“You are.” Sieun signaled. “Follow me.”

Suho didn't question it. He followed Sieun outside, away from the rest of the group. There were so many trees, all so full of leaves that they seemed incredibly alive. The day was beautiful.

“What was it?”

“Well… There’s one important thing about sign language that I haven’t told you yet.”

Suho was excited. He loved learning sign language; it was never too much. He had an entire notebook dedicated to it, where he jotted down any important information he didn't want to forget.

“What thing?” He asked, curious.

"There's something called a personal sign. We choose a sign to refer to someone; it's called baptism," he explained.

Suho had already done some research on the subject. He was eager to finally receive a signal from Sieun, but he didn't want to rush it. He hoped it would be a cool signal, even if it referred to his physical characteristics.

"Usually, we give the signal based on the first thing we notice. Do you know what the first thing I noticed about you was?" He smiled mischievously, waiting for his answer.

“My good looks?” Suho teased.

Sieun rolled his eyes, giving him a light shove.

“No. Your smile.”

It was an answer Suho hadn't expected. His smile had never even been noticed, let alone praised. Not like his face, or his muscles. But knowing it was something as pure as his smile that Sieun had noticed filled him with happiness.

“Why? My smile is so common.”

"Suho, you forced a smile during our first entire conversation." Suho felt his cheeks heat up.

It was true. He didn't know what to do, so he forced a smile and made awkward conversation, hoping Sieun wouldn't be scared. It was funny to think about it now, and how their relationship had changed.

“Hey, I was trying to be nice.” He defended himself.

"That's the point," Sieun replied. "It made me realize how kind you are. You forced a smile, even though you were nervous because you were more concerned with my comfort than your own.”

Suho didn't know what to say. He thought that upon their first interaction, Sieun had simply found him weird. He was agitated, talking nonsense, and shaking all over. And yet, his smile and kindness were all Sieun noticed.

"So, I've decided on your signal." Suho straightened his posture anxiously. "Kind smile."

He couldn't have chosen a better name. Suho had never felt so seen. It was as if Sieun saw into his soul, far more captivated by it than any physical characteristic. Sieun knew how to touch his heart.

“Sieun…”

"Suho, I'll be there at the competition," he stated confidently. "I'll be up front, cheering you on. I'll repay your kindness."

"You don't have to repay me anything, Sieun." His eyes burned. "As long as I see you there, I know I'll win the competition."

Sieun cupped his face, bringing their lips together. The kiss was slow and gentle, but it didn't last long. Suho pulled away just to hug him. He felt his warmth, the same gentleness Sieun saw in him.

Suho scattered kisses across his face, graced by Sieun's laughter. And then he listened. He heard something he thought he'd never hear.

“I love you.”

It was the first time he heard Sieun's voice. Deep, lovely, and comforting. Suho stared at him in disbelief. Sieun's face was flushed.

He imagined him practicing those words out loud, taking risks by saying them to Suho, trusting that he would never make fun of him. Suho smiled big, his heart beating so fast it felt like it was about to jump out.

“I love you, too.”

It was the day of the competition. The band practiced to exhaustion, making sure everything sounded perfect. His grandmother had given him a million good wishes, and Suho knew she was waiting for him in front of the audience.

Ganghak's performance was ending, and they were next. They waited for their cue backstage. Suho took a deep, trembling breath.

"Very well." He turned to his friends, who were just as apprehensive as he was. "I know we're scared, but we've trained hard for this."

The boys gathered around, forming a circle. Suho was proud. He thought he'd never make it, but there they were. Because he was lucky enough to meet people, friends who supported his dream, and who took risks with him.

"I just want to say that... Regardless of today's outcome, I will always be grateful to you." His friends smiled, their nervousness temporarily replaced by pride. "Thank you for trusting me, for being part of this dream."

“And now, the Eunjang school band, Weak Heroes!”

That was their cue. There was nowhere left to run.

“Suho, thank you for inviting me to your band.” Juntae smiled.

"Me too, even though you were a pain in the ass about it," Gotak teased.

“Seriously, man. You're the one who saved us.” Baku added.

And there, Suho faced the people who had changed his life. They were as moved as he was. As happy and as broken as he was. And Suho knew that whether he won that competition or not, he would never regret it.

He stretched his hand forward. His friends followed suit, placing their hands on top of his.

It's now or never.

“Weak!”

“Heroes!” Everyone answered him together, raising their hands.

They parted the curtains, entering the stage. The audience was enormous, filling the entire space. His grandmother and Yeongi stood at the front, wearing the t-shirts Sieun had made. Their eyes were filled with pride, and Suho had never felt so loved.

But something was missing. His eyes scanned the entire audience, but he still couldn't find him.

Where's Sieun?

“Suho, I’ll be there for the competition.” That’s what he said. Except he wasn’t. Suho’s heart raced, but not in a good way.

That's when he noticed. Beomseok, running frantically through the audience, pushing people out of his way until he got as close to the stage as possible.

“Suho!” He shouted.

It was enough. That was all Suho needed to hear to know something was wrong. He practically jumped off the stage, leaving his friends and a confused audience behind.

“What?

“It's Sieun! I left home, and when I was coming back, I got a message from him. He told me not to come home today under any circumstances.”

Suho's stomach churned. The competition no longer mattered, and what he'd worked hard for months no longer mattered. But he didn't want to let his friends down. So he made a decision.

He walked over to Yeongi, holding her shoulders.

"Yeongi, you have to play in my place!" He ordered desperately.

"What?" Yeongi's eyes widened. "Suho, no! This is your dream!"

"It's our dream!" He replied. "Please, Yeongi, I need you!"

Yeongi nodded reluctantly. She would do anything for him.

“Please be careful,” She asked, her shoulders shaking.

“I will, I promise.”

And then Suho walked out alongside Beomseok.

He ran as fast as his legs would allow him.

Suho and Beomseok arrived at the mansion on their motorcycles. Beomseok was the first to get off, standing in front of the gate.

“Don't appear on camera, otherwise they won't open it.”

Suho nodded, stepping away so he wouldn't be seen. His body trembled, dark thoughts racing through his mind. They weren't too late; everything would be fine. Oh, Jinwon was cruel, but not crazy.

After a few seconds of waiting, the gate opened. Suho burst through the door without asking for permission. There was only one employee, that damned security guard. Suho tugged at the collar of his shirt, veins bulging.

“Where is he?” he asked, his voice low and menacing.

Beomseok came right behind him. The security guard laughed mockingly, not at all concerned about the teenagers trying to intimidate him.

“Go home, kid.” He replied.

"I don't think you understand." Suho tightened his grip. "If you don't tell me where he is, I'll report you. I'll destroy your life."

Beomseok held up his phone, trying to prove his point.

"We can report all this to the police." Beomseok pointed to his phone. "My father might get away with it, but you? He'll blame you, and you’ll spend the rest of your life in jail."

The security guard swallowed. He knew Oh Jinwon wouldn't protect him if they were caught. He sighed, removing Suho's hands from his collar.

“Okay. I'll take you to him.” He agreed.

The security guard went upstairs, leading them to a locked room. He took out his keys, unlocking the door. Suho pushed past him, rushing in desperately. The sight shocked him.

My God.

The room was completely dark. It resembled a basement, dirty and poorly maintained. There were cobwebs and fallen pieces, but only one thing caught Suho's attention. The wall, covered in paintings—not just any paintings—it was him, next to the band. The Weak Heroes, singing and playing. Sieun was leaning against it, fitting perfectly among the drawings.

He hugged his knees, his body trembling. His eyes shed silent tears, wetting his bruised face. Suho had never been so furious.

“You found me.” Sieun smiled.

Suho's heart sank. He ran to Sieun, taking off his coat and placing it on his shoulders. He helped him up, guiding his body gently. He wanted to kill Oh Jinwon, make him regret it. But he needed to ensure Sieun and Beomseok were safe.

“I'm going to take you two to my house.” He said, determined.

Suho pulled Beomseok and Sieun to his side, ready to get them out of that hell. Beomseok would never be beaten again, never again be repressed by someone who was supposed to protect him. Sieun would never be trapped again; he would be free to express himself anywhere.

Suho would make sure of that, even if it killed him.

They made it to the front of the stairs, but Jinwon blocked their path. Suho wanted to punch him, to put that disgusting old man behind bars.

“Get out of the way.” He ordered.

It was a kind of courage he didn't even know he possessed. When it came to the people he loved, Suho would sacrifice everything to save them. Jinwon laughed, shrugging.

"You brat," he scoffed. "Those are my children. If you leave here with them, I can charge you with kidnapping, you know?"

"Fuck you," he replied confidently. "I'm going to get them out of here. You're a horrible person, and I'm going to put you in jail!"

Jinwon laughed in disbelief. Suho took a few steps forward, keeping Beomseok and Sieun behind him. He was so close to Jinwon that he could feel his breath. He wanted to make him stop breathing.

Control yourself.

But Suho didn't want to control himself. He didn't calculate his moves, didn't think about the consequences. He wanted to save his friends, to be the reason for Sieun's smile. He didn't want to let anyone else make him suffer.

Suho grabbed Jinwon, punching him square in the nose. He watched the blood fall, staining the shiny, perfectly clean floor. Now, everything in that house was dirty. He didn't hear the screams for him to stop, the desperation in his friends' voices. He didn't look back; Suho kept punching.

Until his shoulders were grabbed tightly. Suho couldn't move his arms. And then he felt it.

Suho fell.

His body was pushed by Jinwon, plummeting down the stairs.

All he heard was the door creaking and a woman's scream.

Mrs. Yeon?

And then everything went dark.

Chapter Text

Cheongah's guitar was beautiful. Its brown tones complemented each other. As charming as her smile. Sieun remembered the first time she played it for him. 

“Come on, touch the strings.” She ordered. 

Sieun didn't understand why. He couldn't listen anyway; what difference did it make? Was Cheongah teasing him? But she wasn't mean. No, Cheongah was the kindest person Sieun had ever met. 

“But I can't listen.” He signed. 

Cheongah laughed, as if he were lying. He wasn't, and she knew it. 

She took Sieun's hand, guiding his small fingers to the guitar strings. Sieun followed her lead, still wary. But then he felt it. A chill, a creepy sensation as he plucked at the strings. What was it? 

He pulled away, startled by the sudden sensation. It was strange to hear something for the first time. Cheongah laughed at his reaction.

"That's called vibration. We deaf people can hear music that way," She signed with a sweet smile. 

Sieun's eyes widened. He could hear music too! His parents were wrong. 

"Want to try again?" Cheongah took his hand, bringing it closer to the guitar. 

Sieun nodded. This time, his fingers lingered on each string. The vibrations were different: some high, some low. It was like learning to communicate all over again. 

"You know, Sieun." Cheongah patted his arm. "You're a genius boy. Don't let the world hold you back."

She seemed to have experience with that kind of feeling. 

"Things will be harder for you than most. There will be people who will try to bring you down." She stroked his hair. "But there will also be people willing to lift you. Keep them close." 

Cheongah's gaze lingered on the dresser. There was a framed photo. It was her, younger, wearing her school uniform. A boy held her waist, smiling at the camera as he made the peace sign. 

“Who is he?” Sieun asked curiously. 

"This is Yichan." She was more than happy to talk about him. "He's my boyfriend. He saved me." 

Saved? How could anyone save another person? Was Cheongah in danger? Sieun didn't want to pry, so he didn't ask any more questions. 

"He seems kind," he signed. Yichan's smile was so dazzling that it reflected in the camera. 

“He's the kindest person I know.” Cheongah had never smiled so much. 

She was similar to Sieun. Serious, reserved, and a woman of few words. But to that guy, she became a different person. She smiled, as if she already had everything she needed. Sieun envied that. 

"How did he save you?" he ventured to ask, biting his curiosity. 

"Well, he was the first person to reach out to me. He came when I was completely alone." She plucked the guitar strings, enjoying the vibrations. "He risked his life for me." 

Risking oneself for another person required a different kind of courage. A love capable of achieving the impossible. Did such a love even exist? Sieun hoped so.

Would he ever have someone like that, too? Someone who would love him, despite his flaws? Someone who would risk themselves for him? 

Sieun also wanted to be saved. 

But would anyone want to save him?  

“Congressman Oh Jinwon pushes a teenager down the stairs!”

That was the news that spread throughout the city. But Sieun didn't even have time to celebrate. 

He was still trapped in that moment. Suho, falling. Suho, hitting every step of that damned staircase. All his fault. Because Suho decided to save him. Sieun shouldn't have spoken to Beomseok. He only wanted to protect him, but he should have known his brother would go after Suho. 

Suho, who got hurt because of him. 

His stomach churned. The last few hours had been a complete blur. He remembered his mother screaming and running to Suho. Maybe she was the one who had called the ambulance. Sieun couldn't say.

He sat there, waiting for news, for the doctor who was treating Suho. Was he okay? He'd hit his head; obviously not. But how bad was it? It couldn't have... killed him, right?

Was Suho dead? Because of him? 

Sieun was selfish. He shouldn't have wanted to be saved. People who interfered in his life met cruel fates. How could he? He dragged Suho into his problems without considering the consequences. 

He should have fallen down those stairs. Jinwon should have pushed him. Not Suho. Not the person who deserved a peaceful life. Would he ever find peace? Or would Sieun have destroyed that possibility? 

The silence was broken by hurried footsteps. Mrs. Ahn and Yeongi came running in, followed by their bandmates. 

Sieun couldn't look at them. How could he? Mrs. Ahn's grandson was in a hospital bed because of him. They were a happy family until he arrived and ruined everything. He had no right to even speak to them.

"Where's Suho?" Mrs. Ahn looked around the hospital. 

The front door opened. A doctor came out, the same one who had entered the room with Suho. Sieun stood up, his heart pounding. His hands dripped with sweat, which trickled through his fingers, white from his clenching. 

Mrs. Ahn and Yeongi approached the doctor. Their steps were fragile, fear evident in their uncertain eyes. Unfortunately, the doctor's face brought them no comfort. 

"I'm so sorry." He offered his condolences, which were nothing new to his work. "Patient Ahn Suho has fallen into a coma." 

“Oh my God!”

Mrs. Ahn fell to her knees, hitting the cold hospital floor. Her tears stained her skin, already scarred by her years of suffering. And Sieun had caused her the worst suffering of all. 

"My grandson! Help my grandson, please!" Her screams echoed throughout the hospital. But there was nothing that could be done. 

Fate, cruel as always, had already made its decision. 

"Will he wake up? Please, will he?" Yeongi asked, desperate in a way Sieun had never seen before. 

She bent down, keeping her hands on her grandmother's back. Her tears soon fell, her cries joining the countless others in the hospital. 

Sieun hated hospitals. Or maybe he just hated the sense of loss they caused. 

He didn't know if the band had won the competition. But the result didn't matter. His friends were devastated, staring at the door as if waiting for Suho to appear. Because after all, what was that band without him? 

Sieun should leave. He didn't belong there. 

And so he did, leaving more than just Suho behind.

The next few days were a whirlwind. His mother managed to get him and Beomseok out of the mansion and into another house. She and Jinwon were in the process of divorcing, and his political career was getting worse. 

Suho was saving his life even when he couldn't do anything. Thanks to security cameras and his mother's testimony, Oh Jinwon was being investigated for child abuse. It was a delicate situation for Beomseok, but he decided to testify. 

In just a few days, their lives were turned upside down. It would have been perfect if Suho had been by their side. 

Jinwon screamed on the TV. The reporters around him drowned him out, pointing their microphones in the hope of getting an exclusive scoop.

"I have nothing to declare," Jinwon repeated, accompanied by a well-paid lawyer. 

Suddenly, the TV screen went black. Sieun turned to the side. His mother held the remote in her hand. She placed it on the dresser and sat down beside him. 

They hadn't really talked since that day. His mother was busy with legal paperwork, and Sieun was busy thinking about Suho. It's not like they were much of a talker in the first place. 

For Sieun, it was just an ordinary day. 

“Your friend… Did he get better?” His mother asked. 

Sieun shook his head. He hadn't heard from Suho. 

“I’m sorry.” She clasped her hands together, squeezing her fingers. 

It was their first real conversation in years. One that didn't involve Jinwon or his public reputation. No political career, no grades. Just mother and son, sitting side by side. 

“I…” She moved her hands restlessly, indecisive. “Sieun, I don’t even know where to begin.” 

And Sieun didn't know either. Because he was still angry at his mother. For ignoring him, for leaving him with that monster, for never even asking how he was feeling. But God, Sieun was so tired of the hurt. Right now, all he wanted was to be comforted by his mother's warm embrace. 

"I'm so sorry, son, for everything." Her posture, always perfect, was now slouched. "I was a terrible mother." 

Sieun's eyes began to burn. 

"I should have stayed home longer. I should have talked to you, listened to you." Her hand moved toward his hair, but stopped halfway. "I'll fix it, I promise." 

“ How?” He signed. 

How could she fix it? Everything was ruined. Their relationship had been a mess since Sieun could walk. What would they do now? They didn't even know each other well. 

"I, I don't know, but... I'm going to learn sign language." Tears fell, smudging her perfect makeup. "I'm going to go after that teacher. I'm going to bring Cheongah back!" 

Sieun couldn't hold it in any longer. He burst out. It was like being born again. The tears flowed, uncontrolled, like his feelings. He screamed, expelling everything that had tormented him for all these years. 

The hatred, the hurt, the wounds that would never fully heal. All the times Jinwon locked him in that dark room. Where he starved and thirsted, never knowing if he would ever be released. He couldn't save Beomseok, couldn't even listen to him to be sure he was still alive. 

To be sure that Jinwon hadn't killed him.

And his mother allowed it. She stood outside the house, while Sieun wondered if he would ever see the sun again. How could she fix it? Was something like this even fixable? Sieun was so angry, but he wanted it to be fixable. 

Deep down, all he wanted was for his mother to say that. To apologize, to promise to be a better mother. To stand by his side for once. 

“I'm so sorry, my love.” His mother hugged him. 

She had never hugged him before. 

Sieun buried his head in her shoulder. Hot tears stained her expensive clothes, but she didn't pull away. His mother held him tighter. She touched his hair, caressing it the way Sieun had always wished she would. 

He knew his mother had a similar childhood to his. That her parents only cared about her grades, and that they taught her independence too early. That she probably just copied their actions, including her misogynistic thoughts about herself. 

She didn't know how to hug him because her parents had never hugged her. 

Maybe it was beyond repair. They would probably never have a normal mother-son relationship. It would be awkward, challenging. And Sieun's anger and hurt would still be there. Because even if Jinwon spent the rest of his life in prison, the scars would be permanent. 

He, Beomseok, and his mother would always be affected by that man. Sieun would be afraid of the dark until his last breath. But it would get better. 

They didn't need to have a perfect mother-son relationship; that wasn't possible. But they could start over. Maybe, together, they could both learn to love. 

His mother pulled away from the hug, cupping his face. 

"I'll make sure Oh Jinwon suffers for the rest of his life. I swear." Resentment was evident in her tone and cold expression.

And after all this time, his mother sounded like herself. Not Oh Jinwon's trophy wife, not an empty shell who stood by his side. But a real Yeon, a woman who would fight for her son, even if she made many mistakes along the way.

Because there was one thing his mother wasn't.

She was not weak. 

That night, it was the first time in years that it was just the three of them at the table. Sieun sat next to Beomseok, waiting for his mother to finish dinner. And Oh Jinwon was nowhere to be seen. 

It almost seemed like a dream. 

The atmosphere was still tense due to the recent events. But Sieun could finally breathe. Beomseok must have felt the same way; Sieun had never seen him so relaxed. It was a relief that his brother was calm. 

"Sieun, I…" Beomseok broke the silence. "I'm sorry about Suho. I shouldn't have brought him that day." 

Sieun shook his head. He would never blame his brother for what happened; Sieun would do the same thing to save him if he thought he was in danger. Besides, he had a feeling Suho would come to him, even if Beomseok didn't warn him. 

" It's not your fault. Don't blame yourself, Beomseok, " he signed. " Your father is the only one to blame."

Everything would be different if Jinwon hadn't failed as a father. But while some people recognized their mistakes and changed for the better, others remained trapped in the certainty that they did the right thing. Sieun hoped people like that would die miserably. 

"It's weird, being without my father." Beomseok tapped his fingers on the table. "It's a relief, but… It feels like a lie." 

Sieun barely survived the few years he spent with that man. He couldn't even imagine Beomseok's suffering, growing up and living with him for most of his life. Having him as the only responsible adult, the one he should trust. 

It was no wonder Beomseok had such drastic mood swings. And Sieun knew that, like him, Beomseok would have to live with the trauma and scars for the rest of his life. But he was free to start over. To be himself after all this time. 

“ It really does, doesn't it?”

It might take years for Sieun to get used to not having Jinwon around. 

A burning smell filled the dining room. Sieun and Beomseok stared at each other, thinking the same thing. 

“Sieun, does your mother know how to cook?”

“ She never even made rice.”

They both got up, running to the back of the kitchen. Smoke billowed from the oven, the smell growing stronger. On the counter sat food so burned, Sieun couldn't even tell what it was. 

"Mrs. Yeon, what happened?" Beomseok approached, pulling her away from the hot oven. 

“Well, I…” She looked at the counter. “I tried to make pie.” 

Before he could stop himself, Sieun laughed. His mother looked at him in shock, but couldn't help herself either. She covered her mouth with her hand, hiding her smile. Beomseok joined in, chuckling softly. 

“ Pie? ” Sieun scoffed, pointing at his mother’s culinary failure. 

"Hey, it was my first try!" She defended herself, taking off the gloves that were too big for her hands. 

It was funny. His mother, always in an expensive dress and perfect makeup, was trying to do something as mundane as cooking. Not that Sieun was any better than her. The only thing he knew how to make was ramen, and Suho had already teased him enough about that. 

"So, it looks like we don't have dinner." Beomseok pointed at his mother's mess.

Mrs. Yeon placed her hands on her hips, unconcerned. She had already come up with a solution. 

“You know what? Let's order a pizza.”

Beomseok opened his mouth, and Sieun's eyes lit up. How he missed having a slice of pizza. At Oh Jinwon's house, he was the one who decided the menu. And he loved to make it clear to Sieun how much he should diet. 

And now, they could do something as basic as choose what to eat. It was strange to have freedom after so long. 

“I accept!” Beomseok jumped with excitement. 

“Me too!” Sieun agreed. 

His mother placed the order, and it didn't take long for it to arrive. When he saw the deliveryman on the motorcycle, Sieun ignored the weird feeling in his stomach. 

More than just eating pizza, his mother let them eat in the living room. The delicious aroma invaded Sieun's nostrils as soon as he took his first bite. He chewed on the cheese, which blended perfectly into the dough. It was so hot it almost burned his tongue, but Sieun swallowed without feeling any pain. 

Beomseok ate beside him as if it were his last meal. His eyes sparkled with every bite, as if saying, "This is so good!" without even opening his mouth. His reaction was captivating. 

His mother, on the other hand, was careful not to get her hands dirty. She savored the pizza as if it were one of her fancy dishes. 

"New updates on the Oh Jinwon case, which has shocked the country," a man's voice said from the TV. 

The three of them widened their eyes. His mother grabbed the remote, ready to change the channel. But Beomseok touched her arm, stopping her. 

“No. I want to listen,” he said, turning to the TV. 

"Apparently, Oh Jinwon is involved in several corruption cases," the reporter explained, as the evidentiary footage flashed on the screen. "After being accused of leaving a teenager in a coma and assaulting his own children, his career has been in decline. Now, with the new corruption reports, it seems the famous congressman will never recover."

Sieun couldn't help but smile. Jinwon still had a chance to walk free, but with so many accusations hanging over his shoulders? He wouldn't win back the public. After so long, making them suffer, this man was finally paying for his crimes. 

Sieun turned to Beomseok, wanting to celebrate with him. But his brother was crying. It wasn't a cry of terror—like he'd done so many times—it was a cry of relief. 

“I… I'm free.” He said, letting the tears wet his face, still marked by suffering.

Sieun went to his brother's side, hugging him tightly. He stroked Beomseok's hair, comforting him with the knowledge that they would be okay. His mother watched them, her heart breaking at having neglected them for so long. 

“I'm sorry, boys. You'll be happy now, I promise.”

She hugged them, shedding tears of relief. 

We are free.  

Group: WEAK HEROES! (LEADER SUHO)

Juntae

Sieun, it's been a while since we've seen each other. Is everything all right?

Baku

Today is his birthday, so we are worried. 

Gotak

Do you want us to spend the day with you?

Sieun sighed. He knew he wasn't exactly being a good friend. The Weak Heroes won the competition, but he didn't even congratulate them. It was unfair, but Sieun was angry that they had won without Suho. Not at the boys or Yeongi, who had only done their part, but at the circumstances that had led them there. 

It was Suho's birthday, and Sieun knew it from the moment he woke up. And all he wanted was to spend the day with him. Even if Suho couldn't celebrate with him. 

Group: WEAK HEROES! (LEADER SUHO)

Sieun

I appreciate your concern.

But I'm going to visit Suho today.

Baku

Okay, but remember we're here, okay? 

Gotak

We're at my house, you can come here later if you want. 

Juntae

We are your friends. I just want you to know that you are not alone. 

And Sieun knew it. He wasn't alone anymore, and he was more than grateful for the friends he'd made. But now, all he wanted was to be alone with Suho. 

Sieun struggled to make seaweed soup. It didn't look appetizing; he wasn't much of a cook. But it was Suho's birthday, so he deserved it. Sieun put the meal in a tightly sealed container and then stuffed it into his backpack. 

He decided to take the bus, getting off at the stop near the hospital. It was strange, being free to go wherever he wanted now. He looked at his phone, as if waiting for a message telling him to come home. But it never came. 

Sieun bumped into someone, distracted by his search for messages. He lifted his head, ready to bow in apology. But he froze in shock when he saw the person in front of him. 

Jeon Yeongbin. 

Sieun's breathing quickened. It's his fault. It's his fault; he was the one who warned Jinwon that day. 

Sieun remembered how the guy had stared at him at his house. It was strange; he hadn't tried to attack him or said anything stupid, and Sieun let his guard down. It was a grave mistake. Yeongbin had broken into his room without him knowing and found his messages in the Weak Heroes group. 

He was the one who sent them to Jinwon on the day of the competition. It was intentional; he knew it would affect Suho somehow. Precisely on the day he would perform, the day he would be recognized for his talents. 

Yeongbin ruined it all. Sieun wanted to kill him. He wanted to make him pay for what he did to Suho. For everything he did to Beomseok. But it was too risky. 

"Watch where you're going," Yeongbin said casually, without even looking at him. 

"Yeongbin, look who it is, man!" One of his friends nudged him.

Yeongbin sighed, looking at Sieun. He smiled, more than satisfied knowing the disaster he had caused. 

"Suho's little boyfriend." Yeongbin scoffed. "I'm sorry, that must be a pain for you." 

There wasn't a shred of sincerity. Sieun clenched his fists. Fighting was pointless, and besides, it was Suho's birthday. He should be his priority. Even if the idea of leaving Yeongbin in a hospital bed was more than tempting. 

No. Suho needs me now. 

Sieun just ignored them, walking straight ahead. But of course, it wouldn't be that easy. Yeongbin yanked on his backpack, throwing him back against the wall. Sieun shrugged off his backpack, more concerned about the seaweed soup than any scratches they might have inflicted. 

Yeongbin pushed his shoulder, keeping him in place. As much as Sieun was seething with anger, he just wanted to get to Suho. He was so tired of fighting. 

"Stop fucking ignoring me!" Yeongbin yelled, squeezing his shoulder hard enough to hurt. "Are you fucking deaf?" 

His friends started laughing, as if it were the funniest joke in the world. If only he had a pen…

"If he's deaf, why does he use that?" Taehoon asked, pointing to his AirPods.

"Is he lying?" Jungchan added. 

“Let's find out.”

Find out? How the hell would they find out? Sieun straightened his posture, preparing to fight. 

"Hold him down," Yeongbin ordered, remembering what happened the last time they underestimated him. 

Sieun prepared his fist, but both his arms were grabbed by Yeongbin's friends. For the first time, Sieun felt desperate. Yeongbin reached out, ripping both earbuds from his ears. A sharp pain shot through him, leaving him disoriented. 

Yeongbin leaned in, getting as close to his ear as possible. Sieun knew what he was doing, yelling in the hope of getting a reaction out of him. It wasn't new, nothing creative. It was what ten-year-olds did to him. 

Sieun should have just kicked him; he knew he was stronger than the three idiots combined. But maybe it was the hands holding him down, Yeongbin's frightening proximity, or the fact that he no longer had his earbuds. 

He couldn't move. His body froze, his breathing ragged. What were they saying? Sieun couldn't read their lips. What were they saying? He could feel every beat of his heart. Maybe he should ignore it until they got tired and left? 

Yeongbin was pulled by his hair, falling backward. His arms were released, and Sieun breathed freely. It was Seongje, tugging on Yeongbin's ear like a child. Sieun couldn't concentrate enough to hear what he was saying, but he was probably threatening the trio of idiots. 

He didn't even notice the moment they left. Sieun crouched down to his backpack, opening it and searching for the only thing that mattered. He sighed in relief. The seaweed soup was intact. He put it back, slinging the backpack over his shoulders. 

"Sieun, are you okay?" Seongje asked, approaching. 

Sieun nodded. Okay was a strong word. He wouldn't freeze like that even in front of Oh Jinwon. What the hell was that? 

"I think… It was the beginning of a panic attack," Seongje explained. "The situation with Suho is stressing you out, that's all."

“How pathetic.” He replied, disappointed. 

Sieun had easily defeated stronger opponents than Yeongbin before. Standing there like a helpless animal wasn't like him; it was incredibly irritating. Suho would be disappointed if he saw how he acted. 

"It's not pathetic." Seongje rolled his eyes. "It's human. You're not a machine; your emotions affect you."

"And since when do you have such emotional intelligence?" Sieun teased. 

It was strange. As much as he hated to admit it, Seongje had matured so much that he hardly seemed like himself. The Seongje of a month ago would still be freaking out about losing the competition. But now, he was more worried about Suho than any failure. 

"Ever since your boyfriend punched me. I think he's put my mind back together." Seongje tapped his head a few times, as if he were knocking on a door.

Sieun held back a laugh at his stupid joke. Suho had never been as attractive as he was that day, stained with someone else's blood. All to protect him. 

"Look, I was a jerk to Suho. And yet, that idiot came to me." Seongje laughed humorlessly. It was melancholic. "I just want to say, he's stubborn as hell. This coma won't stop him. He won't leave until he's sure you're safe." 

Seongje wasn't the type to say pretty things. That only made his effort to comfort Sieun more admirable. And Sieun believed his words. Suho had a different kind of stubbornness. He didn't give up on what he wanted, even when the world was against him. He fought to the end for his band, despite all the challenges in his path. Most people would have given up, but not him. 

Not his Suho. 

"Seongje, thank you. And good luck with Beomseok." Sieun winked.

Seongje's face turned red. 

“What? Hey!”

Sieun didn't even give him time to complain. He ran off, ready to find Suho. 

Suho waited for him for too long. 

The hospital was nearly empty. Yeongi waited outside Suho's room, sitting on a bench. She waved to Sieun as soon as she saw him in the hallway. 

“You came for his birthday, right?” She asked, pointing to his backpack. 

“Yes.”

"I talked to him a little. Now, I'm waiting for Grandma's turn." Yeongi pointed to his room. "Let me guess, you brought seaweed soup?"

Sieun's face turned red. He nodded slowly, embarrassed at being caught so quickly. 

"It's cute." She scoffed, but it wasn't mean. "Suho would love to eat something you made."

Sieun wasn't sure if he'd like it. He knew his cooking skills were terrible. On the other hand, Suho would eat it even if it tasted terrible, and he'd still praise Sieun endlessly. 

That's the kind of person he was. 

“Sieun, I think you should go inside.”

Sieun shook his head. He didn't want to interrupt a moment between grandmother and grandson; he should simply wait. He would feel like an intruder.

"Listen." Yeongi stepped closer, her smile fading. "Trust me, she wants you in there. You may not believe it, but you're already family." 

Sieun clenched his hands. He knew he'd already lost the battle. If Mrs. Ahn wanted him in, then he would go in even if his body begged him to stay. He placed his backpack on the bench next to Yeongi. He'd show Suho the seaweed soup later. 

He stepped carefully into the room. Mrs. Ahn was sitting, speaking softly to Suho. He was still sound asleep. Sieun had seen the same scene a million times, but his heart always ached. 

"You have to wake up soon, dear." She held Suho's hand, squeezing his fingers. "Everyone misses you so much." 

And how they did. The band didn't even want to celebrate their victory because they wanted Suho at the party. Even though they had gained some fame after the competition, they refused to perform without their leader. Deep down, everyone believed he would wake up.

Mrs. Ahn turned, noticing his presence. 

"Honey, you came." She smiled. "See, even your boyfriend is here. You have to wake up." 

Sieun couldn't understand. Why did she still care about him? Suho had only gotten hurt because of him. If Sieun hadn't entered their lives, Suho would be fine. And his grandmother could hug him, knowing he would hug her back. 

Before he could control himself, the tears flowed. 

Mrs. Ahn practically jumped out of her chair, clutching his shoulders in concern. 

"Oh my God. What's wrong, honey?" She wiped away his tears. 

Her touch was so gentle, Sieun only felt more like crying. He didn't know what to do. She wouldn't understand sign language. So Sieun decided to take a chance. 

“I-I'm sorry.” The words came out with difficulty. 

Ever since he met Suho, he'd become more confident speaking. He'd always been insecure; others would make fun of his voice every time he tried. But Suho didn't. He encouraged him, stroked his hair, and told him how proud he was. 

Was it possible to die of longing?

Mrs. Ahn's eyes also filled with tears.

"Oh my dear. It's not your fault, it's not," she said confidently. "The only one to blame is that evil man. I'm sorry for everything you've been through." 

She hugged him tightly, rubbing his back. Sieun couldn't hear, but he knew she was whispering sweet nothings in his ear. Unlike Yeongbin's scream earlier.

These people would never hurt him.

Sieun hugged her back. In that woman's arms, he felt safe. 

He imagined Suho, not as the brave guy he was, but as the insecure child he once was. When he lost his parents, he must have hugged his grandmother so tightly. Sieun couldn't even bear to see him in bed. How must he have felt? Losing his parents so young, and knowing he would have to take care of his family? 

When he wake up, Sieun would lecture him. He would tell him to take care of himself, to stop worrying so much about others. But it was useless. Meddling was second nature to Suho. And it was because of it that he was able to save so many people.

Sieun would always be proud of him, even if he feared the end his impulsiveness might bring him. 

"Honey." Mrs. Ahn cupped his cheeks. "Now that I've talked to him, it's your turn."

Sieun nodded. Mrs. Ahn petted him one last time before leaving the room. Now it was just the two of them. 

Sieun sat up. Suho looked peaceful. Not even when he slept was he so peaceful. 

“I have so many things I want to say, ” Sieun signed. “But I don’t think any of them will be enough.” 

He held Suho's hand. It was cold, the opposite of the warm hands that protected him. Sieun wanted to hold on to it, the memories. 

"I'm sorry," he said, hoping that somehow Suho could hear him. "Suho, wake up."

Sieun could only beg. He had no power to change anything. He could only pray, ask the universe that Suho would be spared. He couldn't die, not like this. He had so many dreams, so many desires to fulfill. Why was the world so unfair? Why was Yeongbin fine, while Suho suffered in a hospital bed?

Suho was so good. The kindest person Sieun had ever met.

“Suho, wake up. Please.”

Maybe outside, they were mocking his voice. But Sieun no longer cared. He would shout it to the whole world if it would reassure him that Suho would be okay. 

Suddenly, Sieun felt something move beneath his hand. He lifted his head, looking at Suho hopefully. Suho moved his fingers. 

But it didn't stop there.

Suho opened his eyes slowly, blinking as he came into contact with the light. 

Sieun couldn't hold back. He jumped on Suho, hugging him as tightly as he could. It was probably dangerous, but Sieun needed to be sure he was alive. He released Suho, staring into his open eyes. 

He woke up, he woke up! 

“Sieun…” Suho's voice came out hoarse, almost inaudible. 

Sieun nodded. He remembers me, he remembers me. But Suho's confused face began to change. His eyes widened, sweat dripping down his forehead.

“Sieun… I can't feel my legs.”

Chapter Text

“I can't feel my legs.”

Panic gripped Suho. His head was fuzzy, and he couldn't remember exactly what had happened. But nothing frightened him more than his legs. He couldn't feel them, as if they were just specters.

He tried to move his body below the waist, but it wasn't working. Nothing was working.

His panic was interrupted by Sieun, who placed his hands on his face. He was just as worried as he was, but he tried to hide his despair.

"Suho, calm down." He signaled. "I'll call the doctor. It's going to be okay, you're going to be okay."

Suho wanted to believe his words so much, but everything was too terrifying.

He couldn't have lost the use of his legs, right? Could the universe be that cruel? Would he never walk again? His heart raced.

Sieun ran from the room to get the doctor, as promised. But Suho wanted to yell at him to stay by his side. He didn't want to be alone; he didn't want Sieun to leave.

He began to feel drowsy. His eyes wouldn't stay open, no matter how hard he tried.

The doctor came running into the room.

And then everything went dark again.

When he woke up again, it took Suho a while to calm down. He lay still, listening to the doctor talk about how his life would change from now on. His grandmother sat beside him, wiping away the tears that kept falling.

"It's a reversible paraplegia," the doctor said. Suho sighed in relief, nearly fainting again. "However, it will require a lot of physical therapy. Besides, I don't think full movement recovery will be possible."

“Oh my God.” His grandmother lowered her head, hiding her face in her hands.

Suho didn't fully understand. It was reversible, but would he ever walk like before again?

"What does that mean?" he asked, his body trembling. "What the fuck does that mean?"

“Suho!” His grandmother scolded him, patting his shoulder lightly.

She couldn't even get angry, still shedding tears of relief and sadness at the same time.

The doctor wasn't even fazed by his rudeness. He should have been used to it. And Suho wasn't the type to be rude to workers, but the situation was incredibly stressful. It was the kind of thing he never thought he'd go through.

"It means you'll need assistance walking for the rest of your life," he explained, his expression still neutral. "For now, you'll need a wheelchair. And even after treatment, you'll need a walking aid. Like a cane, for example."

Suho didn't know what to say. This made no sense at all. No, he couldn't depend on anything to do a task as simple as walking. He'd always prided himself on being strong, on standing up for others. On caring for his family, on being the one who never gave up.

But now, he couldn't do it anymore. He was useless, weak. He couldn't even walk without help. His grandmother and Yeongi needed him; he had to work to support them. How would he do that now? His band needed him, Sieun needed him. It was his duty to protect them, and now he couldn't even protect himself.

"I'll give you some time alone to talk about your situation," the doctor said, leaving the room.

How could he? Deliver such terrible news, and then simply leave? It wasn't his fault, but his calm face — making it clear that nothing had changed in his life — infuriated Suho. Because, unlike him, his life would never be the same.

“Honey, I'm so glad you're awake.” His grandmother placed her hands on his face.

She was as shaken as he was by the news. And yet she smiled, making sure he knew how relieved she was.

But Suho wasn't at all relieved. Tears fell, burning his bruises from the fall.

"I'm so sorry, Grandma!" he begged, as his grandmother's warm hands dried his tears. "I'm so sorry I disappointed you!"

His grandmother's eyes widened, disbelieving his words. Her tears were still streaming, much more composed than Suho's.

"What makes you think you disappointed me?" She stroked his hair.

"I promised! I promised I'd take care of you. And now, you'll have to take care of me." Everything hurt. His body, his head, his soul. "I have to protect you. Yeongi depends on me, too. And now I'm weak!"

Suho couldn't bear it. He couldn't bear to imagine the looks of pity he would receive. He didn't want his family to worry, his friends to become more cautious, or Sieun to lose confidence in his strength. God, he didn't want anything to change.

"Don't ever say that again!" his grandmother ordered. "You're not weak. You're the strongest boy I know. You stood up to that man, all to protect your friends."

Memories slowly returned. He remembered the rage, the urge to kill Jinwon with his own hands. That sudden courage, the desire to protect others, was what drove Suho to that hospital bed. And yet, he had no regrets.

He would do it all over again if he were sure that Beomseok and Sieun would be safe.

"Suho, listen." His grandmother forced him to look her in the eye. "It's not your job to take care of anyone. You can't be responsible for everyone."

Suho knew that was impossible. But he loved being useful, taking care of the people he cared about. Without it, he wasn't even sure who he was. That was his role, the person he'd been since his parents died.

Who was Ahn Suho when he wasn't playing his guitar? Who was Ahn Suho when he wasn't taking care of anyone?

These were questions he still had no answers to.

"Suho, you've never disappointed me," his grandmother affirmed. "Whatever happens now will never change how I see you. You'll always be my boy, strong and brave."

His grandmother hugged him. It was just like that time at his parents' wake. His grandmother was suffering even more than he was; she had lost her son. And yet she hugged him tightly, comforting him instead of herself.

Suho hugged her back. He loved her so much.

Suho noticed someone else at the door. It was Yeongi, her face wet. It was his sister, his beloved little sister.

"Suho, don't you remember what you told me?" Yeongi had never sounded so fragile. "Protection isn't a sign of weakness. Letting us take care of you will never make you weak."

Yeongi ran to him, hugging him and his grandmother. Suho cried, letting his tears stain his family's shoulders. He leaned on them, as they had insisted he do. He still hated the idea, but he knew those two would help him without question.

And as much as he hated to admit it, Suho needed help.

His friends were waiting to enter the room. But first, Suho insisted that only one person enter.

Sieun sat in the chair beside her bed. They both fell silent, unsure of what to say.

“I’m so glad you’re awake!” Sieun signed. “When I saw you in this bed, I thought…”

He didn't need to finish speaking for Suho to understand. He felt bad, imagining the distress Sieun must have felt.

"I'm so sorry, Suho. This is all my fault," he said, as if afraid he wouldn't be forgiven.

It was absurd. It was a lot of people's fault, but Sieun wasn't one of them.

"Sieun, this isn't your fault," he stated determinedly. "I'm more than happy I stopped that man. I don't even want to know what would have happened if Beomseok hadn't warned me."

Sieun shook his head.

“It wasn't your problem. None of it was.”

“But it was. Any problem you have is mine too.” Sieun sniffed.

“Then I'm the one who's going to help you now.”

Suho hesitated. He was a hypocrite, he knew, but in this state, he would only give Sieun more trouble. He didn't want their relationship to be like this.